Technical Reference - KYOCERA Document Solutions

PRESCRIBE Commands 

Technical Reference

Notice 

General Infomation 

We shall have no liability or responsibility to customers or any other person or entity with respect to any liability, loss or 

damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by equipment sold or furnished by us, including, but not limited 

to, any interruption of service, loss of business or anticipatory profits, or consequential damages resulting from the use or 

operation of the equipment or software. 

NO LIABILITY WILL BE ASSUMED FOR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY IMPROPER INSTALLATION. 

Notice on Software 

SOFTWARE USED WITH THIS PRINTING SYSTEM MUST SUPPORT IT’S NATIVE MODE (PRESCRIBE) OR ONE OF 

ITS EMULATION MODES. 

This manual, the computer programs in the printing system referred to in this manual, and any other copyrightable subject 

matter sold or provided with or in connection with the sale of the printing system, are protected by copyright. All rights are 

reserved. Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this manual, the computer programs, or any other copyrightable 

subject matter without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita Corporation is prohibited. Any copies made of all or part of 

this manual, the computer programs, or any other copyrightable subject must contain the same copyright notice as the 

material from which the copying is done. 

The information in this manual is subject to change without notification. Additional pages may be inserted in future editions. 

The user is asked to excuse any omissions or errors in the present edition. 

No responsibility is assumed if accidents occur while the user is following the instructions in this manual. No responsibility 

is assumed for defects in the printing system’s firmware. 

Regarding Tradenames 

PRESCRIBE is a registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation. KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation. 

Diablo 630 is a product of Xerox Corporation. IBM Proprinter X-24E is a product of International Business Machines Corporation. 

Epson LQ-850 is a product of Seiko Epson Corporation. HP LaserJet, Hewlett-Packard, PCL, and HP-GL/2 are registered 

trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. Other product names and company names that appear in this manual 

are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. 

The Kyocera printing systems use PeerlessPrint5 to provide the HP LaserJet compatible PCL5 language emulation. 

PeerlessPrint5 is a trademark of The Peerless Group, Redondo Beach, CA 90278, U.S.A. 

© Copyright 2005 - 2008 KYOCERA MITA Corporation 

All rights reserved 

Revision 4.51 2008.6 

Typeface Trademark Acknowledgement 

All resident fonts in the printing system are licensed from Bitstream Inc. and Agfa corporation. For font license information 

for each model, refer to the User’s Manual. 

Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG. Century Schoolbook, Stymie, and Cooper- 

Black are trademarks of Kingsley-ATF Type Corporation. ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC ZapfChancery, ITC ZapfDingbats, 

ITC Souvenir, ITC Benguiat, and ITC Bookman are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation. Revue is 

a trademark of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation in the U.S., Letraset Canada Ltd. in Canada, and Esselte Letraset Ltd. elsewhere. 

Agfa Japan License Agreement Guidelines for the Resident Fonts 

1. Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as 

well as the UFST Software. 

2. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and versions 

of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) solely for your own customary business or personal purposes 

at the address stated on the registration card you return to Agfa Japan. Under the terms of this License Agreement, 

you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printing systems. If you need to have access to the fonts on 

i

ii 

more than three printing systems, you need to acquire a multi-user license agreement which can be obtained from 

Agfa Japan. Agfa Japan retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to 

you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement. 

3. To protect proprietary rights of Agfa Japan, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary information concerning 

the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access to and use of the 

Software and Typefaces. 

4. You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You agree 

that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original. 

5. This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License 

may be terminated by Agfa Japan if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not remedied 

within thirty (30) days after notice from Agfa Japan. When this License expires or is terminated, you shall either return 

to Agfa Japan or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested. 

6. You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software. 

7. Agfa Japan warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with Agfa Japanpublished 

specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship. Agfa Japan does not 

warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions. 

THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES 

OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY, ARE EXCLUDED. 

8. Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Agfa Japan in connection with the Software and Typefaces is repair or 

replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Agfa Japan. 

IN NO EVENT WILL AGFA JAPAN BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, OR ANY OTHER INCIDENTAL 

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY ABUSE OR MISAPPLICATION OF THE 

SOFTWARE AND TYPEFACES. 

9. New York, U.S.A. law governs this Agreement. 

10. You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written consent 

of Agfa Japan. 

11. Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data 

and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. 

Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in 

FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2). 

12. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE 

BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR REP- 

RESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE 

UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY. BY 

OPENING THIS DISKETTE PACKAGE, YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS 

AGREEMENT.

Introduction 

This manual contains information needed to use the firmware features provided by the 

Kyocera printing system. Among these features is PRESCRIBE, a highly accessible, 

human-readable command language that makes it easy for programmers to take full 

advantage of the printing system’s capability. 

The PRESCRIBE command language allows to: 

• extensive manipulation of fonts and character code tables 

• use the ability to draw objects by constructing and manipulating paths including 

ellipses and round boxes, etc. 

• execute macros including carbon-copy macro 

• control external optional units (feeders, etc.) 

You can access the features of PRESCRIBE from any of the seven emulation modes. 

These modes include: 

• Hewlett-Packard LaserJet emulation 

• Hewlett-Packard HP 7550A (plotter) emulation 

• IBM Proprinter X24E (24-pin dot matrix printer) emulation 

• Epson LQ-850 (24-pin dot matrix printer) emulation 

• Diablo 630 emulation 

• generic line printer emulation 

• KPDL (Apple LaserWriter II NTX (NT) emulation) [an option on some models] 

iii

iv 

About the Technical Reference manual 

Notice 

Conventions 

The Technical Reference manual is organized into eight chapters. The first four chapters 

of this manual constitute an tutorial introduction to PRESCRIBE. The rests mainly concern 

advanced utilities and setups: 

Chapter 1 Introduction to PRESCRIBE introduces some basic concepts of PRESCRIBE. 

Chapter 2 Graphics Tutorial outlines the graphic handling features of PRESCRIBE. 

Chapter 3 Macros introduces program macros, a concept that makes it easy to define 

sequences of PRESCRIBE commands, then call them repeatedly whenever they are 

needed. 

Chapter 4 Fonts provides how to manage font selection and font samples. 

Later, Chapter 5 Barcodes explains the barcode printing capabilities of the command 

language. 

Chapter 6 Permanent Parameters explains how to reprogram the printing system’s firmware 

for customization. 

Chapter 7 Emulation gives notes on the printing system’s various emulation modes. 

An Index is also provided at the end of this manual. 

Most PRESCRIBE commands operate in the same way on all of these models. However, 

on particular models, some commands are irrelevant. Model-dependent differences are 

noted at the pertinent locations in this manual. 

• italic is used for emphasis and also refers to a related chapter or section in this manual 

or another related document. 

• fixed-pitch means text or commands that you must type exactly as it appears.

Table of Contents 

General Infomation...................................................................................................................................i 

Introduction.............................................................................................................................................iii 

Introduction to PRESCRIBE 

Format of PRESCRIBE Commands ....................................................................................................1-4 

Basic Concepts......................................................................................................................................1-4 

Edge Limits ..................................................................................................................................1-4 

Margins ........................................................................................................................................1-4 

Page Orientation and Direction ....................................................................................................1-5 

Coordinate Systems .....................................................................................................................1-7 

Text Positioning ...........................................................................................................................1-7 

Character Spacing ........................................................................................................................1-8 

Paths .............................................................................................................................................1-9 

Logical Page and Physical Page ..................................................................................................1-9 

Command Parameters .........................................................................................................................1-10 

Numeric Parameters ...................................................................................................................1-10 

Character Strings ........................................................................................................................1-11 

Upper and Lowercase Letters .....................................................................................................1-12 

Special Parameters .....................................................................................................................1-13 

Graphics Tutorial 

Drawing Lines ..............................................................................................................................2-2 

Drawing Boxes and Circles ..........................................................................................................2-6 

Drawing Filled Shapes..................................................................................................................2-9 

Path Mode Graphics............................................................................................................................2-16 

Path ............................................................................................................................................2-16 

Drawing Lines.............................................................................................................................2-18 

Miter Limit .................................................................................................................................2-21 

Drawing Arcs and Curves ..........................................................................................................2-24 

Drawing Complex Curves ..........................................................................................................2-26 

Closed Paths ...............................................................................................................................2-29 

Filled Areas ................................................................................................................................2-30 

Clipping Rectangle .....................................................................................................................2-32 

Printing with Character Paths ....................................................................................................2-33 

Raster Graphics ..................................................................................................................................2-34 

Raster Data Compression Formats .............................................................................................2-34 

Commands for Printing Raster Data ..........................................................................................2-35 

Printing Raster Data....................................................................................................................2-37 

Changing the Printing System’s Imaging Model .......................................................................2-37 

Saving and Restoring the Graphics State ...................................................................................2-39 

Macros 

Examples of Macros .............................................................................................................................3-3 

Fonts 

List of Fonts ..................................................................................................................................4-2 

KPDL Fonts ..................................................................................................................................4-4 

Substituting a Bitmap Font ..........................................................................................................4-6 

v

vi 

Font Selection....................................................................................................................................... 4-7 

Font Selection by PRESCRIBE Commands ............................................................................... 4-7 

Placement of Font Commands ................................................................................................... 4-11 

Creation of New Symbols and Characters .........................................................................................4-12 

Symbol Set.......................................................................................................................................... 4-13 

International Characters.............................................................................................................. 4-14 

Selecting HP Symbol Sets .......................................................................................................... 4-14 

Barcodes 

PDF417 Symbol Description...................................................................................................... 5-10 

Printing a Two-dimensional Barcode......................................................................................... 5-12 

Limitations of Two-dimensional Barcode.................................................................................. 5-13 

Macro PDF417 ........................................................................................................................... 5-14 

Creating a Macro PDF 417 Representation................................................................................ 5-14 

Permanent Parameters 

Interface-dependent Parameters ................................................................................................... 6-2 

Interface-independent Parameters ................................................................................................6-5 

Emulation 

Automatic emulation sensing ....................................................................................................... 7-3 

General Information on Emulation .............................................................................................. 7-3 

Line Printer Emulation (Mode 0) ........................................................................................................ 7-3 

IBM Proprinter X24E Emulation (Mode 1) ........................................................................................ 7-4 

IBM Proprinter X24E Control Codes........................................................................................... 7-6 

Diablo 630 Emulation (Mode 2) ........................................................................................................ 7-12 

Diablo 630 Control Codes ......................................................................................................... 7-14 

Epson LQ-850 Emulation (Mode 5) .................................................................................................. 7-21 

HP LaserJet Emulation (Mode 6) ...................................................................................................... 7-33 

LaserJet Fonts............................................................................................................................. 7-35 

LaserJet Symbol Sets.................................................................................................................. 7-37 

Resource Protection.................................................................................................................... 7-40 

Switching the Print Resolution................................................................................................... 7-42 

HP LaserJet Reset State.............................................................................................................. 7-43 

LaserJet PJL................................................................................................................................ 7-43 

PJL Syntax Comparison ............................................................................................................. 7-66 

HP 7550A Emulation [KC-GL] (Mode 8) ......................................................................................... 7-96 

Basic ........................................................................................................................................... 7-96 

KC-GL Environment Options .................................................................................................... 7-97 

Plotter Status Information ........................................................................................................ 7-102 

Device-Control Instructions ....................................................................................................7-106 

Fonts and Symbol Sets in KC-GL ............................................................................................ 7-107 

Summary of KC-GL Instructions ............................................................................................ 7-111 

KPDL Operators............................................................................................................................... 7-115 

Communication with the Printing System................................................................................ 7-115 

KPDL Summary ....................................................................................................................... 7-116 

KPDL Error Messages.............................................................................................................. 7-139 

KPDL Printable Area................................................................................................................ 7-140 

Index

Chapter 1 

Introduction to PRESCRIBE 

PRESCRIBE is the native language of the Kyocera printing systems including copiers 

(collectively referred to as printing systems hereafter). Consisting of easily remembered 

commands, such as ‘SLM’ for Set Left Margin, and ‘BOX’ to draw a box, it gives you 

the capability to control line and character spacing, adjust margins, change fonts, position 

text, draw graphics, and print multiple copies of each page. PRESCRIBE also gives 

freedom to control device settings including selection of paper source, output stack, and 

finishing operations such as sorting, stapling, etc. 

Most application software controls printing systems by means of codes and escape 

sequences that are built into the program and are not directly visible to the user. In contrast, 

PRESCRIBE commands are made of ordinary characters that you can type in yourself 

and see on the computer screen. This makes it easy for you to customize printing and 

add features that may not be supported by your application. 

This chapter presents an introduction to PRESCRIBE starting with an explanation of the 

commands by which you start and exit PRESCRIBE. It is followed by an introduction to 

some basic concepts of PRESCRIBE, then a discussion of the command format and 

command parameters.

Chapter 1 Introduction to PRESCRIBE 

Entry and Exit 

1-2 

The printing system can be thought of as having a multiple personality. When its power 

is switched on, it performs the normal printing system functions of printing out files and 

other data. Application software can control the printing system using one of the seven 

emulations. When the printing system uses an emulation, it is said to be printing in emulation 

mode. 

PRESCRIBE is an additional mode of operation in which the printing system understands 

data it receives not as text to be printed, but as commands to be executed. The 

PRESCRIBE mode is available at any time during operation from any emulation mode. 

The initializing string that takes the printing system from the usual text-printing mode 

into the PRESCRIBE mode is !R!. The command that returns it from the PRESCRIBE 

mode to the emulation mode is EXIT;. These transitions are diagramed in the figure 

below. 

Figure 1. 1. Mode Transitions 

The printing system’s emulation mode can be permanently set by the FRPO (Firmware 

RePrOgram) P1 command. See Chapter 7 for details. The printing system is factory-set 

to emulate the Hewlett-Packard LaserJet. 

The example below shows how these transitions can be used in a file. The lines beginning 

with !R! are PRESCRIBE commands. Note how each block of commands begins 

with !R! and ends with EXIT;. These sections are not printed; instead, they set margins, 

select three different fonts, and draw a box around one line of text. The remainder of the 

file consists of ordinary text, and is printed out as shown in the figure on the next page.

Note 

Figure 1. 2. Text Including PRESCRIBE Commands 

!R! RES; SLM 1; STM 1; SPD 0.03; FTMD 13; 

SFNT "Helvetica-Bd"; EXIT; 

WELCOME TO WINDFALL NATIONAL PARK 

!R! SFNT "Times-Rom"; EXIT; 

The park entrance is located in the rolling hills of 

the Northern Woods, a forested area abundant in deer, 

elk, squirrel, rabbit, opossum, lynx, wolf, and other 

wildlife. It is the park’s most popular area, featuring 

excellent trails and campsites for hiking and backpacking. 

!R! BOX 3.4, 0.55; FSET 1s5B; EXIT; 

Hikers should avoid this area during hunting season. 

!R! SFNT "Times-Rom"; EXIT; 

Hikers in search of high-altitude adventure will find 

Mt.Baker a rewarding... 

Figure 1. 3. PRESCRIBE Example 

The previous example contains five sequences of PRESCRIBE commands. The basic 

configuration of a PRESCRIBE command sequence is: 

!R! command; command; ...; command; EXIT; 

There is a limit to the number of commands you can include between the initial !R! and 

the final EXIT;. The initial !R! must be followed by a space, and each command must 

end with a semicolon. 

The use of PRESCRIBE commands in document files is conditional on the behavior of your 

word processing software. Some word processing programs add control codes that interfere 

with PRESCRIBE. If you cannot control software in this way, try using a non-word processing 

mode (ASCII text function, for example) of the software. 

1-3


Format of PRESCRIBE Commands 

Basic Concepts 

1-4 

Edge Limits 

Margins 

The basic format of a PRESCRIBE command is: 

• • • or • • • • (command name) parameter, ..., parameter; 

The command names generally consist of three or four letters. In most commands, the 

parameters must be followed by commas. The last parameter is always followed by a 

semicolon. Some commands (RES, for example) have no parameters. In this case, the 

command should be followed immediately by a semicolon (RES;). 

The length of a single PRESCRIBE command is limited to 255 characters, from the first 

letter of the command name through the final semicolon. Commands longer than 255 

characters are not executed. 

Spaces, carriage return codes, and line feed codes are generally ignored in PRESCRIBE 

command sequences. These characters are not generally counted in the command length. 

(Exception: Spaces are not ignored in quoted character strings.) To improve readability, 

place at least one space before each command or place each command on a separate line. 

This section discusses a few basic concepts concerning how the printing system prints on 

the page. These concepts are: 

• Edge limits 

• Margins 

• Coordinate systems 

• Text positioning/Character spacing 

• Paths 

• Logical page and physical page 

• Page orientation and direction 

The printing system cannot place print on the outside edges of the paper. The edge limits 

to which printing is possible are located 5 mm inside the edges of the paper; or 6 mm 

(5mm in landscape orientation) from the left edge and 4 mm from the top of the paper in 

HP LaserJet emulation. Refer to the figure Edge Limits and Margins on page 5. 

The edge limits adjust automatically to the size of the paper cassette (although not to the 

size of manually fed paper). The edge limits can also be set to various standard sizes by 

the SPSZ (set paper size) command, or by the equivalent HP LaserJet commands. In HP 

LaserJet emulation, the edge limits slightly vary according to the page orientation (as 

also shown in Edge Limits and Margins on page 5). 

The top and left margins are set in centimeters or inches in relation to the top and left 

edge limits of the page. The bottom and right margins can also be set as a distance from 

the top and left edge limits, or they can be set in terms of page width, page length, or 

lines per page.

Figure 1. 4. Edge Limits and Margins 

Portrait Orientation 

Edge limits in HP emulation 


When the printing system passes the bottom margin while printing text, it prints the page 

and feeds to the next page. Spacing is carried over, so if the bottom margin does not 

occur at an exact number of lines, excess space is printed at the top of the next page. 

If you are using word-processing software that sets the margins automatically, you 

should not set them with PRESCRIBE commands. 

Page Orientation and Direction 

Edge limits in HP emulation 

Landscape orientation 

The term page orientation refers to the direction in which text is placed on the page. In a 

vertical direction, it would be called portrait and a horizontal direction would be called 

landscape. The term print direction, which follows this section, refers to the orientation 

of the logical page’s coordinate system with respect to the current page orientation. 

1-5


1-6 

Page Orientation 

Print Direction 

Changing the page orientation automatically adjusts the margins so that they remain the 

same distance from the four edges of the paper. If the printing system cannot make these 

margin settings (for example, if the left margin would be to the right of the right margin), 

it sets the margins to the edge limits. 

Fonts are automatically rotated to match the current orientation. 

Figure 1. 5. Page Orientations 

Portrait Orientation 

Left 

margin 

Top 

margin 

Bottom 

margin 

Right 

margin 

Left 

margin 

Bottom 

margin 

Right 

margin 

The print direction can be modified in 90° increments. These page orientations are 

referred to as portrait, landscape, reverse portrait, and reverse landscape. Changing the 

print direction rotates the page coordinate system in the same manner as changing the 

page orientation. However, in this case, portrait refers to the print direction in which the 

axes of the coordinate system are oriented in the same direction as for the currently 

selected page orientation. 

Changing the print direction also changes the margins to maintain the same printable 

area as prior to the change. The current position (the physical location in which the next 

character will be printed) and its coordinate values remain the same as in the previous 

print direction. 

Changing the print direction also changes the orientation of any subsequent raster graphics 

and PRESCRIBE vector graphics. However, it does not affect the orientation of any 

subsequent HP-GL/2 graphics. (HP-GL/2 graphics can only be rotated with the HP-GL/2 

RO command or the LaserJet orientation command.)

Figure 1. 6. Print Direction 

Portrait print direction 

Current Point 

Left 

margin 

Current point 

Left 

margin 

Right margin 

Right margin 

Coordinate Systems 


With PRESCRIBE, positions on a page are described in terms of X and Y coordinates. 

The origin of the coordinate system (the position at which X and Y both equal 0) is 

located at the intersection of the top margin and the left margin. Values of X greater than 

0 indicate positions to the right of the origin, and values of Y indicate positions below the 

origin. See the figure on page 10. When the top and left margins are changed, the physical 

position of the origin changes accordingly. 

Text Positioning 

Top 

margin 

Reverse portrait print direction 

Top margin 

Bottom margin 

Bottom margin 

Landscape print direction 

Current Point 

Left margin 

Right margin 

Current point 

Right margin 

Top 

margin 

Reverse landscape print direction 

Top margin 

The printing system always keeps track of its current position on the page. The current 

position can be thought of as a cursor that moves as data is printed. At any instant, the 

Left margin 

Bottom margin 

Bottom margin 

1-7


1-8 

cursor indicates where the next character will be printed or the next graphics will be 

drawn. (The printing system does not have separate cursors for text and graphics.) 

Text and graphics can be positioned at arbitrary locations on the page by moving the cursor 

with positioning commands (MAP, for example). 

Figure 1. 7. Text Positioning 

TITLE 

!R! BOX 1, 1; MRP 2, 1; 

EXIT; LABEL 

BOX 1, 1; 

Character Spacing 

MRP 2, 1; 

Carriage Return 

Landscape Orientation 

Space after EXIT; Cursor ends here 

Each character is printed within an individual cell as shown below. The character sits on 

a line called the baseline. Characters such as y descend below the base line. 

In some character fonts, all the character cells are the same size, so the number of character 

positions per inch is fixed. In other fonts, the size of character cells is proportional to 

the size of characters. These proportional fonts produce text that is easier to read. However, 

in order to align the right margin, you must use software that supports the printing 

system’s proportional spacing.

Paths 

Figure 1. 8. Character Spacing 

Font height 


A path is a set of straight and curved line segments. Paths can be open, as in the case of 

lines, or closed, as in the case of rectangles, circles, or any fully enclosed area of any 

shape. The segments may be connected with one another, or they may be disconnected. 

Further, a path may contain multiple closed subpaths, representing several areas, and 

they may intersect themselves in arbitrary ways. 

Paths can be used to draw lines and curves or specify boundaries of filled areas, including 

the outline of a character. 

Paths are explained more fully in section Path Mode Graphics on page 16. 

Logical Page and Physical Page 

Baseline 

The logical page defines the limits of the coordinates within which text and graphics can 

be located. There are two types of logical page, as shown in the following figure. The 

standard mode logical page imposes limits on specifiable coordinates. The coordinates 

have no limitations for the path mode logical page. 

1-9


1-10 

Figure 1. 9. Logical Page and Physical Page 

Standard Mode 

Command Parameters 

y 

(0,0) 

With the standard mode logical page, any position specification that lies outside of the 

logical limits is automatically adjusted to bring it within the limits. For example, the 

page on the upper left in the preceding figure shows what happens if you attempt to draw 

a diagonal line from below the bottom edge limit to a point to the right of the right edge 

limit when the standard mode logical page is used. The fine line represents the line as 

specified by the user; the thick line shows what is actually drawn by the printing system. 

With the path mode logical page, coordinates are not adjusted even if they fall outside of 

the edge limits. In this case, as shown in the lower right page in the preceding figure, the 

line is defined by the specified starting and ending points, but parts falling outside of the 

edge limits are clipped. 

Numeric Parameters 

x 

Path Mode 

= Logical page 

−x x 

Many of the PRESCRIBE commands use number values to specify parameters. For 

example, numbers are used to specify distances in inches, centimeters, points, or dots. 

Negative numbers are also allowed. 

−y 

y


For computer code values beyond four decimal places, the fifth and subsequent decimal 

places are ignored. 

Examples: 

Number output by computer Number used by printing system 

1234.1234 1234.1234 

-1234.1234 -1234.1234 

0.123456 0.1234 

Some commands have angle parameters. Angles are specified in degrees. (The printing 

system does not recognize radians). The printing system rounds off all angles to the nearest 

integral degree. Only angles in the range from -360 degrees to 360 degrees are recognized. 

Angles less than -360 degrees are ignored, and angles greater than 360 degrees are 

treated as the remainder of the angle divided by 360. 

Examples: 

Angle output by computer Angle used by printing system (degrees) 

90 90 

-90 -90 

90.4 90 

90.5 91 

-400 Ignored 

The printing system does not accept the exponential notation used in some computer languages. 

For example, do not specify 1E-3 instead of 0.001. 

Character Strings 

PRESCRIBE text-printing commands have parameters that consist of character strings. 

A character string is any string of characters enclosed by quotation marks or apostrophes, 

such as shown in the example below. 

TEXT ’You are about to enter PRESCRIBE.’; 

PRESCRIBE allows character strings to be enclosed in either single quotation marks 

(apostrophes) or double quotation marks. The following example has exactly the same 

meaning as the one above. 

TEXT "You are about to enter PRESCRIBE."; 

The beginning of a character string is recognized when the first single or double quotation 

mark appears. If the beginning quotation mark is a single quotation mark, the string 

does not end until the next single quotation mark. If the beginning quotation mark is a 

double quotation mark, the string does not end until the next double quotation mark. 

Whatever comes in the middle of a character string, including commas, semicolons, and 

even PRESCRIBE command names, is recognized as part of the character string, and not 

as part of the PRESCRIBE command language. For example, the expression EXIT; in 

the following string is just text; it does not cause the printing system to exit from the 

PRESCRIBE mode. 

TEXT ’NO EXIT; NO RETURN.’; 

When the string itself contains one type of quotation mark, the quotation mark must be 

enclosed in quotes of the other type. Here are two examples: 

1-11


1-12 

TEXT "You’re about to enter PRESCRIBE."; 

TEXT ’ " " " ’; 

In the first command above, the character string starts with a double quotation mark. The 

printing system therefore expects the string to end with a double quotation mark, and 

regards the apostrophe in the word You’re as an ordinary character, not as the string terminator. 

Similarly, the double quotation marks in the second command above are recognized as 

ordinary characters, not as string terminators. 

Since an apostrophe or quotation mark can start a character string anywhere in a PRE- 

SCRIBE command sequence, it is important not to start character strings unintentionally. 

The following examples demonstrate incorrect use of apostrophes and double quotation 

marks. 

Incorrect: 

!R! CMNT Don’t leave stray apostrophes; EXIT; 

Incorrect: 

!R! CMNT The symbol " means inches; EXIT; 

In both of the above cases, the printing system assumes that the expression EXIT; is part 

of a character string started by the preceding apostrophe or quotation mark, and fails to 

exit the PRESCRIBE mode. The correct way to write these comments is: 

Correct: 

!R! CMNT "Don’t leave stray apostrophes"; EXIT; 

Correct: 

!R! CMNT ’The symbol " means inches’; EXIT; 

Character strings must not exceed the 255-character limit on total command length. If a 

character string exceeds this limit, the printing system terminates it forcibly and begins 

looking for the next PRESCRIBE command. 

Upper and Lowercase Letters 

Regarding upper and lowercase characters, PRESCRIBE follows the same rule as many 

computer programming languages: it discriminates case inside character strings and 

ignores it elsewhere. You can type command names in upper or lowercase. 

Correct: 

!R! TEXT ’A’; CIR 1; EXIT; 

Also correct: 

!R! text ’A’; cir 1; exit; 

Also correct:

!R! Text ’A’; Cir 1; Exit; 


Each of these commands prints the capital letter ‘A’ inside a circle. In the printout shown 

above, the unit is centimeters. The reason that the letter ‘A’ is off center in the circle is 

that the cursor is not located at the center of the circle, but at left corner of the letter ‘A’. 

The command 

!R! TEXT ’a’; CIR 1; EXIT; 

prints a lowercase a because the letter occurs inside a character string. 

The sole exception to upper and lowercase usage in PRESCRIBE commands occurs with 

the initializing !R! command. This command must always use an uppercase R. The printing 

system will not enter the PRESCRIBE mode in response to !r!. 

In this manual, PRESCRIBE commands are printed in upper-case for readability. 

Outside of PRESCRIBE mode, the printing system always distinguishes between uppercase 

and lowercase letters and prints exactly what is sent. 

Special Parameters 

Some PRESCRIBE commands use unquoted strings of characters as parameters. Examples 

for these are the FSET (change current font set by characteristic) command and the 

CSET (change symbol set by symbol-set ID) command. (See Chapter 4 for a detailed 

explanation of how these commands are used to select fonts.) 

The FSET and CSET commands use parameters that closely resemble the command 

parameters used for font control in Hewlett-Packard’s printer control language. For 

example, the PRESCRIBE command 

FSET 0p12h12v0s0b6T; 

selects the font whose characteristics most closely matches the following font parameters: 

• Monospaced font (0p) 

• Character spacing of 12 characters/inch (12h) 

• Character height of 12 points (12v) 

• Upright style (0s) 

• Medium weight (0b) 

• LetterGothicBM12-Roman typeface (6T) 

In Hewlett-Packard’s PCL, the corresponding command would be 

ESC(s0p12h12v0s0b6T 

1-13


1-14 

Similarly, the PRESCRIBE command CSET 11U; designates use of the PC-8 Danish/Norwegian 

symbol set. The corresponding Hewlett-Packard PCL command is 

ESC(11U.

Chapter 2 

Graphics Tutorial 

PRESCRIBE provides a wide variety of graphics operators, allowing you to easily construct 

and print almost any imaginable shape or pattern. 

This chapter introduces the various graphics concepts of PRESCRIBE, and illustrates 

how to use many of its graphic functions. It defines standard graphics mode, path mode 

graphics, and raster graphics. It explains how to use predefined fill patterns, how to 

define your own fill patterns, and introduces ways in which you can change the print 

model, the rules that determine the manner in which patterns and images are rendered on 

the paper.

Chapter 2 Graphics Tutorial 

Standard Graphics 

2-2 

Drawing Lines 

The standard graphics mode provides a number of operators for constructing a variety of 

filled shapes and lines. Using standard mode graphics, you can: 

• Draw lines of any desired width 

• Draw circles and rectangles 

• Draw a variety of filled shapes, including boxes and arcs 

• Draw pie charts 

This is referred to as the standard graphics mode because it is a standard feature of all 

versions of PRESCRIBE. 

PRESCRIBE provides a number of Draw to commands for drawing lines in both standard 

and path modes. These include: 

DAP (draw to absolute 

position) 

DZP (draw to zero-relative 

position) 

Lines to Absolute Position 

Begin with a simple task such as drawing a line between two arbitrary points on a page. 

Use the MAP and DAP commands to specify positions relative to the top and left margins. 

This task has several distinct steps: selecting a line width, determining the starting point 

of the line, and determining the end point of the line. The following command sequence 

demonstrates this process. 

!R! RES; 

STM 0.5; 

SLM 0.5; 

SPD 0.01; 

MAP 0.5, 1; 

DAP 2, 0.5; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Draws a line to an absolute position in a Cartesian coordinate 

system whose origin (0,0) is at the intersection of 

the left and top margins. 

Draws a line to an absolute position in a Cartesian coordinate 

system whose origin (0,0) is at the intersection of 

the left and top edge limits of the paper. 

DRP (draw to relative position) Draws a line to a position specified as a horizontal and vertical 

displacement from the current cursor position. 

DRPA (draw to relative Draws a line to a position that is specified as a distance and 

position specified by angle) angle from the current cursor position. Examples of these 

commands are given in the sections that follow.

Zero-relative Lines 

Figure 2. 1. Result of Draw Commands: Absolute Lines 

The initial !R! command switches the printing system to the PRESCRIBE mode. 

Remember that this command must always precede each sequence of PRESCRIBE commands. 

The RES (RESet) clears the current page from printing system memory and re-establishes 

the printing system’s permanent defaults. Although you would not include this 

command in every sequence of PRESCRIBE commands, we include it in this example to 

ensure consistent results. As a standard practice, include the RES at the beginning and 

end of each job. 

The STM and SLM set both the top and left margins to 0.5 inches (1.27 centimeters). 

The SPD (Set Pen Diameter) command determines the thickness of lines. In the standard 

graphics mode, this setting determines the thickness of all lines drawn after the command 

is issued. In this example, the line width is set to 0.01 inches. 

The starting point of the line is established with the MAP (Move to Absolute Position) 

command. This command moves the cursor to a point that is a specified distance from 

the top and left margins. In this example, the point specified is 0.5 inches from the left 

margin and 1 inch from the top margin. 

If the margins are changed, the position specified by MAP also changes correspondingly. 

On the next line of the program, the DAP (Draw to Absolute Position) command draws a 

line from the starting position to the point 2 inches from the left margin and 0.5 inches 

from the top margin. 

Finally, PAGE; prints out the page, allowing us to look at the result of our work. 

The line draw example below uses some new commands to draw another line. 

!R! RES; 

SPD 0.01; 

MZP 0.5, 1; 

DZP 2, 0.5; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Edge limits 

Margins 

MAP 0.5, 1; 

DAP 2, 0.5; 

2-3


2-4 

Relative Lines 

Figure 2. 2. Result of Draw Commands: Zero-relative Lines 

The first two lines switch the printing system to the PRESCRIBE mode, reset printing 

system parameters, and set the line width to 0.01 inch. On the third line, the MZP (Move 

to Zero-relative Position) differs from the MAP (Move to Absolute Position) command 

in one respect: the position specified is in relation to the top and left edge page limits of 

the page, rather than in relation to the top and left page margins. MZP moves the cursor 

to the point that is 0.5 inches from the left edge limit and 1 inch from the top edge limit. 

Similarly, on the next line, DZP (Draw to Zero-relative Position) draws a line from the 

starting position to the point 2 inches from the left edge limit and 0.5 inches from the top 

edge limit. 

Another way to specify positions is in relation to the current cursor position. The following 

command sequence provides an example. 

!R! RES; 

SPD 0.01; 

MRP 2, 1; 

DRP -1.5, -1; 

MRP 2, 1; 

DRP -1.5, -1; 

MRP 2, 1; 

DRP -1.5, -1; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Edge limits 

MZP 0.5, 1; 

DZP 2, 0.5;

Figure 2. 3. Result of Draw Commands: Relative Lines 

In this command sequence, the PRESCRIBE mode begins with the !R!, resets the printing 

system defaults to permanent settings with RES;, and establishes a pen width of 0.01 

inches with the SPD 0.01;. 

The MRP (Move to Relative Position) and DRP (Draw to Relative Position) specify 

positions in relation to the cursor’s current position. 

When the command sequence starts, the cursor is located at the intersection of the left 

and top margins. The command MRP 2, 1; on line 3 moves the cursor 2 inches to the 

right of its current position, and down 1 inch from its current position. Then the command 

DRP -1.5, -1; draws a line from that point to a point 1.5 inches to the left of the 

cursor position and 1 inch above it. The cursor winds up 0.5 inches to the right of the 

point where it started. 

Lines 5 to 8 repeat the move-and-draw sequence two more times. This produces three 

parallel lines, as shown in the figure on the previous page. 

Lines in Terms of Angles 

Edge limits 

Until now, all of our examples have specified positions in terms of Cartesian (X,Y) coordinates. 

This example illustrates drawing lines of specified lengths and angles. 

!R! RES; 

SPD 0.01; 

MZP 5, 4; 

DRPA 2, 149; 

DRPA 2, 221; 

DRPA 2, 293; 

DRPA 2, 365; CMNT Equivalent to 5 degrees; 

DRPA 2, 437; CMNT Equivalent to 77 degrees; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

2-5


2-6 

Figure 2. 4. Result of Draw Commands: Lines in Angles 

The first two lines of this command sequence initiates the PRESCRIBE mode, resets 

printing system defaults to permanent settings, and sets the line width to 0.01 inches. 

Then the MZP command on line 3 moves the cursor to a point 5 inches to the right of the 

left edge limit and 4 inches below the top edge limit. 

Next, DRPA 2, 149; on line 4 draws a line two inches long at an angle of 149 degrees. 

The angle is measured clockwise from the vertical axis. The subsequent DRPA commands 

draw additional 2-inch lines at angles that increase in increments of 72 degrees. 

As indicated by the CMNT (CoMmeNT) commands, angles that exceed 360 degrees are 

equivalent to the remainder of division of the angle by 360. 

Drawing Boxes and Circles 

Drawing Boxes 

PRESCRIBE provides two commands especially for drawing boxes (BOX command) 

and circles (CIR command). 

The BOX (draw box) command draws a box of a specified width and height. As with the 

line drawing commands, the thickness of the line used to draw the box is determined by 

the SPD (set pen diameter) command. 

The following command sequence draws a box. 

!R! RES; 

UNIT C; 

SPD 0.1; 

MZP 3, 3; 

BOX 3, 4; 

PAGE; 

EXIT;

Figure 2. 5. An Example of a Box 

Line 1 places the printing system in the PRESCRIBE mode and resets printing system 

parameters. The UNIT C; command on the second line sets the unit of measurement to 

centimeters, and the SPD (Set Pen Diameter) command on line 3 sets the line width to 

0.1 centimeters. (If you omit these two commands, the printing system will print using 

the default unit, inches; and the default line width, 3 dots.) 

Next, the MZP command on line four moves the cursor to the point that is 3 centimeters 

to the right of the left edge limit and 3 centimeters below the top edge limit. This is the 

starting point from which the box is drawn. 

On line 5, BOX 3, 4; draws a box with a width of 3 centimeters and a height of 4 centimeters. 

The position of the box with respect to the cursor depends on the positive or negative 

value specified for width and height. The box is drawn to the right of the cursor if width 

is positive, and to the left of the cursor if width is negative. Similarly, the box is drawn 

below the cursor if height is positive, and above the cursor if height is negative. This 

relation is illustrated in the figure that follows. 

By default, the position of the cursor is not affected by this command. However, you can 

also specify an option parameter to make the cursor move to an adjacent or diagonally 

opposite corner of the box, down by one text line, or to the left margin on the next text 

line. The following figure shows some examples. 

2-7


2-8 

Figure 2. 6. Cursor Positioning Options 

-Y 

-X 

Cursor position 

X 

Y 

Left margin 

BOX 4, 2, H; Moves the cursor to 

the horizontally adjacent corner 

BOX 4, 2, V; Moves the cursor to 

the vertically adjacent corner 

BOX 4, 2, E; Moves the cursor to 

the diagonally opposite corner 

BOX 4, 2, L; Moves the cursor 

down one line 

BOX 4, 2, N; Moves the cursor to 

the beginning of the next line (to 

the left margin)

Drawing Circles 

The CIR (draw circle) command draws a circle of a specified radius using the line thickness 

set by the SPD (set pen diameter) command. The circle drawn is centered on the 

current cursor position; the position of the cursor remains unaffected. See the following 

example: 

!R! RES; 

UNIT C; 

SPD 0.1; 

MZP 8, 8; 

CIR 1; 

CIR 2; 

CIR 3; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 7. Circles 

Lines 1, 2 and 3 start PRESCRIBE mode, reset the printing system to its default parameters, 

establish the unit of measurement as centimeters, and set the line width to 0.1 centimeters. 

Next, the MZP command moves the cursor to the point that is 8 centimeters to the right 

of the left edge limit and 8 centimeters below the top edge limit. 

Lines 5, 6, and 7 draw three circles with radii of 1, 2, and 3 centimeters. 

Drawing Filled Shapes 

The standard graphics mode provides two types of filled shapes: arcs and blocks. Such 

shapes are filled with one of the printing system’s predefined patterns, or with a user 

defined pattern. 

Filled areas of other shapes can be printed using path mode graphics. For details, see the 

explanation in section Path Mode Graphics on page 16. 

2-9


2-10 

A filled block consists simply of a rectangle of any desired dimensions. A filled arc is an 

area enclosed by an arc segment and the line segments extending from the ends of the arc 

to the center of the circle of which the arc is a part. 

This section shows how to select a fill pattern and print a filled block or arc. 

Drawing Filled Blocks 

The following command sequence prints the block shown below. 

!R! RES; 

UNIT P; 

MZP 72, 72; 

PAT 6; 

BLK 72, -144, H; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 8. A Filled Block 

Lines 1 and 2 put the printing system in the PRESCRIBE mode, reset printing system 

parameters and set the unit of measurement to points. (One point is equal to 1/ 72 inches.) 

Next, the MZP command moves the cursor to the position 72 points to the right of the 

left edge limit and 72 points below the top edge limit. 

The PAT (select fill PATtern) command on line 4 of the program selects the fill pattern. 

In this program, pattern number 6 is selected. 

You can select from among any of the printing system’s 60 predefined fill patterns or 

choose to define a pattern using the XPAT (generate eXpanded PATtern) command. In 

either case, the selection is made with the PAT command. For 1200-dpi and 600-dpi 

models, the user can define the printing resolution (300, 600, 1200 dpi) of the pattern by 

giving a second parameter to the PAT command. 

You can also select a shade of gray for filling the arc or block by using the GPAT (set 

Gray PATtern) command. 

It is possible to apply a color to a pattern specified using PAT, FPAT, GPAT or XPAT. 

Note, however, that this may not always result in the exact same pattern as printed in 

monochrome. 

The way a color looks may differ when used for different patterns even though the same 

color has been specified.

Drawing Filled Arcs 

The BLK (draw filled-in BLocK) command on line 5 actually draws the filled in block. 

This command closely resembles the BOX command explained in the preceding section. 

However, whereas the BOX command draws a line around a rectangular area, the BLK 

command fills a rectangular area with the currently selected pattern. 

As with the BOX command, the position of the rectangular area with respect to the cursor 

depends on the sign of the values specified for width and height. The box is drawn to 

the right of the cursor if width is positive, and to the left of the cursor if width is negative; 

and the box is drawn below the cursor if height is positive, and above the cursor if 

height is negative. 

As with the BOX command, you can specify an option parameter to make the cursor 

move to a specified location after the box is drawn. (The cursor remains unmoved if the 

option parameter is omitted.) Values for this option are H, V, E, L, N, and B, the same as 

for BOX. 

The ARC (draw filled-in ARC) command is similar to the BLK command (described in 

the preceding section) in that it fills an area with a pre-defined pattern or a shade of gray. 

The arc is drawn centered around the current cursor position. The dimensions of the arc 

are determined by user specified inner radius, outer radius, starting angle, and ending 

angle. 

The following PRESCRIBE demonstrates the ARC command. 

!R! CMNT Enter PRESCRIBE mode; 

RES; CMNT Reset printing system parameters; 

UNIT C; CMNT Set centimeters as unit; 

PAT 9; CMNT Select pattern 9; 

MZP 8, 8; CMNT Move cursor to point that is 8 cm; 

CMNT from left edge limit and; 

CMNT 8 cm from top edge limit; 

ARC 1, 2, 0, 90; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 9. A Filled Arc 

The ARC command on line 8 of the command sequence draws an arc with an inner 

radius of 1 centimeter, an outer radius of 2 centimeters, a starting angle of 0 (straight up), 

and an ending angle of 90 degrees. 

The ARC command does not draw a line around the boundary of the filled-in area. 

2-11


2-12 

Defining Fill Patterns 

With a little work, you can construct your own fill patterns. You can generate 8 × 8 dot 

patterns using the FPAT (generate Fill PATtern) command, or 16 × 16 dot patterns using 

the XPAT (generate eXpanded fill PATtern) command. This section gives examples of 

both. 

!R! RES; 

MZP 1, 1; 

FPAT 16, 40, 68, 130, 65, 34, 20, 8; 

BLK 1, 1; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Line 4 of this command sequence prints a filled block using a fill pattern defined by the 

FPAT command on line 3. 

Each of the eight numbers in the FPAT defines one row of an 8 × 8 dot pattern. The pattern 

follows: 

Figure 2. 10. Dot Pattern and a Filled Block 

128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 

For this pattern, the numbers across the top indicate the value of each column. The numbers 

down the right side are the sums of the values of columns that contain black dots in 

that row. 

Once this pattern has been defined by the FPAT command, it is used as the fill pattern 

until printing system parameters are reset with RES, another pattern is selected with PAT, 

a different pattern is defined with FPAT, or a shade of gray is defined and selected by 

GPAT. 

Now let’s look at an example using the XPAT command. 

The XPAT command uses the format 

XPAT pattern-number; bit map; 

= 16 

= 40 

= 68 

= 130 

= 65 

= 34 

= 20 

Note that the pattern-number parameter must be a value from 100 to 105 and followed 

by a semicolon, not a comma. 

The following example demonstrates the XPAT command in a PRESCRIBE command 

sequence. 

= 

8

!R! RES; 

XPAT 100; 

@X0@ | 0Af0CC0FA8L@


2-14 

Column value 

If the character resulting for section x of any row is @ (indicating that all bits in that section 

are white), then that character may be omitted. If sections x and y are both @, then 

both characters may be omitted. However, if the result for section y is @ and that for section 

x is a character other than @, then no characters may be omitted. In terms of the program 

example above, what this means is that the bit map string, 

@X0@ | 0Af0CC0FA8L@

Figure 2. 12. PIE Example 

The PIE command uses the format 

PIE radius, starting angle, size of slice, ...; 

In the example above, the radius is 2 centimeters (since we set the unit to centimeters 

with the UNIT command), and the starting angle is 0 degrees. Four pie slices are specified, 

with sizes of 10, 20, 30, and 40. 

The printing system automatically converts the slice sizes to angles totalling 360 

degrees. Then it draws the first slice with a cut at the angle specified by the second 

parameter (0 degrees in our example, or straight up). The remaining slices are drawn in 

sequence clockwise around the circle. The line thickness used for drawing the circle and 

the lines between slices are designated by the SPD (Set Pen Diameter) command. 

Any number of pie slice sizes can be specified, provided that the total length of the command 

does not exceed 255 characters, and that the sum of the pie slices does not exceed 

9999. All numbers specified for slice sizes must be non-negative integers. 

The PIE command does not fill in the slices with any fill pattern. The PAT command can 

be used to create shaded areas. The previous example is expanded to fill in the slices. 

!R! RES; UNIT C; SPD .1; 

MZP 10, 10; 

PAT 19; ARC 0, 2, 0, 36; 

PAT 41; ARC 0, 2, 36, 108; 

PAT 43; ARC 0, 2, 108, 216; 

PAT 48; ARC 0, 2, 216, 360; 

PIE 2, 0, 10, 20, 30, 40; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

2-15


2-16 

Figure 2. 13. Pattern Filled PIE 

Path Mode Graphics 

Path 

This program first draws four filled arcs, each using a different fill pattern, then prints 

the pie chart over the arcs. Each arc has an inner radius of zero, an outer radius of 2 (the 

same as the pie chart), and a starting angle and ending angle that correspond to the relative 

size of the pie slices. Since the total size of the pie slices in the example is 100 

(10+20+30+40), the angular extent of each arc is equal to 360 x size of slice /100. For 

example, the angular extent of the first arc is 360 x 10 / 100 = 36 degrees. The starting 

angle of each arc equals the starting angle of the pie chart (0 degrees), plus the angular 

extent of all the preceding arcs. The ending angle equals the starting angle plus the angular 

extent of the arc. 

With path mode graphics, images are constructed by defining lines and curves as paths, 

then rendering them as images by stroking along the paths or filling the area enclosed by 

them. PRESCRIBE provides a variety of path construction operators and painting operators 

for stroking or filling paths. 

In PRESCRIBE, a path is a set of straight or curved line segments, either connected or 

disconnected, that describes the shape and position of one or more objects or regions. 

Paths can be used to draw lines and curves and to specify boundaries of filled areas. 

A path is stroked by drawing a line of arbitrary width along it. The line may be solid 

black, all white, or any intermediate shade of gray. It may also be a dashed line of any 

pattern of segment lengths. 

A path is filled by painting the entire area that it encloses with a gray scale pattern, ranging 

from black to white, or with one of the printing system’s predefined patterns. In order 

to be filled, a path must be closed; that is, it must return to its starting point. 

A path is constructed by means of one or more path construction operators. The path 

construction operators modify the current path, usually by appending to it. However, a 

path in itself does not produce any image on the page. Once a path has been constructed, 

it can be used to control the application of one of the painting operators of PRESCRIBE, 

defining the boundary of the area in which images can be printed.


There are no restrictions on the shape of a path. A single path may include multiple 

closed subpaths, representing several areas, and a path may intersect itself in an arbitrary 

manner. 

The order of the segments that define a path is significant. A pair of line segments is said 

to connect only if they are defined consecutively, with the second segment starting where 

the first one ends. Non-consecutive segments that meet or intersect fortuitously are not 

connected. 

A subpath is a sequence of connected segments. A path is made up of one or more subpaths. 

Subpaths may be either open or closed. 

Path construction begins with a NEWP (NEW Path) command. Path construction ends 

with the CLSP (CLoSe Path) command or with any paint operator that paints the region 

enclosed by the path or draws a line along it (such as STRoKe or FILL). 

2-17


2-18 

Drawing Lines 

The following example shows how to draw a line in the path mode. 

!R! RES; 

NEWP; 

PMZP 1, 1; 

PDZP 2, 3; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 14. Drawing Lines in Path Mode 

(1, 1) 

(2, 3) 

Line 1 of the program switches the printing system to the PRESCRIBE mode and resets 

printing system parameters, including the unit (to inches), line width (to 3 dots), and various 

other aspects of the graphics state. 

Path construction begins with the NEWP command on line 2. This command empties the 

current path (if any), making it possible to start a new one. In doing so, it makes the position 

of the cursor undefined. 

The PMZP (Path, Move to Zero-relative Position) command on line 3 moves the cursor 

to a position one inch from the top and left edge limits of the paper. The coordinates 

specified may be positive or negative. 

On line 4, the PDZP (Path, Draw to Zero-relative Position) draws a line from the current 

cursor position to the position 2 inches from the left edge limit and 3 inches from the top 

edge limit. The cursor remains at this position after the line is drawn. 

On line 5, the STRK command strokes the path onto the page. 

After stroking the current path, the STRK command clears the path in the same manner 

as NEWP (start NEW Path). 

Finally, PAGE prints out the page, allowing us to look at the result of our work and cancelling 

all changes made during the course of the program, then EXIT ends the PRE- 

SCRIBE mode.

Two Lines 


The preceding example illustrated construction of a path between points specified in 

terms of absolute coordinates. The following program draws two lines, using both absolute 

coordinate specification and a new method: relative coordinate specification. 

!R! RES; 

NEWP; 

PMZP 1, 1; 

PDZP 2, 3; 

PMRP .5, -1; 

PDRP -1, -1; 

SPD 0.04; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 15. Drawing Two Lines 

(1, 1) 

(-1, -1) 

(2, 3) 

(0.5, -1) 

The first four lines of this program are identical to the preceding example. Line 1 

switches the printing system to the PRESCRIBE mode and resets printing system parameters, 

line 2 empties the current path, and lines 3 and 4 draw a line between two points 

that are specified in terms of absolute coordinates. 

On line 5, the PMRP (Path, Move to Relative Position) command moves the cursor to the 

point half an inch to the right and one inch above the current cursor position; that is, the 

point at which the first line ends. Then the PDRP (Path, Draw to Relative Position) command 

on line 6 draws a line to the point 1 inch to the left of the new position and 1 inch 

below it. 

The line thickness is changed to 0.04 inches by the SPD command on line 7. 

Finally, the STRK command on line 8 strokes the path onto the page, PAGE prints out 

the page, and EXIT ends the PRESCRIBE mode. 

2-19


2-20 

Line Ends 

The line end type determines how PRESCRIBE renders the ends of lines when they are 

stroked onto the page. PRESCRIBE provides three kinds of line ends. These include: 

Figure 2. 16. Line Ends 

The default line end type is butt caps. You can switch from the current line end type to 

any of the other types with the SCAP command. This command uses the following format: 

SCAP line-cap mode; 

Values for line-cap mode include: 

1 (for square caps) 

2 (for butt caps) 

3 (for round caps) 

Use of this command is illustrated in the following example. 

!R! RES; 

UNIT C; CMNT Sets unit to cm; 

NEWP; CMNT Starts new path; 

SPD .5; CMNT Sets line width to .5 cm; 

SCAP 1; CMNT Sets square caps; 

PMZP 2, 2; 

PDZP 4, 4; 

SCAP 3; CMNT Sets round caps; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 17. Printout of SCAP Example 

Square caps 

Butt caps 

Round caps 

Note that the line is rendered with round caps, rather than with square ones. Although 

square caps is set before constructing the path, the line type is changed to round prior to

Line Joins 

Miter Limit 


stroking the path. PRESCRIBE refers to the line cap type when the current path is 

stroked onto the page, rather than while the path is being constructed. Therefore, the program 

above renders the line with round caps rather than square ones. 

When a path consists of multiple connected line segments, the manner in which they are 

stroked onto the page depends on the current line join type. 

PRESCRIBE provides four types of line joins. These are called beveled, mitered, round, 

and notched. These are illustrated below. 

Figure 2. 18. Joins 

Beveled join Mitered join Round join Notched join 

The default line join type is beveled. With beveled joins, connected line segments end 

with butt caps, and the notch at the larger angle between the segments is filled with a triangle. 

With mitered joins, the edges of connected line segments are extended until they meet. 

This type of join is limited by the miter limit (explained below). 

With round joins, connected line segments are joined with circular caps. 

Notched joins leave a notch at the larger angle between the connected line segments. 

You can switch from the current line join type to any of the other types with the SLJN 

(Set Line JoiN) command. This command uses the following format: 

SLJN line-join mode; 

Values for line-join mode include: 

1 (for beveled joins) 

2 (for mitered joins) 

3 (for round joins) 

4 (for notched joins) 

When using mitered line joins, the use of such joins is limited by the miter limit. The 

miter limit is the maximum ratio of the distance l between the inner and outer corners of 

a mitered join and the width w of the lines joined. 

2-21


2-22 

Dash Type 

Figure 2. 19. Miter Limit 

Miter limit = maximum ratio of L / w = 1 / sin ( a / 2 ) 

If the angle at which lines join is such that this limit is exceeded, the lines are joined with 

a beveled join, rather than a mitered one. 

The purpose of the miter limit is to prevent objectionably long spikes when lines join at 

small angles. The default miter limit is 10, which results in beveled joins at angles of less 

than about 11.5 degrees. 

You can set any desired miter limit with the SMLT (Set Miter LimiT) command. This 

command has the following format. 

SMLT limit-value; 

Here are some representative limit-values and the corresponding angles at which the line 

join type switches between mitered and beveled. 

limit-value appox. angle 

2 60 

3 39 

4 29 

5 23 

6 19 

7 16 

8 14 

9 13 

W 

By default, the STRK command strokes paths with solid lines. However, you can also 

use a predefined pattern of alternating black and white to stroke paths. This makes it possible 

to stroke paths as dashed lines. You can also define your own dashed line patterns. 

The DPAT (select Dash PATtern) command selects one of PRESCRIBE’s ten predefined 

dash patterns, or one of 10 dash patterns that you can define yourself. This command 

uses the format: 

DPAT pattern-number; 

L 

W = line width 

L = miter length

The following program illustrates use of this command. 

!R! RES; 




PMZP 2, 2; 

PDZP 4, 4; 

DPAT 5; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 20. Printout of the DPAT Example 


In this program, the DPAT command selects the dash pattern with which the line is 

stroked. 

Predefined dash patterns are selected by specifying values from 1 to 10 for pattern-number. 

(A value of 1 specifies solid lines.) User-defined patterns can be selected by specifying 

values from 11 to 20. The next section explains how to use the SDP (Store Dash 

Pattern) command to define your own dash patterns. Specifying an undefined user pattern 

number results in solid black lines. 

User Defined Dash Patterns 

Using the SDP command, you can define your own dashed patterns for use in stroking 

lines, arcs, and curves. See the following example: 

!R! RES; 

UNIT P; 

SDP 11, 2, 2, 5, 2; 




PMZP 2, 2; 

PDZP 4, 4; 

DPAT 11; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

2-23


2-24 

Figure 2. 21. Printout of the SDP Example 

The SDP command on line 3 defines a dashed pattern consisting of two lengths of black, 

two lengths of white, five lengths of black, and two lengths of white. On line 11, the 

DPAT command selects this pattern for stroking. The path defined by the PMZP (Path, 

Move to Zero-relative Position) and PDZP (Path, Draw to Zero-relative Position) commands 

is stroked using this pattern, with a result as shown in the figure above. 

The SDP command uses the general format: 

SDP pattern-number, dash1, space1, dash2, space2, ..., dash10, space10; 

The value specified for pattern-number must be in the range from 11 to 20. Dash and 

space lengths are specified in pairs. Up to ten dash-space pairs can be specified. The dash 

length always comes first in each pair. If a pattern is to begin with a space, then specify 0 

for dash1. However, if a pattern ends with a dash, the following space parameter can be 

omitted. 

Dash patterns defined with this command remain valid until redefined with another SDP 

command, or until the printing system is turned off. 

Drawing Arcs and Curves 

A path can include curves as well as lines. The PARC (Path, draw ARC) and PCRP 

(Path, Curve to Relative Position) commands make it possible to draw circular arcs and 

arcs of more complex form. 

The PARC command uses the format: 

PARC x, y, radius, ang1, ang2; 

where x and y describe the zero-relative coordinates of the center of the arc, radius 

describes the radius of the arc, ang1 describes the arc’s starting angle, and ang2 

describes the arc’s ending angle. Coordinates and radius are measured in the unit currently 

designated by the UNIT command, and the starting and ending angles are measured 

clockwise from the positive x axis. 

The PARC command draws a line between the cursor position and the beginning of the 

arc. See the following example: 

!R! RES; UNIT C; NEWP; SPD .1; 

PMZP 5, 5; 

PARC 5, 5, 3, 45, 135; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT;

Figure 2. 22. Printout of the PARC Example 

After the arc is drawn, the cursor is located at the end of the arc. 


If you wish to eliminate the straight line segment in the above example, leaving only the 

arc, the cursor position must be moved in advance to the position at which drawing of the 

arc begins. This is shown in the following example, in which the cursor is moved to the 

coordinates as specified by the PMRA (Path, Move to Relative position specified by 

Angle) command prior to drawing the arc. 

!R! RES UNIT C; NEWP; SPD .1; 

PMRA 5, 5, 3, 45; 

PARC 5, 5, 3, 45, 135; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

In this current example, the PMRA command moves the cursor from coordinates 5, 5, as 

measured from the left and top edge limits of the page, through the distance of 3 centimeters 

at the angle of 45 degrees from the positive x axis. At this point, the PARC command 

starts to draw the arc which ends at the angle of 135 degrees. 

Figure 2. 23. Printout of the PMRA Example 

Circles can be constructed by drawing arcs with angular extents of 360 degrees. To draw 

a circle, you will also need a PMRA command to eliminate the line extending from the 

center of the circle to the beginning of the circle. See the following example: 


PMRA 3, 3, 1.5, 0; 

PARC 3, 3, 1.5, 0, 360; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

2-25


2-26 

Figure 2. 24. Printout of a Circle Made with PMRA 

Drawing Complex Curves 

PRESCRIBE also provides a second curve-drawing operator for constructing complex 

curves that are referred to as Bézier curve segments. The PCRP (Path, Curve to Relative 

Position) uses the following format. 

PCRP x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3; 

Figure 2. 25. Bézier Curves 

Current position 


x2, y2 


x1, y1 

x1, y1 

x2, y2 

x3, y3 

x3, y3 

x2, y2 

x3, y3 

x1, y1 

A Bézier curve segment is one that is geometrically defined by a starting point (the cursor’s 

current position), two control points (x1, y1 and x2, y2), and an ending point (x3, 

y3). Coordinates of each of these points are specified as an offset from the cursor’s previous 

position.


The curve leaves the current position in the direction of x1, y1, and is tangent to the line 

between the current position and x1, y1. It bends towards x2, y2, then to x3, y3, and at the 

end point, is tangent to the line between x2, y2 and x3, y3. The curve is always entirely 

enclosed by the complex quadrilateral defined by the starting point, x1, y1, x2, y2, and 

x3, y3. 

See the following examples: 


PMZP 3, 3; 

PCRP 4, 2, 5, 1.5, 6, 1.8; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 26. Printout of the PCRP Example 


PMZP 3, 3; 

PCRP 5.5, 1.5, 1.5, 5.5, 7, 7; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 27. Second PCRP Example 

2-27


2-28 


PMZP 3, 4; 

PCRP 4, 2, 5, 4, 6, 2; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 28. Third PCRP Example 

Setting the Flatness of Curves 

When PRESCRIBE renders any curve, it actually converts the curve to a series of connected 

straight line segments. The length of these line segments is referred to as a curve’s 

flatness. You can change the degree of flatness with the FLAT (set FLATness) command. 

The default flatness is 1 (dot). Setting smaller values of flatness results in smoother 

curves, but more time is required for computing the larger number of line segments 

involved. (The difference is not noticeable for a single curve, but can be substantial in 

highly complex pages. Also, the difference is more noticeable with lower print resolutions 

[for example, 300 dpi resolution].) 

The following programs illustrate the results of setting the flatness to higher values. 


FLAT 30; 

PMZP 5, 5; 

PCRP 4, 2, 5, 4, 4, 0; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 29. Curve with Flatness 30

Closed Paths 


FLAT 60; 

PMZP 5, 5; 

PCRP 4, 2, 5, 4, 4, 0; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 30. Curve with Flatness 60 


Both of these programs draw an identical curve. The only difference between the two is 

in the flatness, which is specified on line 2. 

When the end point of a path connects to its starting point, the path is said to be closed. A 

closed path can be stroked, in the same manner as an open path, or it can be filled with 

gray-scale shading or a standard mode fill pattern. 

Simply ending a path at the path’s starting point does not make it a closed path; such a 

path remains open until it is closed. Closure can be done either explicitly, by means of 

the CLSP (CLoSe current Path) command, or implicitly by means of the FILL command. 

The following example illustrates construction and closure of a path. 


PMZP 4, 2; 

PARC 3, 3, 1, 90, 270; 

PARC 5, 3, 1, 270, 90; 

CLSP; 

STRK; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

In this example, the PMZP command on line 2 places the current cursor at coordinates 4, 

2, where the subsequent PARC command automatically starts to draw a line extending to 

the beginning of the arc. The PARC command then draws an arc from 90 degrees 

(straight up) to 270 degrees (straight down) around the center at coordinates 3, 3. After 

the arc is drawn, the cursor is located at the end of the arc. Then the PARC command on 

line 4 draws an arc from 270 degrees to 90 degrees around the center at coordinates 5, 3. 

Because the cursor position is defined at the end of the first arc when construction of the 

second arc starts, the second PARC command draws a line between the end of the first 

arc and the beginning of the second one. Finally, the CLSP command on line 5 explicitly 

closes the path, thereby constructing a line between the end of the second arc and the 

beginning of the first one. 

Now the path has been closed. The STRK command goes on to stroke the path, producing 

the shape shown below. 

2-29


2-30 

Filled Areas 

Figure 2. 31. A Closed Path 

!R! RES; UNIT C; 

NEWP; 

GPAT .5; 

PMZP 4, 2; 

PARC 3, 3, 1, 90, 270; 

PARC 5, 3, 1, 270, 90; 

FILL 1; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

This program is similar to the previous one. In this case, we choose to fill the path 

instead of stroking it. We select a shade of gray for filling the path (.5, a value directly 

between black and white) with the GPAT (set Gray PATtern) command on line 3. 

First, we construct the path by drawing arcs around the center points. However, we will 

not close it explicitly. 

Then we execute the FILL command. This implicitly closes the path, drawing a line 

between the ending point of the second arc and the starting point of the first one, then 

fills the closed path with the selected gray scale pattern. 

Note that we could have filled the path with a standard mode fill pattern instead of a 

gray-scale pattern. The only change necessary would be to replace the GPAT command 

on line 3 with a PAT or FPAT command specifying the pattern to be used. 

The format of the FILL command is 

FILL rule; 

The rule parameter specifies the convention according to which the path is filled.


With simple convex paths such as that shown below, the entire enclosed area is filled. 

Figure 2. 32. Simple Filled Paths 

However, when a path consists of multiple closed subpaths or intersects itself as shown 

in the next two figures, the rule determines areas that are deemed to be inside the path. 


PMZP 5, 5; 

PMRA 5, 5, 2, 0; 

PARC 5, 5, 2, 0, 360; 

PMRA 5.2, 5.2, 1.5, 0; 

PARC 5.2, 5.2, 1.5, 0, 360; 

PMRA 5.5, 5.5, 1, 0; 

PARC 5.5, 5.5, 1, 0, 360; 

FILL 1; 

PMZP 10.5, 4.5; 

PMRA 10.5, 4.5, 2, 0; 

PARC 10.5, 4.5, 2, 0, 360; 

PMRA 11, 6, 2, 0; 

PARC 11, 6, 2, 0, 360; 

PMRA 12, 5, 2, 0; 

PARC 12, 5, 2, 0, 360; 

FILL 1; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 33. Complex Filled Paths 

2-31


2-32 

With 1 specified for the rule parameter of FILL, the method for determining whether a 

point is inside the path involves drawing a ray from that point in any direction and counting 

the number of times the ray crosses segments of the path. The point is said to be 

inside the path if the result is an odd number; if the result is an even number, the point is 

said to be outside the path. 

The non-zero winding rule also draws a ray from a point in any direction to determine 

whether or not that point is inside the path and examines the points where a segment of 

the path crosses the ray. However, it then starts counting from zero and adds one each 

time a segment in the path crosses the ray from left to right; and subtracts one each time 

a segment in the path crosses the ray from right to left. If the result of counting all the 

crossings is zero, the point is said to be outside; otherwise the point is said to be inside 

the path. 

After filling the current path, the FILL command clears the path in the same manner as 

NEWP. 

Clipping Rectangle 

Up to this point, we have discussed graphics objects to be drawn or stroked or filled as 

paths. However, another PRESCRIBE command can be used to define a clipping template 

for clipping texts, paths, and raster graphics. For this purpose, the CLPR (CLiP 

Rectangular region) command is provided to define the rectangular region for clipping 

paths. 

When the printing system is turned on or reset with PRESCRIBE’s RES command, the 

clipping rectangle is identical to the printable limits of the page. Subsequently, executing 

the CLPR command reduces the clipping rectangle to the intersection of the objects on 

the page and the rectangle defined by CLPR. 

The following is an example of CLPR. 


NEWP; 

SPD 1; 

PMRA 6, 9, 3, 0; 

PARC 6, 9, 3, 0, 360; 

CLPR 3, 6, 9, 12; 

STRK; 

EXIT; 

In this example, lines 1 through 5 draw a circle with an extra line thickness at the coordinates 

defined by the PMRA command. 

The CLPR command on line 6 constructs a rectangle with its left-upper corner positioned 

at coordinates 3, 6 and its right-bottom corner positioned at coordinates 9, 12 

(both measured from the top and left edge limits of the page). 

As with the rectangular area clipping, those parts of the circle that lie outside of the clipping 

rectangle are erased when the path is stroked, producing the result as shown in the 

figure on the next page. 

The rectangle defined by CLPR does not clip the graphics objects which are drawn by 

the standard mode graphics commands.

Figure 2. 34. Clipping Rectangle Example 

Printing with Character Paths 


When a resident scalable (outline) font is selected, you can treat a character as a path and 

add it to the current path. The PRESCRIBE command is CPTH (Character PaTH). 

Paths created with the CPTH command can be either stroked or filled. See the following 

example. 

!R! RES; 

UNIT P; 

NEWP; 

PAT 26; 

SFNT ’Helvetica-Bd’, 54; 

PMZP 72, 144; 

CPTH "xyz"; 

FILL 1; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Figure 2. 35. Character Path 

Line 2 of this program sets the unit to printing system’s points (1 point= 1/72 inch), then 

the NEWP command on line 3 empties the current path (if any), making ready for construction 

of a new path. The PAT command on line 4 selects predefined pattern number 

26 as the current fill pattern. 

2-33


Raster Graphics 

2-34 

Next, the SFNT (Select current FoNT by typeface) on line 5 selects Helvetica Bold, a 

scalable (outline) font as the current font and scales the font to a height of 54 points. Use 

of SFNT and other font selection commands are explained more fully in PRESCRIBE 

Commands Command Reference. 

The PMZP command on line 6 moves the cursor to the point that is 72 points (1 inch) 

from the left edge limit and 2 inches from the top edge limit. 

The CPTH command on line 7 constructs a path using the outline of the characters in the 

string xyz. The cursor is moved to the end of the string. 

Finally, the FILL command fills the path with the selected pattern, and PAGE prints out 

the page. 

While the graphics commands of the standard and path modes draw shapes such as lines, 

circles, and boxes, raster graphics commands specify individual dots to draw images. 

The dot resolution is selectable from 75 to 300 dots per inch for all models; and 600-dpi 

models have two more choices of 200 dpi and 600 dpi. Lower resolutions give a rougher 

appearance, but require less raster data for an image of a given size. 

Raster graphics are limited in size only by the dimensions of the paper, and in complexity 

only by the dot resolution. 

Raster Data Compression Formats 

PRESCRIBE supports raster data in three formats: uncompressed raster data, run-length 

encoded raster data, or raster data encoded in tagged image file format (TIFF). 

Uncompressed Raster Data 

Uncompressed raster data consists of a simple, unencoded bit image consisting of binary 

data in which 1 bit represent black dots and 0 bit represent white dots. With this format, 

each dot line is divided into 8-dot segments. The settings of dots in each segment are 

controlled by the bit values of each byte of raster data. Bit 7 (the highest-order bit in the 

first byte of data received) corresponds to the first dot in the dot line, bit 0 corresponds to 

the eighth dot, and so forth. 

Run-length Encoded Raster Data 

With run-length encoding, raster data is encoded in pairs of bytes. The first byte of each 

pair indicates a repetition count for the second byte. A value of zero in the first byte indicates 

that the pattern represented in second byte is not repeated; that is, it occurs only 

once. A value of 1 in the first byte indicates that the pattern is repeated once, and so 

forth. The first byte can specify any repetition count from 0 to 255. 

Raster Data in Tagged Image File Format 

The tagged image file format (TIFF) combines features of the uncompressed format and 

run-length encoding. A control byte determines whether the following byte or bytes of


raster data represents a repeating pattern or an uncompressed (unencoded) pattern. It also 

determines the number of pattern repetitions or bytes of uncompressed data. 

The control byte is a two’s complement value that can be either zero, positive, or negative. 

A negative value (-1 to -127) indicates that the following byte represents a repeating 

pattern. The number of repetitions of the pattern is determined by the absolute value of 

the control byte. 

If the control byte is zero or positive (1 to 127), the following byte(s) of data represent an 

uncompressed pattern. In this case, the value of the control byte plus one indicates the 

number of bytes making up the pattern. 

In TIFF encoding, the two’s complement value -128 indicates a non-operative control 

byte. The byte following such a byte is handled as a new control byte. 

Commands for Printing Raster Data 

PRESCRIBE provides a number of commands for printing raster data, including: 

• STR (SeT dot Resolution) 

• RVRD (ReceiVe Raster Data) 

• ENDR (END Raster data) 

• RVCD (ReceiVe Compressed raster Data) 

• SRO (Set Raster Options) 

The principle function of the SRO command is to specify the presentation mode; i.e., the 

orientation of the raster image. If the presentation mode is 0 (the default mode), raster 

lines print along the width of the physical page, regardless of the current page orientation. 

If the presentation mode is 1, raster lines print in the orientation of the logical page. 

This is illustrated in the figure that follows. 

2-35


2-36 

75 dpi resolution 

(Default) 

Figure 2. 36. Presentation Modes 

Y 

Y 

X 

Height 

X 

Height 

Current point 

Width 

Current point 

Width 

A secondary function of the SRO command specifies the width and height of the raster 

area. When a width and height are explicitly specified, any part of the raster image that 

extends outside of the area is clipped. 

The STR command specifies the resolution at which raster data is printed. The default 

resolution is 75 dots per inch, or the equivalent of 16 physical dots for each raster-line 

dot. The following figure shows how a single raster-line dot correlates to physical dots at 

each of the available raster data resolutions. 

Figure 2. 37. Dot Resolutions 

Presentation mode = 0 

Portrait 

Presentation mode = 1 

Portrait 

Y 

The RVRD and RVCD commands print raster data in the presentation mode specified by 

the SRO command and at the resolution specified by the STR command. Either command 

can be used. The RVRD command can only print uncompressed raster data. The 

RVCD command can print uncompressed raster data, run-length encoded raster data, or 

X 

Y Height 

Width 

Landscape 

Height 

X 

Landscape 

Current point 

Current point 

100 dpi resolution 150 dpi resolution 200 dpi resolution 300 dpi resolution 600 dpi resolution 1200 dpi resolution 

Width


tagged image file format raster data. Both commands are used with the ENDR (END 

Raster) command. 

Printing Raster Data 

The normal sequence for printing raster data is to set the presentation mode (and, if 

desired, the height and width of the raster image area) with the SRO command, to set the 

dot resolution with the STR command, then to print the raster data with the RVRD or 

RVCD/ENDR command pair. 

Changing the Printing System’s Imaging Model 

The printing system’s imaging model governs the way in which images and patterns are 

applied to each other. In short, it determines the transparency or opaqueness of images as 

images overlay one another and fill patterns are applied through images. 

The image model applies to all PRESCRIBE image modes, and also to operation in the 

Hewlett-Packard LaserJet emulation mode. 

In general, placing any image on a page involves three elements: a pattern, a source 

image whose black bits are replaced by the pattern, and a destination image, which is 

any earlier image onto which the source image and pattern are placed. 

The fill pattern or gray scale pattern is defined by the PAT command, FPAT command, or 

GPAT command. 

The source image is any raster graphics image, standard mode graphic, lines or shapes 

produced by filling or stroking a path, or text printed using any bitmap or scalable font. 

The manner in which white bits in the pattern and source image are processed varies 

according to the transparency mode. There are two transparency modes: the source 

transparency mode and the pattern transparency mode. 

When the source transparency mode is 0 (transparent), white bits in the source image 

have no effect on the destination image; when the source transparency mode is 1 

(opaque), white bits in the source image are applied to the destination image. 

Similarly, when the pattern transparency mode is 0 (transparent), white bits in the pattern 

do not affect the destination image; but the area of the source image replaced by the pattern 

dots is applied to the destination image when the pattern transparency mode is 1 

(opaque). 

The figure on the next page illustrates the results that are obtained by printing images 

using image modes; that is, using different combinations of source and pattern transparency 

modes. 

2-37


2-38 

Figure 2. 38. Image Models 

Source transparency mode = 0 (transparent) 

Pattern transparency mode = 0 (transparent) 

Source transparency mode = 0 (transparent) 

Pattern transparency mode = 1 (opaque) 

Source transparency mode = 1 (opaque) 

Pattern transparency mode = 0 (transparent) 

Source transparency mode = 1 (opaque) 

Pattern transparency mode = 1 (opaque) 

PRESCRIBE establishes the printing system’s imaging model with the SIMG (Set 

IMaGe model) command. This command uses the following format. 

SIMG operation-mode; 

operation-mode is a number from 1 to 6 that determines the image model as follows. 

Operation mode Source image Pattern 

1 Transparent – 

2 Opaque –

3 Transparent Transparent 

4 Transparent Opaque 

5 Opaque Transparent 

6 Opaque Opaque 


With operation modes 1 and 2, the SIMG command addresses the transparency of the 

source image only. For operation mode 1, the white pixels of the source image do not 

overlay on the destination. For example, you cannot pattern a character. With operation 

mode 2, the SIMG command applies the white pixels of the source image onto the destination 

directly. 

The following program example illustrates use of the SIMG command. Try changing the 

value specified for SIMG on line 3 and see the effect on the result (the figure on the previous 

page). 


NEWP; 

SIMG 3; CMNT Try changing this value; 

PMZP 5, 15; 

PMRP 2, 2; 

PDRP 0, -2, 2, 0, 0, 2, -2, 0; 

PDRP -2, 0, 0, 2, 2, 0, 0, -2; 

FILL 1; 

SFNT ’TimesNewRoman’, 90; 

PMRP -1.2, 1; 

GPAT .6; 

TEXT ’A’; 

FILL 1; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

Saving and Restoring the Graphics State 

The graphics state consists of a variety of items that affect how images are rendered on 

the page. The graphics state contains various information related to path mode graphics 

and raster mode graphics. 

Items included in the graphics state include the following: 

• Current path and cursor position (if defined) 

• Current pen diameter (line width) 

• Current line join type 

• Current line cap type 

• Current miter limit 

• Current dash pattern 

• Current flatness 

• Current fill pattern (16 × 16 dots) 

• Current clipping rectangle 

• Current raster resolution 

• Current image model 

While working with graphics, there often are occasions when it is useful to save the 

graphics state, then later to restore it. One such situation occurs when a path must be 

used for both stroking and filling. 

2-39


2-40 

For example, construction of a filled and outlined shape such as that shown below 

requires that we draw the path and then fill it. However, filling the path also clears it, 

making it unavailable for stroking. 

Figure 2. 39. A Path both Stroked and Filled 

By saving the graphics state prior to filling the path, it becomes possible to restore the 

path after it has been filled, thereby allowing it to be stroked without reconstructing it. 

The commands used for saving and restoring the graphics state are the SCG (Save Current 

Graphics state) command and the RPG (Return to Previous Graphics state) command. 

The following program demonstrates the commands for constructing a path that is both 

filled and stroked. 

!R! RES; UNIT C; NEWP; 

PMZP 4, 2; 

PARC 3, 3, 1, 90, 270; 

PARC 5, 3, 1, 270, 90; 

CLSP; 

SCG; 

STRK; 

RPG; 

GPAT .5; 

FILL 1; 

PAGE; 

EXIT; 

The result appears in the figure above.

Chapter 3 

Macros 

After you have gone to the trouble of creating (and debugging) a PRESCRIBE command 

sequence, it is inefficient to use it only once, but it is a nuisance to type the same 

sequence repeatedly. The solution is to make the sequence into a macro. Then you can 

execute the entire sequence with a single CALL command. The procedure for defining a 

macro command sequence is simple. 

Step 1:Assign a name to the sequence. Place the name at the top of the sequence (ending 

with a semicolon). 

Step 2:Add the PRESCRIBE command MCRO in front of the name. 

Step 3:Add the PRESCRIBE command ENDM at the end of the sequence.

Chapter 3 Macros 

MCRO Command 

3-2 

The MCRO command assigns a name to the sequence of PRESCRIBE commands that 

follows, until the ENDM (END Macro) command appears. Thereafter, the entire 

sequence of commands can be executed by specifying the assigned name in a single 

CALL or AMCR (Automatic MaCRo) command. The MCRO command has the following 

format. 

MCRO name[ dummy sign[, comment]; 

The name of a macro can be any length but only the first four characters are recognized 

by the PRESCRIBE command language. Any distinction between upper and lowercase 

letters is also ignored. For example, the following macro names are all the same: 

ABCD 

abcd 

ABCDE 

Abcdxyz 

The name must start with a letter, but the other characters can include digits and special 

symbols such as hyphens. For example, F-1 and GRY2 are valid macro names. 

The dummy sign (the default is the percent sign) indicates dummy parameters in the body 

of the macro. Dummy parameters enable you to place different variables when the macros 

are called. By using dummy parameters the same macro will execute differently 

according to the values given on the CALL command. Dummy parameters are written by 

writing the dummy sign followed by a number: %1 for the first dummy parameter, %2 

for the second dummy parameter, and so on up to a maximum of 19 dummy parameters. 

The same dummy parameter can be used any number of times. Values are assigned to 

dummy parameters when the macro is called by the CALL command. 

You do not have to specify the dummy sign in the MCRO command unless you want to 

use a dummy sign different from the percent sign or want to specify a comment. The 

printing system ignores the comment. A useful comment would be a list of the meanings 

of dummy parameters. In particular, a macro can contain the CALL command, permitting 

one macro to call another. Macro calls can be nested in this way up to a maximum 

depth of 20. 

If the body of the macro contains TEXT, RTXT, or CTXT commands and these have 

dummy parameters, the enclosing quotation marks should be included in the macro call, 

not in the macro definition. This enables strings containing commas, semicolons, consecutive 

spaces, apostrophes, and quotation marks to be printed. 

If a macro with the same name has already been defined, the new definition is ignored. 

To redefine a macro, you must first delete the old definition with the DELM (DELete 

Macro) or DAM (Delete All Macros) command, or by switching the printing system 

power off. 

There is no particular limit on the length of a macro. The maximum number of macros 

that can be defined is limited only by the amount of the available memory in the printing 

system. Each command in a macro is limited to 255 characters in length.

Examples of Macros 

Example 1 

Figure 3. 1. PRESCRIBE Macro Limitations 

Macro limitations are summarized as follows. 

Maximum number of macros downloadable 

to the printing system 


The following macro example draws a circle. It first names the macro that issues the 

PRESCRIBE commands for drawing a circle in the middle of a page. 

!R! MCRO CIR1; 

MZP 4, 5.5; CIR 1; 

ENDM; 

EXIT; 

When completed, this macro will draw a circle after it has been sent to the printing system. 

!R! CALL CIR1; EXIT; 

If you want circles of different sizes, you can make the radius into a so-called dummy 

parameter. Dummy parameters in macro definitions are denoted using percent symbols 

(%) as below: 

!R! MCRO CIRCLE; 

MZP 4, 5,5; CIR %1; 

ENDM; 

EXIT; 

Depends on the available printing system’s 

memory 

Maximum nesting levels 20 

Maximum length of macro name 4 characters 

Maximum number of parameters 19 

Maximum length of CALL command 255 bytes 

PRESCRIBE commands that should not be EXIT, LDFC, MCRO, DELM, DAM, 

contained within a macro definition RDMP, ENDD, ICCD, WRED, EPRM 

After this definition: CALL CIRCLE, 1; draws a one-inch circle, CALL CIRCLE, 

2; draws a two-inch circle, and so on. Note the commas are required to separate the 

macro name from the radius parameter in these CALL statements. 

3-3

Chapter 3 Macros 

3-4 

Example 2 

The next file presents a more ambitious project. It makes the graph-drawing commands 

in the preceding section into a pair of macros to draw multiple graphs. This file may help 

you to better understand the macro creating process. The DAM command in the first line 

is a safety precaution that clears any previous macros out of memory. 

!R! RES; UNITC; DAM; 

MCRO LOCATE; 

SLM %1; 

STM %2; 

ENDM; 

MCRO GRAPH; 

UNIT C; 

SPD 0.05; SCS 0.23; 

MAP 0, -7.3; TEXT %1; 

MAP 0, 0; BOX 6, -7; 

MAP -0.1, 0.5; 

TEXT ’Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat’; 

MAP 0, -%2; 

DAP 1, -%3; 

DAP 2, -%4; 

DAP 3, -%5; 

DAP 4, -%6; 

DAP 5, -%7; 

DAP 6, -%8; 

ENDM; 

CALL LOCATE, 2, 9; 

CALL GRAPH, ’Temperature’, 2.5, 3.5, 1.9, 3.0, 3.8, 2.8, 3.3; 


CALL GRAPH, ’Humidity’, 3.5, 1.0, 1.3, 2.6, 1.8, 6.4, 5.9; 


CALL GRAPH, ’Paid Attendance’, 5.2, 1.1, 0.9, 1.5, 1.3, 3.3, 4.4; 


CALL GRAPH, ’Pages Completed’, 0, 1.2, 4.4, 4.6, 3.2, 6.6, 0; 

PAGE; 

EXIT;

Figure 3. 2. Macro Example 2 


3-5

3-6 

This page is left blank intentionally.

Chapter 4 

Fonts 

This chapter covers font-related topics, including the printing system’s resident and 

option fonts, character sets, and usage of font-selection and symbol creation commands. 

A font is a set of characters of a particular design. The design is referred to as a typeface. 

Several characteristics identify a font. These include the font type (bit map or scalable), 

symbol set, spacing, pitch, height, style, stroke weight, and typeface family. In selecting 

a font, the printing system searches the available fonts to match these characteristics 

based on the highest priority. For details in this regard, see Selecting Fonts Using the 

FSET Command on page 4-9 in this chapter.

Chapter 4 Fonts 

Resident Fonts 

4-2 

List of Fonts 

The printing system provides one bitmap font and 136 scalable (outline) fonts as the resident 

fonts. Also, fonts may be downloaded to the printing system’s memory from a 

computer or a memory card. These fonts are referred to as downloadable or soft fonts. 

The printing system accepts as many downloadable fonts as user memory allows. 

When the HP LaserJet is the printing system’s default emulation, the power-up (default) 

font is Courier. A different default font can be selected by using the FRPO (Firmware 

RePrOgram) command of parameters V3 (or using the printing system’s operator panel 

key). For details, refer to FRPO Parameters on page 6-2. 

Resident scalable fonts provide an outline of characters which can be sized according to 

sizing information for the font. These fonts can be scaled from 0.25 to 999.75 points in 

quarter point increments. 

This section shows tables of the printing system’s resident fonts. It is possible to print a 

full list of resident fonts by the FLST command (or using the printing system’s operator 

panel key). To print a list of fonts, command: 

!R! FLST; EXIT; 

The following list shows all the resident fonts in the printing system. For example, Univers-Bd 

means a Universe style scalable font with bold weight. 

Font Name 

Courier 

CGTimes 

CGTimes-Bd 

CGTimes-It 

CGTimes-BdIt 

CGOmega 

CGOmega-Bd 

CGOmega-It 

CGOmega-BdIt 

Coronet 

Clarendon-Cd 

Univers-Md 

Univers-Bd 

Univers-MdIt 

Univers-BdIt 

Univers-MdCd 

Univers-BdCd 

Univers-MdCdIt 

Univers-BdCdIt 

AntiqueOlive 

AntiqueOlive-Bd 

AntiqueOlive-It 

GaramondAntiqua

4-3 

Garamond-Hlb 

Garamond-Krsv 

Garamond-HlbKrsv 

Marigold 

Albertus-Md 

Albertus-ExBd 

Arial 

Arial-Bd 

Arial-It 

Arial-BdIt 

TimesNewRoman 

TimesNewRoman-Bd 

TimesNewRoman-It 

TimesNewRoman-BdIt 

Helvetica 

Helvetica-Bd 

Helvetica-Ob 

Helvetica-BdOb 

Helvetica-Nr 

Helvetica-NrBd 

Helvetica-NrOb 

Helvetica-NrBdOb 

Palatino 

Palatino-Bd 

Palatino-It 

Palatino-BdIt 

ITCAvantGardeGothic-Bk 

ITCAvantGardeGothic-Dm 

ITCAvantGardeGothic- 

BkOb 

ITCAvantGardeGothic- 

DmOb 

ITCBookman-Lt 

ITCBookman-Dm 

ITCBookman-LtIt 

ITCBookman-DmIt 

NewCenturySchoolbook- 

Rom 

NewCenturySchoolbook-Bd 

NewCenturySchoolbook-It 

NewCenturySchoolbook- 

BdIt 

Times-Rom 

Times-Bd 

Times-It 

Times-BdIt 

ITCZapfChancery-MdIt 

Symbol 

Font Name


4-4 

KPDL Fonts 

Font Name 

SymbolPS 

Wingdings 

ITCZapfDingbats 

Courier-Bd 

Courier-It 

Courier-BdIt 

LetterGothic 

LetterGothic-Bd 

LetterGothic-It 

CourierPS 

CourierPS-Bd 

CourierPS-Ob 

CourierPS-BdOb 

LinePrinterBM8.5-Roman 

(Bitmap) 

In KPDL (Kyocera Print-system Description Language) emulation, the printing system 

provides PostScript-compatible 47 scalable fonts. These fonts are also accessible by 

using the PRESCRIBE command. 

Font Name 

Albertus-ExtraBold 

Albertus-Medium 

AntiqueOlive 

AntiqueOlive-Bold 

AntiqueOlive-Italic 

Arial 

Arial-Bold 

Arial-BoldItalic 

Arial-Italic 

AvantGarde-Book 

AvantGarde-BookOblique 

AvantGarde-Demi 

AvantGarde-DemiOblique 

Bookman-Demi 

Bookman-DemiItalic 

Bookman-Light 

Bookman-LightItalic 

CGOmega 

CGOmega-Bold 

CGOmega-BoldItalic 

CGOmega-Italic 

CGTimes 

CGTimes-Bold 

CGTimes-BoldItalic 

CGTimes-Italic

4-5 

Clarendon-Condensed-Bold 

Coronet 

Courier 

Courier-Bold 

Courier-BoldOblique 

Courier-Oblique 

CourierPCL 

CourierPCL-Bd 

CourierPCL-BoldItalic 

CourierPCL-Italic 

Garamond-Antiqua 

Garamond-Halbfett 

Garamond-Kursiv 

Garamond-KursivHalbfett 

Helvetica 

Helvetica-Bold 

Helvetica-BoldOblique 

Helvetica-Narrow 

Helvetica-Narrow-Bold 

Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique 

Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique 

Helvetica-Oblique 

LetterGothic 

LetterGothic-Bold 

LetterGothic-Italic 

Marigold 

NewCenturySchlbk-Bold 

NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic 

NewCenturySchlbk-Italic 

NewCenturySchlbk-Roman 

Palatino-Bold 

Palatino-BoldItalic 

Palatino-Italic 

Palatino-Roman 

Symbol 

Symbol MT 

Times-Bold 

Times-BoldItalic 

Times-Italic 

Times-Roman 

TimesNewRoman 

TimesNewRoman-Bold 

TimesNewRoman-BoldItalic 

TimesNewRoman-Italic 

Univers-Bold 

Univers-BoldItalic 

Univers-Condensed-Bold 

Univers-Condensed-BoldItalic 

Font Name


4-6 

Font Name 

Univers-Condensed-Medium 

Univers-Condensed-MediumItalic 

Univers-Medium 

Univers-MediumItalic 

Wingdings-Regular 

ZapfChancery-MediumItalic 

ZapfDingbats 

Substituting a Bitmap Font 

The printing system does not contain any bitmap fonts except LinePrinterBM8.5- 

Roman. If the printing system receives a request for the bitmap fonts that the previous 

lineups of the printers supported (tabled on page 4-4), a scalable font is substituted. 

For example, if Dutch801BM10-Roman, which means a Dutch 801 style bitmap font of 

10-point and Roman-style and was resident to the previous models of Kyocera printers, 

the printing system substitutes a Times Roman style scalable font. Other options include 

weights for bold and italic. 

The following table lists the bitmap fonts and the bitmap font numbers that the previous 

lineups of Kyocera printers support.The Kyocera printing system behaves exactly in the 

same manner when it receives these font numbers. It substitutes the scalable fonts for 

these fonts when required. 

Font Name Font Number Height (Pts.) Pitch (cpi) 

Port. Land. 

CourierBM12-Roman 1 17 12 10 

CourierBM12-Italic 37 18 12 10 

CourierBM12-Bold 38 67 12 10 

CourierBM12-BoldItalic 39 68 12 10 

Dutch801BM10-Roman 2 19 10 Prop. 

Dutch801BM10-Italic 3 20 10 Prop. 

Dutch801BM10-Bold 4 21 10 Prop. 

Dutch801BM10-BoldItalic 40 69 10 Prop. 

Dutch801BM8-Roman 5 22 8 Prop. 

Dutch801BM8-Italic 41 — 8 Prop. 

Dutch801BM8-Bold 42 70 8 Prop. 

Dutch801BM8-BoldItalic 43 — 8 Prop. 

PrestigeEliteBM10-Roman 6 23 10 12 

PrestigeEliteBM10-Italic 44 24 10 12 

PrestigeEliteBM10-Bold 45 71 10 12 

PrestigeEliteBM10-BoldItalic 46 72 10 12 

PrestigeEliteBM7.2-Roman 7 25 7.2 16.67 

PrestigeEliteBM7.2-Italic 47 — 7.2 16.67 

PrestigeEliteBM7.2-Bold 48 73 7.2 16.67 

PrestigeEliteBM7.2-BoldItalic 49 — 7.2 16.67 

LetterGothicBM12-Roman 8 26 12 12

Font Selection 

Font Name Font Number Height (Pts.) Pitch (cpi) 

Port. Land. 

LetterGothicBM12-Italic 50 27 12 12 

LetterGothicBM12-Bold 9 28 12 12 

LetterGothicBM12-BoldItalic 51 79 12 12 

LinePrinterBM8.5-Roman 88 — 8.5 16.67 

Swiss721BM14.4-Bold 10 29 14.4 Prop. 

Swiss721BM14.4-BoldItalic 52 — 14.4 Prop. 

Swiss721BM12-Bold 11 30 12 Prop. 

Swiss721BM12-BoldItalic 53 — 12 Prop. 



Swiss721BM8-Roman 13 32 8 Prop. 

Swiss721BM8-Italic 55 — 8 Prop. 



Swiss721BM6-Roman 14 33 6 Prop. 

Swiss721BM6-Italic 58 — 6 Prop. 



LinePrinterBM9-Roman 15 34 9 16.67 

LinePrinterBM9-Italic 61 35 9 16.67 

LinePrinterBM9-Bold 62 76 9 16.67 

LinePrinterBM9-BoldItalic 63 77 9 16.67 

LinePrinterBM7-Roman 16 36 7 21.43 

LinePrinterBM7-Italic 64 — 7 21.43 

LinePrinterBM7-Bold 65 78 7 21.43 

LinePrinterBM7-BoldItalic 66 — 7 21.43 


There are several ways to select the fonts: one way is to use the appropriate keys on the 

printing system’s control panel; a second way is to place a PRESCRIBE command in the 

file to be printed, as in the examples in Chapter 1; a third way is to select a printing system 

driver within a software application. This third way is preferable because the fonts 

are integrated directly into the software. In the absence of this support, the user should 

read the following information on choosing and placing PRESCRIBE commands. 

Font Selection by PRESCRIBE Commands 

The PRESCRIBE commands associated with font selection include: 

• FSET (change current Font SETting by characteristic) 

• SFNT (Select current FoNT by typeface) 

• ALTF (select ALTernate Font) and SETF (SET alternate Font) 

• SCF (Save Current Font) and RPF (Return to Previous Font) 

• SCCS (Save Current Code Set) and RPCS (Return to Previous Code Set) 

4-7


4-8 

• CSET (Change current symbol SET) 

• FTMD (set bitmap FonT MoDe) 

• FONT (select current FONT by number) 

• SFA (Set bitmap Font Attributes) 

The FTMD and SFA commands are only valid with bitmap fonts (which are simulated 

by resident scalable fonts). 

The following is a guideline to the use of these commands. Also, these commands are 

fully detailed in PRESCRIBE Command Reference. 

Selecting Fonts Using the SFNT Command 

Use the SFNT command to specify a font by typeface or to assign a font number to a 

scalable font, making it possible to select a scalable font with the FONT command (See 

Selecting Fonts with the FONT Command on page 4-10.). 

For example, to print text using the scalable Times font (TimesNewRoman) at 10 points, 

use the following sequence: 

!R! SFNT ’TimesNewRoman’, 10; EXIT; 

Here, TimesNewRoman represents the typeface name and 10 represents font height in 

the unit of points. Note that the SFNT command recognizes all character heights in terms 

of points, regardless of the specified unit value. 

The SFNT command is particularly useful when you want to assign the font number to a 

scalable font and alter its appearance by compressing, expanding, or obliquing it. The 

following example selects a scalable Dutch font, sizes it to 10 points, assigns it the font 

number 1001 and the Roman-8 symbol set, compresses it to 90 percent of its normal 

width, and obliques the font so that it tilts forward at an angle of 13.5 degrees. 

!R! SFNT ’TimesNewRoman’, 10, 1001, 277, .9, .3; EXIT; 

In this sequence, the assignment of font number 1001 enables it to be selected using the 

FONT command. Once this assignment has been made, it remains effective until 

changed with another SFNT command or until the power is turned off. 

Following the font number assignment, value 277 selects the symbol set Roman-8. A full 

list of symbol sets and values appear on the SFNT command page in PRESCRIBE 


The value .9 following the symbol set parameter indicates compression to 90 percent of 

normal width. Compression can be specified in a range from 0.3 (30 percent) to 3 

(300%). 

Compression = 0.3 Compression = 1 Compression = 3 

Finally, the value .3 concluding the font selection sequence specifies a forward tilt of 

13.5 degrees. The angle for normal characters is 0. Negative values result in backwardtilting 

characters. The angle parameter accepts any value from –1 (–45°) to 1 (45°). 

Examples appear below. 

Angle = –1 Angle = 0 Angle = 1


The parameters for symbol set, compression, and obliquing must be either all specified 

or all omitted. 

Selecting Fonts Using the FSET Command 

The FSET command provides a method of selecting fonts based on font characteristics 

and font location in the printing system. 

Font characteristics upon which selection is based appear in order of priority, from highest 

to lowest as follows: 

Characteristic Priority of selection 

Symbol set Highest 

Spacing 2 nd 

Pitch 3 rd 

Point size (height) 4 th 

Style 5 th 

Stroke weight 6 th 

Typeface family 7 th 

Location 8 th 

Orientation Lowest 

In selecting a font, the printing system searches the available fonts to match a characteristic 

based on the highest priority. If this matching produces only one font, that font is 

selected. If many fonts match this highest priority, then matching begins with the next 

highest characteristic. The printing system continues going down the list until only one 

font is left, then that font is selected. 

A font may reside in any of three locations: printing system ROM (for resident fonts, and 

option fonts, if installed), memory card (for card option fonts), and printing system RAM 

(for downloaded fonts). A font in printing system ROM has lower priority than an identical 

font on a memory card, and a memory card font has a lower priority than an identical 

font in printing system RAM. Also, assuming all other characteristics are the same, a 

scalable font has lower priority than a bitmap font (simulated). 

The last characteristic checked is the font orientation. If two fonts are found that differ 

only in orientation, the one selected is that which matches the page orientation. If only 

one font remains and its orientation does not match the orientation of the page, the printing 

system rotates the font to match the page orientation. 

The example below shows an FSET command sequence that selects the 12-point, 

upright, normal-weight, CGTimes font. (The FSET command sequences for selecting the 

resident fonts appear on the font lists.) 

FSET 1p12v0s0b4101T; 

The FSET command sequence may be followed by a CSET (Change current symbol 

SET) command which selects the desired HP symbol set. In the example below, the Windows 

symbol set is selected. 

CSET 9U; 

HP symbol set values can be referenced on the CSET command page in PRESCRIBE 


4-9


4-10 

Selecting Fonts with the FONT Command 

Bitmap Font Mode 

The FONT command uses font numbers to select fonts. A scalable font does not normally 

have the font number, therefore, you must take one extra step using the SFNT 

(Select FoNT by typeface) command. See Selecting Fonts Using the SFNT Command 

above. For example, to select the 10-point TimesNewRoman which was assigned with 

font number 1001, command: 

!R! SFNT ’TimesNewRoman’, 10, 1001; 

FONT 1001; 

EXIT; 

If you use a bitmap font, a change in fonts can also affect the character spacing, line 

spacing, and page orientation. This depends on the font mode (FTMD). With bitmap 

fonts, setting the font mode to 15 enables the printing system to adjust all these parameters 

automatically. When you select font 23 (landscape PrestigeEliteBM10-Roman), for 

example, the printing system automatically changes the character spacing to 12 characters 

per inch, the line spacing to about 7.25 lines per inch, and the page orientation to 

landscape. 

Remember that the font mode is only valid for bitmap fonts. Scalable fonts always adjust 

to the current page orientation. Also, with scalable fonts, you must use a line-spacing 

adjustment command to set the innate line spacing for the new font. 

Each emulation has a default font mode for bitmap fonts which takes effect when the 

emulation is enabled. Font mode 15 is the default font mode of the Line Printer emulation. 

The other emulations have lower default font mode values. 

If you use a variety of bitmap fonts, you will probably find font mode 13 most convenient. 

In font mode 13 character spacing and orientation are always correct, and the line 

spacing remains constant when you change fonts. Font mode 13 is the default font mode 

of the LaserJet emulation. To select font mode 13 in the other emulations, place the following 

sequence at the top of your program or file: 

!R! RES; FTMD 13; EXIT; 

(Place FTMD after RES, because RES resets the font mode.) 

One reason for selecting font mode 13 over font mode 15 is that a self adjusting line 

spacing feature can create disastrous affects with software applications designed to handle 

line spacing without the assistance of PRESCRIBE. 

For lower font mode, such as the default font modes in emulation modes 1 through 5, 

spacing and orientation adjustments may be necessary when you change fonts. Use the 

following commands: 

SCS (Set Character Spacing) or SCPI (Set Characters Per Inch), to adjust the character 

spacing, SLS (Set Line Spacing) or SLPI (Set Lines Per Inch), to adjust the line spacing, 

SPO (Set Page Orientation), to adjust the page orientation. 

The following sequences both use the FONT 19; command to select the 10-point Dutch 

801 font with landscape orientation and proportional character spacing. Neither sequence 

affects the line spacing. 

or 

!R! FONT 19; SPO L; SCS 0; EXIT;

!R! FTMD 13; FONT 19; EXIT; 


For making many font changes within a document, use the ALTF (change to ALTernate 

Font) and SETF (SET alternate Font) commands instead of FONT. To switch repeatedly 

between fonts 6 and 8, for example, place the following sequence at the beginning of 

your document: 

!R! SETF 1,6; CMNT PrestigeEliteBM10-Roman; 

SETF 2, 8; CMNT LetterGothicBM12-Roman; 

EXIT; 

Then use !R! ALTF1; EXIT; within the document to select font 6 and !R! ALTF2; EXIT; 

to select font 8. The advantages of ALTF and SETF are that: 

• The numbers are easy to remember (1 and 2 instead of 6 and 8). 

• All the font number assignments are collected in one place, where they can be easily 

checked. 

• If you change your mind and decide to use LetterGothicBM12-Bold (font 9) instead 

of LetterGothicBM12-Roman, all you have to change is one SETF command (from 

SETF 2, 8; to SETF 2, 9;). 

In emulation modes 1, 2, and 5, the SETF command can team up in a very effective way 

with embedded word-processing commands. See Chapter 7 for details. 

The SCF (Save Current Font) and RPF (Return to Previous Font) commands enable font 

numbers to be managed in stack fashion. These commands are particularly useful at the 

beginning and end of macros, and when you are using embedded commands of wordprocessing 

software. To ensure that the saved font is retrieved with the correct code set, 

add the SCCS (Save Current Code Set) and RPCS (Return to Previous Code Set) commands 

to the SCF and RPF command, respectively. 

For instance, to select a font using embedded commands, you can save the current font, 

call a new font, enter the text and return to the previous font, as in the following 

sequence. 

!R! SCF; FONT 7; EXIT; (Text of footnote...) 

!R! RPF; EXIT; 

This sequence leaves the current font, prints the footnote in font 7 (PrestigeEliteBM7.2- 

Roman), then returns to the previous font. 

Placement of Font Commands 

It is important to note that most existing word-processing software will not recognize 

PRESCRIBE font selection commands. However, this software typically accommodates 

embedded print commands whereby the PRESCRIBE command placed in a document is 

recognized as a print command and not as document text. The following command 

sequence demonstrates the embedded commands which might appear in a document. 

Example of an appropriate command placement: 

... end of previous paragraph. 

!R! ALTF 2; EXIT; 

Title or Heading !R! ALTF 1; EXIT; 

Start of next paragraph ... 

The first ALTF command appears on a blank line. The second ALTF command is placed 

at the end of a short title or heading, so that it fits on the same line and does not affect the 

line count. 

4-11


4-12 

Font Selection by Embedded Commands 

Word-processing programs with IBM and Epson printer drivers include support for a set 

of specific typefaces. The Kyocera printing system internally assigns these typefaces to 

match similar typefaces already in the printing system. Kyocera users may reassign these 

fonts to create a custom font list. To make this change, refer to the SETF command in 

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference. 

Word-processing programs that support the Diablo 630 printer use embedded ribboncolor 

commands. The printing system translates these internally into ALTF commands. 

By placing two SETF commands at the top of a file, you can designate any two desired 

fonts by ribbon-color commands. 

Word-processing programs that support the LaserJet printer have font description commands. 

Kyocera printing systems understand these commands. You can use them to 

select any of the fonts in the printing system. 

When you select fonts by selecting your software’s own commands, your software recognizes 

the command and is not thrown off in its tracking of characters per line or lines 

per page. The IBM, Epson, and LaserJet emulations support enough embedded commands 

to meet nearly all font selection needs. Only in the Line Printer emulation must 

you rely wholly on PRESCRIBE commands for font selection. 

Details on font selection by embedded command appear in Chapter 7. 

Creation of New Symbols and Characters 

With a little work, it is possible to design completely new bitmap characters by constructing 

their dot maps. This technique can be used to obtain special characters and 

symbols not provided in any of the symbol sets. The relevant command is the LDFC 

(LoaD Font Character) command. 

One LDFC command defines one character, specifying its font number, character code, 

dimensions, orientation, and bit map. An entire new font can be created by specifying an 

LDFC command for each character. The command format appears as follows. 

LDFC font, code, height, width, y-offset, x-offset, 

cell width, center, rotation, resolution; bit map; 

Some of the dimension parameters are specified in dots (1/300 inch). Other dimensions 

are specified in micro dots, a unit of measurement equal to 1/32 of 1 dot. These units are 

used regardless of the unit set by the UNIT command. The rotation parameter is a non 

executable parameter. It does not change the orientation of the character. Instead, it tells 

the printing system what the character’s orientation is, so that the printing system can 

adjust the page orientation correctly (when the font mode is 8 or higher), and can select 

the font in response to embedded word-processing commands for a particular rotation. 

The rotation parameter should be the same for all characters in the font. 

The bit map can be constructed by drawing the character on square-ruled paper (shown 

at right) and proceeding as explained below. To demonstrate, we shall encode the bit map 

for a small diamond-shaped character (the figure below).

Symbol Set 

Figure 4. 1. Character dot pattern 

Symbol Set 

The pattern is 13 dots high and 13 dots wide. The pattern is encoded as a series of 16-bit 

words. If necessary, blank cells may be added on the right to make the width a multiple 

of 16. For this reason, the three extra columns appear on the right (see the figure above). 

Each 16-bit word is encoded with three characters, representing the most significant six 

bits, the next six bits, and the least significant four bits, respectively, as shown in Defining 

Fill Patterns in Chapter 2. 

To obtain the character codes, divide the word into sections of six, six, and four bits and 

calculate the numerical value of each section (referred to as x, y, and z, respectively), 

treating it as a binary number in which the white dots are zeros and the black dots are 

ones. Then add an offset of 64 to the values of the six-bit sections and 48 to the values of 

the four-bit sections. The result is the ASCII code of the character representing that section 

(x, y, and z, respectively). Refer to the example of dot map and numerical derivation 

in Defining Fill Patterns in Chapter 2. The procedure for the numerical derivation is 

identical to creating fill patterns for XPAT. 

Six-bit sections consisting of all black dots, as in the middle row of this symbol, are a 

special case. They encode by using the ASCII code 127, which is the unprintable delete 

code. Character 47 (/) may therefore be used instead. 

The resolution may be specified for 300 or 600 (dpi) only in printing system models that 

support the 600-dpi resolution printing. LDFC generated 300 dpi characters may print 

when the default resolution is 300 or 600 dpi. It is not possible for 600 dpi LDFC generated 

characters to print at 300 dpi. 

The bit map data proceeds from left to right across the character pattern, then from top to 

bottom. The data can be formatted by inserting line-feeds, but not spaces. If we assign 

this character an x-offset of 0 and a y-offset and cell width of 500 micro dots each, and 

make it ASCII code 42 (*) of font 1000, it creates the following LDFC command: 

!R! LDFC 1000, 42, 13, 13, 500, 0, 500, 250, 0; 

@’0@’0Ap0Ap0Cx00|At0//J80|At0Cx0Ap0Ap0@’0@’0; 

UNIT C; 

BOX 4.35, 0.75, L; 

FONT 1000; 

TEXT ’ * * * * * * * * ’; 

EXIT; 

The page printing system can produce sets of alphabet, numeric, and symbol characters. 

These sets, with each character assigned to a particular code, are known as symbol sets. 

4-13


4-14 

The following figure shows all the characters included in the most common symbol set, 

HP Roman-8. 

Figure 4. 2. Roman-8 Symbol Set 

In addition to a large selection of bitmap and scalable fonts, the printing system supports 

many symbol sets (also referred to as character sets). The variety of Kyocera supported 

symbol sets can be attributed to the numerous printer emulations. Most of those symbol 

sets are the same regarding the letters of the alphabet, digits, and basic punctuation 

marks, but they differ considerably in their special symbols which lie in the upper half of 

the character code table, consisting of character codes 128 through 254 (hex 80 through 

FE). 

Charts for the available symbol sets in each emulation appear in Chapter 7. 

Only the resident fonts can be assigned with a new symbol set. All downloaded fonts 

contain specific symbol sets. 

International Characters 

The INTL (print INTernationaL characters) command provides quick access to printing 

characters from a different character set, characters not found in the default symbol set 

(US ASCII). By simply using the INTL command with appropriate parameters for language 

and country code, the Kyocera user can access a wide variety of specific characters. 

The following sequence selects the ISO-4 U.K. symbol set for the Swiss721BM8-Roman 

font in the HP LaserJet emulation: 

!R! UNIT P; CMNT Emulation must be HPLJ; 

FONT 13; 

INTL 3, 1; CMNT ISO-4 U.K.; 

EXIT; 

The U.K. symbol set is identical to the US ASCII character set except that it has the 

pound currency symbol (\P) in place of the number sign (#). 

It should be noted that the symbol set selected by INTL is specific to the currently emulated 

printer (HP LaserJet in the above example). If the current emulation is changed to 

Diablo 630 for the example above (by a SEM command, for example), the INTL command 

selects the Diablo U.K. symbol set instead of HP ISO-4 U.K. symbol set. 

Selecting HP Symbol Sets 

The HP LaserJet emulation has considerably more supported symbol sets than can be 

accessed through the INTL command. To establish a symbol set, use one of the following 

commands.

• CSET (Change symbol SET) 

• SFNT (Select current FoNT by typeface) 

Symbol Set 

The CSET command selects a symbol set by specifying its identification code which 

closely resembles the command parameters of the HP printer control language. In the 

example below, the Windows symbol set is selected. 

CSET 9U; 

The CSET command may be preceded by an FSET font selection command. Remember 

that the symbol set has the highest priority in font selection. The following example still 

selects the ISO-4 U.K. symbol set for the Swiss742SWC-Roman font in the HP LaserJet 

emulation: 

!R! UNIT P; 

FSET 1p12v0s0b4148T; CMNT 4148 means Universe; 

CSET 1E; CMNT ISO-4 U.K.; 

EXIT; 

The SFNT command, primarily used to select and size a scalable font as stated previously, 

also provides the parameter that specifies a symbol set for the font. It has the following 

format: 

SFNT ’typeface’[, height[, font-number[, symbol-set, compression, angle]]]; 

In the above format, the symbol-set parameter specifies the symbol set for the font designated 

by typeface. The symbol-set value must be given together with the compression 

and angle parameters. In the example below, the symbol-set value 37 assigns the ISO-4 

U.K. symbol set to the Universe medium font. 

!R! UNIT P; 

SFNT ‘Universe-Md’, 12, 2000, 37, 1, 0; 

CMNT 37=ISO-4 U.K.; 

EXIT; 

The symbol set values are tabled in LaserJet Symbol Sets in Chapter 7. 

4-15

4-16 


Chapter 5 

Barcodes 

This chapter is a tutorial for encoding data into linear barcode and two-dimensional barcodes 

(PDF barcodes) by using PRESCRIBE commands. The former part of this chapter 

deals with how to implement the linear barcodes, the latter part explains the PDF417. 

They are step-by-step guide with a direct and practical approach.

Chapter 5 Barcodes 

Linear Barcodes 

5-2 

Note 

The printing system is capable of printing a wide variety of barcodes, with human-readable 

text if desired. The user need only specify the type of barcode and the data to be 

encoded. The printing system performs the rest of the work, including bar and space generation, 

symbol translation, insertion of start and stop codes, checksum calculation, interleaving, 

padding, zero suppression, and parity reversal. 

The scanability of barcodes is affected by the quality of the paper and the type of scanner 

used. Parameters of the BARC command enable the width of the bars and spaces to be 

adjusted to compensate for these factors. A certain amount of testing and experimentation 

may be needed to find the right parameter values for a particular set of conditions. 

PRESCRIBE uses the BARC (draw BARCode) command to execute barcodes. This 

printing system feature is described fully in this chapter. 

The BARC command uses the following format. 

BARC type, flag, ’string’[, short, tall[, bar1, bar2, bar3, bar4, space1, space2, space3, 

space4]]; 

The BARC command prints specified data in barcode form. The cursor is located at the 

top left corner of the barcode for types 0 to 38, 40 and 41, and at the bottom left corner of 

the barcode for type 39, and does not move. 

The type, flag, and string parameters are always required. The other parameters are 

optional. The type parameter is a number from 0 to 42 designating one of the barcode 

types listed in Numbers outside the range from 0 to 42 are regarded as type 15 (MSI barcode 

with no check digit). 

The flag parameter specifies whether (Y or y) or not (N or n) to print a human-readable 

text under the barcode. The text is printed in the printing system’s current font. Any 

desired font can be obtained by placing a font selection command before the BARC 

command. The flag parameter for barcodes 39 and 40 (USPS) must be N. 

The string parameter gives the barcode data enclosed in apostrophes or quotation marks. 

The allowable length of the string and the characters that can be included depend on the 

barcode type. lists the allowed lengths and character sets. 

also lists a default character that is used to fill out strings shorter than the minimum 

length and which may be substituted for any illegal characters in the string. 

If the string is too long, it is truncated to the maximum allowed length. 

Examples: 

!R! UNIT I; BARC 11, N, ’123456’; EXIT; 

!R! BARC 0, Y, ’12345678910’; EXIT;

The short and tall parameters specify the short and tall bar heights in the unit designated 

by the UNIT command (default: inches). The short and tall parameters must be both 

specified or both omitted. If they are omitted, the default values as shown in Table 5.3. 

must be specified. 

Only barcode types 0 to 12, 35 to 38, and 39 have two bar heights. For types 13 to 34, 40, 

and 41, the bar height is determined by the short parameter and the tall parameter is 

ignored. Even when all bars are the same height, however, the command syntax requires 

that when a short parameter is specified, the tall parameter must be specified too. 

Examples: 

!R! UNIT I; BARC 15, N, ’1234567890’, .2, .2; EXIT; 

!R! UNIT I; BARC 8, Y, ’123456’, .6, .7; EXIT; 

When two bar heights with human-readable text are used, in some cases the tall bars may 

overlap the text. 

The bar1 to bar4 and space1 to space4 parameters adjust the width of the bars and 

spaces. Fine adjustment of these parameters may be needed to obtain scannable barcodes 

for a particular scanner and type of paper. The dots unit (UNIT D;) is convenient. Barcode 

40 (USPS FIM) ignores all these parameters and therefore has a constant height and 

space. 

Some barcode types have only two classes of widths (bar1, bar2, space1, space2). Others 

have three or four classes. Regardless of the barcode type, when any width parameter 

is specified all eight width parameters must be specified together. In the case of two 

classes of widths, dummy values must be specified for bar3, bar4, space3, and space4. 

The bar and space width parameters should be specified in ascending order. The maximum 

specifiable value is 200 dots. 

1 ≤ bar1 ≤ bar2 ≤ bar3 ≤ bar4 ≤200 (dots) 

1 ≤ space1 ≤ space2 ≤ space3 ≤ space4 ≤ 200 (dots) 

5-3


5-4 

If the bar and space width parameters are omitted, the printing system uses suitable 

default values. Table 5.3. indicates the number of width classes and the default values for 

each barcode type. 

Barcode 19 (Code 39) has two width classes, which are set to 5 and 10 dots respectively 

in the example below. Bar1 and space1 are both 5 dots, and bar2 and space2 are 10 dots. 

Bar3, space3, bar4, and space4 are all given dummy values of 10. 

Examples: 

!R! UNIT D; 

BARC 19, Y, ’0123ABC’, 60, 60, 5, 10, 10, 10, 5, 10, 10, 10; 

EXIT; 

The above widths are doubled in the next example. 

!R! UNIT D; 

BARC 19, Y, ’0123ABC’, 60, 60, 10, 20, 20, 20, 10, 20, 20, 20; 

EXIT; 

Barcode 36 (EAN 8 with a five-digit supplement) has four width classes, which are set to 

10, 20, 30, and 40 dots in the example below. Two bar heights are also used. 

!R! UNIT D; 

BARC 36, N, ’012345678912’, 180, 220, 10, 20, 30, 40, 10, 

20, 30, 40; 

EXIT; 

Barcode 39 (USPS POSTNET) prints a POSTNET barcode on a mail piece. The United 

States Postal Service (USPS) utilizes POSTNET (POSTal Numeric Encoding Technique) 

to process bulk mail and business reply envelopes quickly and efficiently. 

Though this barcode accepts any values within the range specified on the previous page, 

we recommend that all parameters except type, flag, and string not be specified as the 

scanability of the barcode is most effective with the default values. Also the flag parameter 

for this barcode must be N (do not print human-readable text). See the figure on 8. for 

POSTNET barcode location.

Barcode 41 (USPS FIM) prints a Facing Identification Mark pattern which may be 

printed on the envelope adjacent to the stamp. The combination of a FIM and the POST- 

NET (barcode 39) barcode enables faster processing by the USPS. 

When generating a FIM pattern, all parameters except type, flag, and string are ignored. 

The flag parameter must be N. Characters permitted for the string parameter are ‘A’, ‘B’, 

‘C’, and ‘D’ only, and each represents one of four different FIM patterns. For example, 

Courtesy Replay Mail and stamped reply mail require the FIM-A pattern, while Business 

Reply Mail and unstamped (prepaid) return mail require the FIM-C pattern. Also see the 

figure on 8 for FIM location. 

Barcode 43 (Customer) has four bar heights. Only the shortest and tallest bar heights are 

specifiable, the heights for the intermediate two bars being adjusted automatically. Any 

values entered for bar and space widths are ignored and defaulted to 1.68 points respectively. 

The rules for the order of specifiable bar and space widths, bar1≤bar2≤bar3≤bar4 

and space1≤space2≤space3≤space4, must be adhered to, however. 

Table 5.1. Barcode Types (Sheet 1 of 2) 

No. Type 

0 UPC A 

1 UPC A with two-digit supplement 

2 UPC A with five-digit supplement 

3 UPC D-1 

4 UPC D-2 

5 UPC D-3 

6 UPC D-4 

7 UPC D-5 

8 UPC E 

9 UPC E with two-digit supplement 

10 UPC E with five-digit supplement 

11 EAN-8 

12 EAN-13 

13 DUN-14 (Distribution Unit Number, EAN) 

14 DUN-16 (Distribution Unit Number, EAN) 

15 MSI with no check digit 

16 MSI with single mod-10 check digit 

17 MSI mod-10 followed by mod-10 check digit 

18 MSI mod-11 followed by mod-10 check digit 

19 Code 39 with no check digit (USD-3) 

20 Code 39 with mod-43 check digit (USD-3) 

21 Interleaved two of five (USD-1) with no check digit (See No. 41.) 

22 Identicon two of five with no checksum 

23 Code 128 (USD-6) manual code change 

24 Code 128 (USD-6) automatic code change 

25 Code 11 with only ’c’ checksum (USD-8) 

26 Code 11 with both ’c’ and ’k’ checksums (USD-8) 

27 Code 93 with both ’c’ and ’k’ checksums (USD-7) 

28 CODABAR with no check digits (USD-4) 

29 Matrix two of five with no checksum 

30 Datalogic two of five with no checksum 

31 Industrial two of five with no checksum 

5-5


5-6 

Table 5.1. Barcode Types (Sheet 2 of 2) 

No. Type 

32 Ames with no checksum 

33 Delta distance ’a’ (IBM) with no checksum 

34 Delta distance ’a’ (IBM) with checksum 

35 EAN 8 with two-digit supplement 

36 EAN 8 with five-digit supplement 

37 EAN 13 with two-digit supplement 

38 EAN 13 with five-digit supplement 

39 POSTNET (USPS) 

40 FIM (USPS) 

41 Interleaved two of five (USD-1) with checksum 

42 UCC/EAN 128 

43 Customer 

44 Wide gap CODABAR 

Table 5.2. Length, Character Set, and Default (Sheet 1 of 2) 

Type Length Character set Default 

0 11 0123456789 0 

1 13 

2 16 

3 13 

4 18 

5 22 

6 25 

7 29 

8 6 

9 8 

10 11 

11 7 

12 12 

13 13 

14 15 

15 1-14 

16 1-14 

17 1-14 

18 1-14 

19 1–40 $%+-./0123456789ABCDEFGHIJK LMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Space 

and space 

20 1–40 

21 2–26 0123456789 0 

22 1–25 

23 1–40 All printable characters (ASCII codes 32 to 126) Space 

24 2–40 

25 1–45 -0123456789 Space 

26 1–45 

27 1–50 All printable characters (ASCII codes 32 to 126) Space 

28 3–32 $+-./0123456789:abcdetn* –

Table 5.2. Length, Character Set, and Default (Sheet 2 of 2) 

Type Length Character set Default 

0123456789 0 

29 

30 

31 

1–25 

1–25 

1–25 

32 1–25 -0123456789 0 

33 1–25 0123456789KLMO 0 

34 1–25 

35 9 0123456789 0 

36 12 

37 14 

38 17 

39 139 0123456789 – 

40 1 One of the following FIM pattern types: 

A – Country Reply Mail with POSTNET. 

B – Business Reply, Penalty and Franked Mail without POST- 

NET. 

C – Business Reply, Penalty and Franked Mail with POSTNET. 

D – OCR Readable Mail without POSTNET. 

0 

41 125 0123456789 0 

42 80 All printable characters (ASCII codes 32 to 126) 

43 1-20 0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ – 

44 3-32 $+-./0123456789:abcdetn* and space – 

5-7


5-8 

Table 5.3. Location of POSTNET and FIM 

POSTNET 

(BARC 39) 

Clear Zone 

( 5 / 8” × 4- 1 / 2”) 

Not drawn to scale 

Preferred location 

for left-most bar 

1 /8” 

1 /4” 

5 /8” 

FIM (BARC 40) 

Clear Zone 

Barcode read area 

4- 1 / 2” 

1”- 1 / 4” 

Table 5.4. Bar Height and Width Classes 

Preferred base height 

4” max. 

2”± 1 / 8” 

1”- 3 / 4” 

Stamp 

3- 1 / 4” min. 

Type Tall bars Width classes Default (dots) 

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 

0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 12 18 24 













13 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

14 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

15 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

16 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

17 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

18 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

19 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

20 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

21 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

3” 

7 /16 ” 

3 /16” 

5 /8 ”min.

Table 5.4. Bar Height and Width Classes 

Type Tall bars Width classes Default (dots) 

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 

22 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

23 — Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 12 18 24 

24 — Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 12 18 24 

25 — Yes Yes Yes — 6 14 21 (21) 

26 — Yes Yes Yes — 6 14 21 (21) 

27 — Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 12 18 24 

28 — Yes Yes — — 6 18 (18) (18) 

29 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

30 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

31 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

32 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

33 — Yes Yes Yes — 6 12 18 (24) 

34 — Yes Yes Yes — 6 12 18 (24) 





41 — Yes Yes — — 6 12 (18) (24) 

42 — Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 12 18 24 

44 — Yes Yes — — 6 18 (18) (18) 

Table 5.5. Bar Height, Width, Pitch, and Spacing for types 39, 40, and 43 

Type Height Width Pitch Spacing 

39 Tall: 0.125" Short: 0.05" 0.02" 21 bars/inch 0.0475" 

40 5/8" 0.031" 1/16" (Tilt: ±5°) 

43 Tall: 10.2 pt. Short: 3.4 pt. 1.68 pt. – 1.68 pt. 

5-9


Two-dimensional Barcodes 

5-10 

PDF 417 is a two-dimensional stacked barcode symbology capable of encoding over a 

kilobyte of data per label. This is important for applications where a barcode must be 

more than merely an identifier, an index to reference a database. 

The portable data file approach is well suited to applications where it is impractical to 

store item information in a database or where the database is not accessible when and 

where the item's barcode is read. Because a PDF417 symbol can store so much data, item 

data such as the content of a shipping manifest or equipment maintenance history can be 

carried on the item, without requiring access to a remote database. 

Encoding data into a PDF417 barcode is a two-step process. First, data is converted into 

codeword values of 0-928, which represent the data. This is high-level encoding. Then 

the values are physically represented by particular bar/space patterns, which is low-level 

encoding. Decoding is the reverse process. 

In addition, PDF417 is an error-correcting symbology designed for real-world applications 

where portions of labels can get destroyed in handling. It performs error correction 

by making calculations, if necessary, to reconstruct undecoded or corrupted portions of 

the symbol. 

PDF417 Symbol Description 

module 

codeword 

At first glance, a PDF417 symbol looks like a set of stacked barcodes. When we look 

closer to analyze how the symbol is put together, there are several key elements. These 

are rows, start patterns, stop patterns, codewords, and modules, whose definitions are 

explained below. 

The narrowest width of a bar or space in the barcode. All bars or spaces are multiples (up 

to six times) of this width. The nominal unit of measure. 

A single group of bars and spaces (or elements) representing one or more numbers, letters, 

or other symbols (i.e., codeword values for the data to be encoded). Each PDF417 

codeword contains four bars and four spaces, for a total of 17 module widths. Each codeword 

starts with a bar and ends with a space. See figure below. 

1-module width 

3-module wide bar 

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

start pattern 

stop pattern 

row 

A unique pattern of light and dark elements which indicates the leftmost part of a barcode 

label. 

A unique pattern of light and dark elements which indicates the rightmost part of a barcode 

label. 

A lateral set of elements made up of a start pattern, codewords, and a stop pattern. Each 

PDF417 symbol must have at least 3 rows. See figure below. 

Quiet zone 

Start pattern 

In each row, between left and right row indicators, there may be from 1 to 30 data codewords. 

Collectively, among all rows, these codewords form data columns. 

Overall Symbol Structure 

Left row indicator 

codeword 

Data codeword 

Right row indicator 

codeword 

Quiet zone 

Row 1 

Row 2 

Row 3 

Row 4 

Quiet zone 

Any PDF417 symbol is made up of at least 3 rows, and at most 90 rows. The minimum 

number of codewords in a row is 3; this includes the left row indicator codeword, 1 data 

codeword, and the right row indicator. 

Every symbol contains 1 codeword (the first data codeword in row 0) indicating the total 

number of data codewords within the symbol, and at least 2 error-detection codewords. 

General PDF417 symbol structure is indicated in the following diagram: 

Stop pattern 

Quiet zone 

5-11


5-12 

Start 

L0 

L1 

Lm-2 

Lm-1 

Printing a Two-dimensional Barcode 

Functions of XBCP 

Left row indicators Data codeword area Right row indicators 

dn-1 dn-2 

Error correction area 

d0 

Ck-1 Ck-2 Rm-2 

C1 C0 Rm-1 

XBAR, XBCP, XBUF, and ENDB commands support two-dimensional barcode printing. 

Each command does the following to put data together for printing a barcode. 

XBAR Prints a two-dimensional barcode from the given data string. Must 

be followed by an ENDB command. 

XBCP Specifies various options for the barcode to be printed using XBAR 

depending on the mode following the command (0 through 19). See 

Macro PDF417 on page 14. 

XBUF Defines a buffer name for a data input for XBAR command. 

ENDB Terminates a XBAR command sequence. 

The mode parameter in XBCP command format identifies the various functions as listed 

below. These commands are detailed in the PRESCRIBE Commands Command 

Reference. 

XBCP mode Meaning 

XBCP 0 Reset 

XBCP 1 Narrowest element width 

XBCP 2 Error correction (by percentage) 

XBCP 3 Error correction (by predetermined level) 

XBCP 4 Number of rows 

XBCP 5 Number of columns 

XBCP 6 Aspect ratio of height and width 

XBCP 7 Bar height by a ratio of element width 

XBCP 8 Number of rows and columns (XBCP 4 and 5) 

XBCP 9 Truncation 

XBCP 10 through 19 These modes give additional control options used to support Macro 

PDF417 barcodes. See more details in section Macro PDF417. 

R0 

R1 

Stop

Positioning the Barcodes 

The following commands are positioning commands the PRESCRIBE language provides. 

These commands are useful and sometimes essential for proper positioning of the 

barcodes onto a medium such as label. More detailed discussion on these (and some 

other) positioning commands can be found in the PRESCRIBE Commands Command 

Reference. 

By default the cursor is located at the top left corner of the barcode and stays there after 

printing is done. 

MAP Moves the cursor to a position relative to the top and left margins. 

MRP Moves the cursor from the current to a specified relative position. 

MZP Moves the cursor to a position relative to the top and left edge limits 

of the page. 

UNIT Sets the unit of measurement used in the PRESCRIBE commands 

including the above. The initial unit is inches. The other units are 

related to inches as: 1 inch=2.54 centimeters=72 points=300 or 600 

dots (depending on the printing system model). 

Limitations of Two-dimensional Barcode 

Item Description 

Encodable character set 256 international characters and binary data 

Code type Continuous 

Character self checking Yes 

Bi-directional decoding Yes 

Number of row indicator codewords 

required per row 

2 

Number of symbol checksum 

codewords required 

2 

Minimum number of rows per 

symbol 

3 

Maximum number of rows per 

symbol 

90 

Minimum number of data columns 1 

Maximum number of data columns 

30 

Number of symbol length descriptors 

required 

1 

Smallest nominal element width 0.0075 inch or 0.191 mm 

Smallest nominal element height 0.01 inch or 0.254 mm 

Maximum data characters per 

symbol 

Assuming 928 codewords – 1 symbol length descriptor 

– 2 symbol checksum codewords = 925 data codewords. 

Binary/ASCII plus mode: 1108 bytes. 

Extended alphanumeric compaction mode (EXC): 

1850 ASCII characters. Numeric compaction mode: 

2725 digits. 

For Macro PDF417, which transparently distributes information among a number of 

PDF417 symbols, the above storage limits are increased to more than one million bytes 

in Binary/ASCII Plus mode and morethan 2.5 million bytes in EXC mode. 

5-13


5-14 

Macro PDF417 

Note 

Macro PDF417 provides a powerful mechanism for creating a distributed representation 

of files too large to be presented by a single PDF417 barcode. Macro PDF417 barcodes 

differ from ordinary PDF417 barcodes in that they contain additional control options 

which are added by modes 10 through 19 of the XBCP command. This allows a reader to 

make use of this information to correctly reconstruct and verify the file, independent of 

the barcode scanning order. 

The terminology PRESCRIBE macro and macro PDF are not the same. Refer to the 

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference for the PRESCRIBE macro commands 

(MCRO, ENDM, etc.). 

The following modes of XBCP are used for Macro PDF417 to represent additional control 

options for XBAR. Note that implementation of these parameters are optional except 

XBCP 17 and XBCP 18. 

XBCP 10 File name 

XBCP 11 Block count 

XBCP 12 Time stamp 

XBCP 13 Sender ID 

XBCP 14 Addressee ID 

XBCP 15 File size 

XBCP 16 Check sum 

XBCP 17 File ID 

XBCP 18 Macro PDF417 execution 

XBCP 19 Distributed barcodes positioning 

Creating a Macro PDF 417 Representation 

A Macro PDF417 creation begins with giving fileid using XBCP 17 for the ensuing 

Macro PDF417 sequences. Each one XBAR command sequence is needed for each 

divided barcode which is succeeded by a XBCP 18 statement that defines a separate 

block index for each barcode. The block index is needed to ensure that the divided barcodes 

are reconstructed in the correct order as the whole file when the barcodes are read. 

The basic command sequence for Macro PDF417 is as follows. 

... 

XBCP 17, ’fileid’; Gives the same file ID to all distributed barcodes. 

MZP x1, y1; Position the first barcode at (x1, y1). 

XBCP 18, 0; Block index for the first barcode. 

XBAR; data_string;ENDB; Encode and print the first divided barcode. 

MZP x2, y2; Position the second barcode at (x2, y2). 

XBCP 18, 1; Assign block index 1 to the second barcode. 

XBAR; data_string;ENDB; Encode and print the second divided barcode. 

MZP x3, y3; Position the second barcode at (x3, y3). 

XBCP 18, 2; 

... 

Assign block index 2 to the second barcode. 

The largest allowed block index is 99,998. Thus, up to 99,999 Macro PDF417 barcodes 

may comprise the distributed representation of a data file.

Some samples for Macro PDF417 are provided in PRESCRIBE Commands Command 

Reference on the XBCP page. 

5-15


5-16

Chapter 6 

Permanent Parameters 

The printing system maintains a number of parameters in a non-volatile (flash) memory. 

These parameters control the initial state of the environment at power-up, including the 

initial emulation mode, page orientation, character set, buffer allocations in memory, 

interface parameters, and other options. 

The parameters may be changed permanently with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) 

command. Some FRPO parameters affect only the current interface (interface-dependent) 

and some affect all interfaces at once (non-interface-dependent). If the printing system 

is shared with other users, remember that any changes to any non-interfacedependent 

parameters may interfere with the print jobs of the other users. This chapter 

explains the FRPO command and gives examples of its use. 

The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as option values on the printing 

system’s service status page. Refer to the tables in this chapter to interpret the values. To 

print a service status page, command: 

!R! STAT 1; EXIT; 

Before changing any FRPO parameter, print out a service status page, so you will know 

the parameter values before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their 

factory default values, send the FRPO INIT (FRPO-INITialize) command.

Chapter 6 Permanent Parameters 

FRPO Parameters 

6-2 

Note 

The FRPO command changes the value of one parameter in permanent memory. A 

separate command is required for each parameter change. The parameters, their 

meanings, and the specifiable values are listed below. 

In these tables, the Interface-dependent parameters affect the environment on the current 

interface only. Any changes made to the parameters on one interface will not change 

parameters on the other interfaces. To change a similar parameter on another interface, 

first switch to that interface then issue the FRPO command. 

The Interface-independent parameters affect all interfaces simultaneously. If the printing 

system is shared with other users, remember that changes made to non-interfacedependent 

parameters can affect users on other interfaces as well. 

Certain parameters are available only when the printing system is installed with the relevant 

option equipment. 

Interface-dependent Parameters 

Table 6.1. Interface-dependent Parameters (Sheet 1 of 3) 

Environment Parameter Value Factory setting 

Top margin a A1 Integer value in inches 0 

A2 Fraction value in 1/100 inches 0 

Left margina A3 Integer value in inches 0 

A4 Fraction value in 1/100 inches 0 

Page lengtha A5 Integer value in inches 13 (17) b 

A6 Fraction value in 1/100 inches 61 (30) b 

Page widtha A7 Integer value in inches 13 (17) b 

A8 Fraction value in 1/100 inches 61 (30) b 

Page orientationa C1 0: Portrait, 1: Landscape 0 

Default font No. a C5 First two digits of power-up font 00 

C2 Middle two digits of power-up font 00 

C3 Last two digits of power-up font 00 

Operation panel 

settings saving 

C6 0: Not saved at power-off 1 

1: Saved at power-off 

PCL font rangec C8 0: Includes proportional bitmap fonts 0 

1: Excludes proportional bitmap fonts in range 

KC-GL optionsa G0 0: Mode A; formfeed to SP0 0 

1: Mode B; formfeed to SP0 

2: Mode A; no formfeed to SP0 

3: Mode B; no formfeed to SP0 

4: Fixed mode A; formfeed 

5: Fixed mode B; formfeed 

6: Fixed mode A; no formfeed 

7: Fixed mode B; no formfeed 

8: Mode A; formfeed 

9: Mode B; formfeed 

10: Mode A; no formfeed 

11: Mode B; no formfeed 

12: Fixed mode A; formfeed 

13: Fixed mode B; formfeed 

14: Fixed mode A; no formfeed 

15: Fixed mode B; no formfeed 

KC-GL pen widtha G1 through G8 0 to 99 dot 01/02/03/04/ 

05/06/07/08 

Interface release timeout 

J2 0 to 99 in units of 5 seconds 6


KC-GL enlarge modea Environment Parameter Value Factory setting 

J9 0: Off 0 

1: A2 

2: A1 

3: A0 

4: B3 

5: B2 

6: B1 

7: B0 

Duplex mode N4 0: Simplex mode 0 

1: Long-edge binding 

2: Short-edge binding 

Default emulation 

mode 

P1 0: Line Printer 6 

1: IBM Proprinter X24E 

2: Diablo 630 

5: Epson LQ-850 

6: HP LaserJet 

8: KC-GL 

9: KPDL 

Carriage-return action P2 0: Ignores 0x0d 1 

1: Carriage-return 

2: Carriage-return+linefeed 

Linefeed action P3 0: Ignores 0x0d 1 

1: Linefeed 

2: Linefeed+carriage-return 

Automatic emulation 

sensing d 

P4 0: AES disabled 0 

1: AES enabled 

Alternative emulation P5 Same as the P1 values except that 9 is ignored. 6 (HP LJ) 

Automatic emulation 

switching trigger 

Emulation switching 

after receiving !R! 

P7 0: Page eject commands 10 

1: None 

2: Page eject and Prescribe EXIT 

3: Prescribe EXIT 

4: Page eject commands 

5: Formfeed (^L) 

6: Page eject, Prescribe EXIT and formfeed 

7: Prescribe EXIT and formfeed 

8: Page eject commands; if AES fails, resolves 

to alternative emulation (P5) 

9: None; if AES fails, resolves to alternative 

emulation 

10: Page eject commands; if AES fails, resolves 

to KPDL 

P8 0: Current emulation 

1: Default emulation (P1) 

2: Alternative emulation (P5) 

Sorter sharing S0 0: Stand alone 

1: Multi users 

2: Multiple interfaces 

Sorter mode S1 0: Sorter 0 

1: Collator 

2: Stacker 

3: Mailbox 

Sorter message S2 0: Remove sorter paper messaged 0 

1: Remove sorter paper deactivated except at 

power-up 

2: Remove sorter paper deactivated 

Sorter overfilling S3 0: Interrupts printing until trays are emptied 0 

behavior 

1: Bypasses printing to the face-down tray 

Job separate mode S8 0: Whole pages 

0 

1: 1st page only 

Line spacinga U0 Lines per inch (integer value) 6 

Line spacinga U1 Lines per inch (fraction value) 0 

Character spacinga U2 Characters per inch (integer value) 10 

Character spacinga U3 Characters per inch (fraction value) 0 

Country code U6 0: US-ASCII 0 

1: France 

2: Germany 

6-3


6-4 



Code set at power up in 

daisywheel emulation 

Font pitch for fixedpitch 

scalable fonts 

3: UK 

4: Denmark 

5: Sweden 

6: Italy 

7: Spain 

8: Japan 

9: US Legal 

10: IBM PC-850 (Multilingual) 

11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese) 

12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French) 

13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian) 

14: Norway 

15: Denmark 2 

16: Spain 2 

17: Latin America 

50 – 99:HP PCL symbol set coding (See page 7- 

37.) 

U7 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 0 

1: IBM 

2: Daisywheel 

3: HP Roman8 (US ASCII) 

4: Same as 3 

5: Epson LQ-850 

6: HP Roman-8 

U8 

7 – 99:HP PCL symbol set coding (See page 7- 

37.) 

Integer value in cpi: 0 – 99 10 

U9 Fraction value in 1/100 cpi: 0 – 99 0 

Font height for the 

default scalable fonta V0 

V1 

Integer value in 100 points: 0–9 

Integer value in points: 0–99 

0 

12 

V2 Fraction value in 1/100 points: 0, 25, 50, or 75 0 

Default scalable fonta, e V3 Name of typeface of up to 32 characters, enclosed 

with single or double quotation marks 

— 

a Ignored in some emulation modes. 

b For models supporting A3 and ledger size paper. 

c C8—PCL font range 

The printing system offers several categories of resident fonts — PCL, KPDL and (simulated) 

bitmap fonts. The C8 parameter allows to prioritize font selection (evaluation) by excluding one 

or more font categories to simplify the printing system font environment. 

For example, the command sequence C8, 1; lets the printing system to exclude bitmap fonts 

when font selection is performed in HP LaserJet emulation. (This will provide the closest 

matching PCL5 environment for font selection.) 

d P4/P5—Automatic Emulation Switching 

The FRPO P4 command establishes Automatic Emulation Switching (AES) between KPDL and 

the alternative emulation. With the P4 value of 1, the printing system will switch from KPDL 

emulation to non-KPDL emulation, or vice versa. Switching is triggered by the command 

specified by the FRPO P7 value. 

The FRPO P5 value specifies the alternative emulation to which the printing system switches 

from KPDL. The factory default for P5 is the HP LaserJet. 

The automatic emulation switching mode may not operate properly if the print job contains 

PRESCRIBE commands.

e V0-V3 — Default (power-up) font 

These parameters define the default font at power up. The V3 parameter accepts a scalable font 

name of up to 32 characters and defines it to be the power-up font. The factory-set default font 

is Courier. The V0, V1, and V2 parameters specify the height of the font. The default size is 

012.00 points (00, 12, 00, respectively). 

The V0-V3 parameters are ignored if the specified font is not present at power-up, and the 

printing system selects Courier as the default font for V3. 

The example below gives the PRESCRIBE sequence which changes the default font to 

TimesNewRoman, 14.25 points: 

!R! FRPO V3, ’TimesNewRoman’; 

FRPO V0, 0; 

FRPO V1, 14; 

FRPO V2, 25; 

EXIT; 

The power-up font can be a simulated bitmap font by giving a font number to the C5, C2 and 

C3 parameters in the same manner as for V0, 1 and 2. This will set the V3 value to null. 

Interface-independent Parameters 

Table 6.2. Interface-independent Parameters (Sheet 1 of 8) 


Downloadable PCL font 

compression 

Message language 

selection at power-on 

Default pattern 

resolution (PAT, FPAT, 

GPAT) 

Minimum memory 

allocation for resource 

protection/(in duplex 

mode) 

B0 0: Off 0 (countries excluding 

1: On 

Asia) or 1 (Asia) 

B7 0: Automatically enters message language 

selection menu at the initial power-on. After 

a language is selected, B7=1 is set 

automatically. 

1 

1: Does not automatically enter message 

language selection menu at power-on. 

B8 0: 300 dpi 0 

1: 600 dpi 

3: 1200 dpi 

B9 0: 12 MB or more (16 MB or more) 0 or 1 

1: 10 MB (14 MB) 

2: 8 MB (12 MB) 

3: 6 MB (10 MB) 

4: 4 MB (8 MB) 

5: 2 MB (6 MB) 

Copy count C0 Number of copies to print:1-999 1 

KPDL font range C9 0: KPDL fonts only 0 

1: KPDL and PCL fonts 

Serial line control D0 0: XON is sent every 5 seconds during the 

printing system is ready or waiting. Error is 

ignored. 

0 

1: XON is sent every 5 seconds during the 

printing system is ready or waiting. Error is 

valid. 

10: XON is not sent. Error is ignored. 

11: XON is not sent. Error is valid. 

A4 full page bleeda D1 0: Off 

0 

1: On 

Audio alarm D2 0: Off 1 

1: On 

Paper size error D3 0: Not notified 0 

1: Notified 

2: Complies with MS certification 

Print density D4 Number from 1 (Light) to 5 (Dark) 3 

Service status page D5 0: Not printed 1 

1: Printed 

Paper jam retry timing D6 0: End of page 0 

1: Fuser sensor activated 

2: Fuser sensor deactivated 

3: Page ejection 

4: Same as 0; non-engine-dependent 

Host buffer size H0 0 to 99 in units of 10MB (0 to 990MB) 0 

6-5


6-6 



Serial interface baud 

rate 

H1 3: 300 bps (not valid for some models) 96 

6: 600 bps (not valid for some models) 

12: 1200 bps 

24: 2400 bps 

48: 4800 bps 

96: 9600 bps 

19: 19200 bps 

38: 38400 bps 

57: 57600 bps 

11: 115200 bps 

Serial interface data bits H2 7 or 8 8 

Serial interface stop bits H3 1 or 2 1 

Serial interface parity H4 0: None 0 

1: Odd 

2: Even 

3: Ignore 

Serial interface protocol H5 0: Combination of 1 and 3 below 0 

1: DTR, positive true 

2: DTR, negative true 

3: XON/XOFF 

4: ETX/ACK 

5: XON/XOFF recognized only as protocol 

Buffer nearly-full 

threshold 

H6 Percentage of the received data buffer size. 90 

Buffer nearly-empty 

threshold 

H7 Percentage of the received data buffer size. 70 

Total host buffer size H8 0 to 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO S5 5 (monochrome 

model), 10 

(monochrome model 

with network 

Interface), or 12 (color 

model) 

Form feed time-out 

value 

H9 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6 

Memory card partition 

reading at power-up b 

I0 Partition name on a memory card to be read 

automatically at power-up. Maximum of 15 

printable ASCII characters (20H through 7EH), 

enclosed in single or double quotation marks. 

Event log panel menu I1 0: Off 0 

1: On 

Character width I2 0: Normal 0 

1: HP LaserJet compatible 

Sleep timer I5 0: Off 1 

1: On 

End-of-job 

interpretation for option 

interface OPT2 

End-of-job 

interpretation for print 

server interface 

Reduce/enlarge ratio 

(Models supporting A3 

size only) 

I7 Interprets EOJ given by NIC to the following: 0 

0: None 

1: ^L (0CH) 

2: ^D (04H) 

3: ^L and ^D 

7: ^D and ^L 

I8 Interprets EOJ issued by print server to the 

following: 

0 

0: None 

1: ^L (0CH) 

2: ^D (04H) 

3: ^L and ^D 

7: ^D and ^L 

J0 0: 100% 0 

5: 70% 

6: 81% 

7: 86% 

8: 94% 

9: 98% 

Status send control c M1 0: Reports status in KPDL mode only. 0 

1: Reports status in all emulations. 

20: Treats all CTRL-T commands as data in all 

emulations. 

—


Default interface M2 1: Default Serial or Option Serial 2 or 3 

2: Parallel 

3: Default Network or Option Network 

4: Option Network or Option2 Network 

5: USB 

Host buffer moded Environment Parameter Value Factory setting 

M3 0: Automatic 0 

1: Fixed 

First buffer size M4 Size of the first buffer 3 (model with network 

interface) or 5 (other) 

Second (First) e buffer 

size 

M5 Size of the second (first) buffer 10 (model with 

network interface) or 5 

(other) 

M6 Size of the third (second) buffer 1 

Third (Second) buffer 

size 

Forth (Third) buffer size M7 Size of the forth (third) buffer number 5 

Fifth (Forth) buffer size M8 Size of the fifth (forth) buffer number 5 

KIR mode N0 0: Off 2 

2: On 

Duplex binding N4 0: Off 0 

1: Long edge 

2: Short edge 

Sleep timer time-out 

time 

N5 Value in units of 5 minutes: 1 to 48 [5 to 240 min.] 6 

Ecoprint level N6 0: Off 0 

2: On 

Duplex N7 0: Normal 0 

1: Reverse output pages. 

2: Allows duplex from the MP tray. 

3: Allows duplex from the MP tray; reversing 

the output pages. 

Printing resolution N8 0: 300 dpi 1 

1: 600 dpi 

3: 1200 dpi 

PCL resource protection N9 0: Off 0 

1: Protects permanent PCL resources and 

resets the environment. 

2: Protects permanent and temporary PCL 

resources. 

Parallel interface mode O0 0: Normal 5 

1: High-speed 

5: Nibble (High) 

70: Auto (Negotiation) 

Message language P0 0: English 0 

1: French 

2: German 

3: Danish 

4: Swedish 

5: Italian 

6: Spanish 

Command recognition 

character 

P9 ASCII code from 33 to 99 82 (R) 

Default stacker R0 1: Face-down tray 1 

2: Face-up tray 

3: Bulk tray 

Auto cassette switching R1 0: Cassette not switched when empty. 0 

1: Main cassette and the first feeder cassette. 

2: Main cassette and the second feeder 

cassette. 

3: The first feeder cassette and the second 

feeder cassette. 

4: Main cassette, the first feeder cassette, and 

the second feeder cassette. 

5: Main cassette and the third feeder cassette. 

6: The first feeder cassette and the third feeder 

cassette. 

7: The second feeder cassette and the third 


6-7


6-8 



the third feeder cassette. 

9: Main cassette, the second feeder cassette, 

and the third feeder cassette. 

10: The first feeder cassette, the second feeder 

cassette, and the third feeder cassette. 

11: Main cassette, the first feeder cassette, the 

second feeder cassette, and the third feeder 

cassette. 

12: Main cassette and the fourth feeder cassette. 

13: The first feeder cassette and the fourth feeder 

cassette. 

14: The second feeder cassette and the fourth 


15: The third feeder cassette and the fourth 



the fourth feeder cassette. 


and the fourth feeder cassette. 

18: Main cassette, the third feeder cassette, and 

the fourth feeder cassette. 


cassette, and the fourth feeder cassette. 

20: The first feeder cassette, the third feeder 


21: The second feeder cassette, the third feeder 



second feeder cassette, and the fourth feeder 

cassette. 


third feeder cassette, and the fourth feeder 

cassette. 


the third feeder cassette, and the fourth 



cassette, the third feeder cassette, and the 

fourth feeder cassette. 


second feeder cassette, the third feeder 


99: Switched according to the page size 

command in data. 

Default paper size R2 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 0 

1: Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2 inches) 

2: Business (4-1/8 × 9-1/2 inches) 

3: International DL (11 × 22 cm) 

4: International C5 (16.2 × 22.9 cm) 

5: Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2 inches) 

6: US Letter (8-1/2 × 11 inches) 

7: US Legal (8-1/2 × 14 inches) 

8: A4 (21.0 × 29.7 cm) 

9: JIS B5 (18.2 × 25.7 cm) 

10: A3 (29.7 × 42 cm) 

11: B4 (25.7 × 36.4 cm) 

12: US Ledger (11 × 17 inches) 

13: A5 (14.8 × 21 cm) 

14: A6 (10.5 × 14.8 cm) 

15: JIS B6 (12.8 × 18.2 cm) 

16: Commercial #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8 inches) 

17: Commercial #6 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2 inches) 

18: ISO B5 (17.6 × 25 cm) 

19: Custom (11.7 × 17.7 inches) f 

30: C4 (22.9 × 32.4 cm) f 

31: Hagaki (10 × 14.8 cm) f 

32: Ofuku-Hagaki (14.8 × 20 cm) f 


33: Officio II 

36: A3 Wide



37: Ledger Wide 

50: Statement 

51: Folio 

52: Youkei 2 

53: Youkei 4 

Default margin settings R3 0: HP compatible margins. 0 

1: Full PCL printable area. 

2: Character pitch given by U2 and U3. 

3: Full PCL printable area with character 

pitches given by U2 and U3. 

10: IBM HT reference point as the left margin. 

11: Full PCL printable area for HP emulation; 

HT reference point as the left margin in IBM 

emulation. 

12: Uses Courier font for IBM emulation, using 

the pitch given by U2 and U3. 

Default cassette R4 0: Multi-purpose tray 1 

1: Cassette 1 

2: Cassette 2 

3: Cassette 3 

4: Cassette 4 or Envelope/universal feeder 

5: Cassette 5 

6: Cassette 6 

99: Envelope/universal feeder (FS-9000) 

Page protect R5 1 – 3: Automatic 

4 – 5: On 

1 

MP tray paper size R7 Same as the R2 values except: 0 0 

0: Maximum paper size of the printing system 

Daisywheel data length R8 7: 7-bit 7 

8: 8-bit 

Default envelope feeder 

paper size 

R9 Same as the R2 values except below 0 

0: A4 or Letter 

A4/letter equation S4 0: Off 0 

1: On 

Host buffer size S5 0: 10kB (x H8) 1 

1: 100kB (x H8) 

2: 1024kB (x H8) 

RAM disk capacity S6 0 to 1024 (MB) 50 

RAM disk S7 0: Disabled 0 

1: Enabled 

Serial interface mode S9 0: Normal 0 

1: Barcode reader 

MP tray mode T0 0: Cassette mode 1 

1: First mode (overrides other paper sources) 

Cassette 1 paper sizeg T1 6: Letter 6 (U.S.A) or 8 (Euro 

and other) 

7: Legal 

8: A4 

9: B5 

13: A5 

Cassette 2 paper sizeg T2 Same as above. 6 (U.S.A) or 8 (Euro 

and other) 

Wide A4 T6 0: Off 0 

1: On 

MP tray directionh T8 0: Short edge 1 

1: Long edge 

Paper thickness T9 0: Normal 0 

1: Thick 

2: Thin 

3: Extra thick 

Status page print at U5 0: Not printed automatically 0 

power-up 

1: Printed automatically at power-up 

Default Courier weight V9 0: Dark 

0 

1: Normal 

6-9


6-10 



1 

Color mode W1 0: Monochrome (grayscale) 

1: Color (CMYK) 

2: Quick color (CMY) 

Color quality W2 0: Normal 

1: Quick color 

2: Picture 

3: Presentation 

Color matching W3 0: None 

1: Auto 

2: Vivid color 

3: Display 

Monitor simulation W4 0: None 

1: SMPTE240M 

2: HDTV (sRGB) 

3: SONY Trinitron 

4: Apple AGB 

5: NTSC 

6: KC RGB 

7: Custom 

Ink simulation W5 1: None 

2: SWOP 

3: Euroscale 

4: TOYO 

5: DIC 

Gloss mode W6 0: Low (normal) 

1: High 

Paper type for the MP 

tray 

Paper type for paper 

cassettes 1 to 6 

Paper type for 

Envelope Feeder/ 

Universal Feeder 

X0 1: Plain 1 

2: Transparency 

3: Preprinted 

4: Label 

5: Bond 

6: Recycle 

7: Vellum 

8: Rough 

9: Letterhead 

10: Color 

11: Prepunched 

12: Envelope 

13: Cardstock 

21: Custom1 

22: Custom2 

23: Custom3 

24: Custom4 

25: Custom5 

26: Custom6 

27: Custom7 

28: Custom8 

X1 – X6 1: Plain 1 

3: Preprinted 

5: Bond 

6: Recycled 

8: Rough 

9: Letterhead 

10: Color 


21: Custom1 

22: Custom2 

23: Custom3 

24: Custom4 

25: Custom5 

26: Custom6 

27: Custom7 

28: Custom8 

X7 1: Plain 1 

3: Preprinted 

4: Label 

5: Bond 

6: Recycled 

8: Rough 

0 

0 

2 (For the FS-8000C, 0 

and 2 only) 

1 

0



9: Letterhead 

10: Color 


12: Envelope 

13: Cardstock 

21: Custom1 

22: Custom2 

23: Custom3 

24: Custom4 

25: Custom5 

26: Custom6 

27: Custom7 

28: Custom8 

PCL paper source X9 0: Performs paper selection depending on 

media type. 

1: Performs paper selection depending on 

paper sources. 

2: Performs paper selection which is 

compatible with HP-LJ8000. 

3: Combination of value 1 and 2. 

8: Performs paper selection in driver priority 

mode. 



11: Combination of value 1, 2 and 8. 

Automatic continue for Y0 0: Off 

‘Press GO’ 

1: On 

Automatic continue Y1 number from 000 to 495 in increments of 5 

timer 

seconds 

Quick fuser heater Y2 0: On 

1: Off 

Error message for 

device error 

Y3 0: Does not display an error message and pause 

the job when the device error occurs. 

1: Displays an error message when duplex 

printing is not executed because of a possible 

limitation. 

2: Displays an error message and pause the job 

when running out of staples. 



when the waste punch box is full. 





when the maximum number of stapling is 

exceeded. 







15: Combination of value 1, 2, 4 and 8. 

16: Displays an error message when stapling, 

puching, offset or rotate collate is not 

executed because of a possible limitation 

except 2, 4 and 8. 















31: Combination of value 1, 2, 4, 8 and 16. 

8 (model supporting 

driver priority mode) 

or 0 (other) 

0 

6 

0 or 1 

0 

6-11


6-12 



0 

Duplex operation for 

specified paper type 

(Prepunched, Preprinted 

and Letterhead) 

Default operation for 

PDF direct printing 

Y4 0: Leaves the job as is when the job which the 

specified paper type is specified in simplex 

mode. 

1: Adds blank pages and prints the job in 

duplex mode when the job which the 

specified paper type is specified in simplex 

mode. 

Y5 0: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the 

current paper size. Loads paper from the 

current paper cassette. 

1: Through the image. Loads paper which is the 

same size as the image. 

2: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the 

current paper size. Loads Letter, A4 or A3 

size paper depending on the image size. 

3: Through the image. Loads Letter, A4 or A3 

size paper depending on the image size. 

8: Through the image. Loads paper from the 

current paper cassette. 

9: Through the image. Loads Letter, Ledger or 

Legal size paper depending on the image 

size. 

10: Enlarges or reduces the image to fit in the 

current paper size. Loads Letter, Ledger or 

Legal size paper depending on the image 

size. 

e-MPS error Y6 0: Does not print the error report and display 

the error message. 

3 

1: Prints the error report. 

2: Displays the error message. 

3: Prints the error report and displays the error 

message. 

a Supported only by FS-1500 series, FS-1600 series, FS-3400 series, and FS-3600 series. 

b I0—Name of the partition in memory card 

The FRPO I0 specifies a memory card partition name to be automatically read at power up. Only one 

partition may be specified. The data read from the named partition at power up will be available to 

users accessing the currently-active interface. 

The command uses the following format: 

FRPO I0, ’partition-name’; 

Note that a comma must be placed after the I0 parameter. The partition name should not exceed 15 

printable ASCII characters (20H through 7EH) and be enclosed by single or double quotation marks. 

Partition names are case-sensitive so the correct upper and lowercase characters must be used in the 

FRPO I0 string. 

The FRPO M2 parameter enables the printing system to read the partition name into a port apart from 

the currently active one. For instance, if the active port were the parallel port but the M2 parameter 

specified the serial port, then the memory card data would be available to users accessing the serial 

interface. 

c M1—Status send control 

The FRPO M1 parameter enables the user to receive printing system status information through the 

serial interface. By sending CTRL-T (Hex 14) from the host computer to the printing system, the user 

can receive status information about ready or waiting states, the total page count for the printing 

system, the default page size, and the available memory size in bytes. 

d M3—Host buffer mode 

The M3 parameter determines the automatic or fixed host buffer mode. 

If the M3 value is 0 (automatic), the first data arriving from the computer go into buffer #1, regardless 

of which interface they arrive on. While buffer #1 is in use, if data also begin to arrive on a second 

interface they are stored in buffer #2. The printing system will print these data after it has finished 

printing the job received through buffer #1. The general rule is that data go to the available buffer. 

If the M3 value is 1 (fixed), buffer #1 is fixed to receive only the data arriving in the parallel interface; 

and buffer #2 is fixed in the option interface (if installed). The first data arriving on one of the 

interfaces go into its fixed, dedicated buffer and the printing system begins printing these data and 

continues as above. 

The factory setting of the total host buffer size is 60 kilobytes or 500 kilobytes depending on the 

model. This can be altered by the FRPO H8 command. If you alter the buffer size, you must reset the 

printing system to bring the change in effect. 

0

e M5/M6/M7/M8—Host buffer size 

The printing system utilizes each one buffer for its interfaces. This enables simultaneous receiving 

of data from the different host computers. The FRPO M5, M6, M7, and M8 parameters determine 

the ratio among the sizes allocated to these buffers. Parameters M6 and M7 are provided for option 

interfaces. 

For example, to allocate the buffers with size ratio of 5:1, use the following format: 

!R! FRPO M3, 1; FRPO M5, 5; FRPO M6, 1; EXIT; 

f Ignored in some emulation modes. 

g Models of low-end category only. 

h A3/ledger models only. 

6-13


6-14

The printing systems emulate the operation of seven other printers: 

• HP LaserJet (mode 6) 

• HP 7550A (mode 8) 

• IBM Proprinter X24E (mode 1) 

• Epson LQ-850 (mode 5) 

• Diablo 630 (mode 2) 

• Standard line printer (mode 0) 

• KPDL (mode 9) [PostScript compatible] 

Chapter 7 

Emulation 

Word-processing and graphics software for any of the above printers also works with the 

printing system. All you need to do is to set the printing system to emulate the printer 

your software supports and select the appropriate printer driver. 

In rare cases when your software does not support any of the printers above, install your 

software to drive the standard line printer and use PRESCRIBE commands to control 

line spacing, character spacing, etc. 

Inappropriate selection of printer drivers and printer-based emulations will produce 

undesirable results. 

When shipped from the factory, the printing system is set to emulate the HP LaserJet. For 

best results, look for an appropriate printer driver in your software application. 

You can also find the appropriate printer driver for your model in the CD-ROM supplied 

with the product. Or, you are encouraged to visit our Internet home page to directly 

download the printer driver of the latest version. 

This chapter first explains how to select an emulation. Then it gives some general information 

applying to all the emulation modes. Finally, it goes over each of the modes, 

explaining the printing system’s word-processing capabilities and showing its character 

sets. Tables of control codes and escape sequences are also given at the end of each emulation 

section.

Chapter 7 Emulation 

Selecting an Emulation 

7-2 

When installing a printing system, you can select an emulation that best suits the requirement 

by the application software. In most cases, the emulation will be the factory default 

setting (mode 6: HP LaserJet). Refer to the following diagram to locate the next level 

emulation in case you need to change the emulation. 

For example, in printing environments using the HP plotter model HP 7550A (KC-GL), 

the user should select mode 8. In PostScript printing environments, mode 9 should be 

selected (an option on some models) . 

To set an emulation mode, send the printing system the FRPO commands listed in the 

table below. 

Table 7.1. Emulation Switching Command Sequence 

Mode Emulation FRPO Commands 

0 Line Printer !R! FRPO P1, 0; FRPO P3, 1; EXIT; 

1 IBM Proprinter X24E !R! FRPO P1, 1; FRPO P3, 2; EXIT; 

2 Diablo 630 !R! FRPO P1, 2; FRPO P3, 1; EXIT; 

5 Epson LQ-850 !R! FRPO P1, 5; FRPO P3, 2; EXIT; 

6 HP LaserJet !R! FRPO P1, 6; FRPO P3, 1; EXIT; 

8 HP 7550A !R! FRPO P1, 8; FRPO P3, 1; EXIT; 

9 KPDL !R! FRPO P1, 9; EXIT; 

The emulation mode can also be changed from the printing system’s operator panel.

Automatic emulation sensing 

Line Printer Emulation (Mode 0) 

In printing systems that permit the selection of KPDL emulation, the automatic emulation 

sensing (AES) can be activated so that print jobs using other emulations will automatically 

print in the correct emulation. Refer to the AES related FRPO command 

parameters, P4 and P5, in Interface-independent Parameters on page 5 in Chapter 6. 

General Information on Emulation 

The printing system’s capability for supporting seven printer emulations is remarkably 

complete; although a few differences are noteworthy: 

• The printing system cannot print on paper larger than the size of its cassette. In particular, 

it cannot print on continuous forms. 

• The 600 dpi and 1200 dpi resolutions are supported only with HP LaserJet and KPDL 

emulations. Even for the models with 600 dpi and 1200 dpi support, printing occurs 

only with the 300 dpi resolution in Line Printer, IBM Proprinter, Diablo, and Epson 

emulation modes. 

• The printing system’s fonts do not duplicate the appearance of the fonts of the emulated 

printers exactly. For a fixed font, the printing system provides the same character 

spacing as the printer under emulation. This is not always true for proportional 

spacing. When proportional spacing is used, your word processing software, using an 

HP LaserJet driver, may be unable to properly right justify proportional text. 

• The printing system supports scalable (outline) fonts. With the assistance of PRE- 

SCRIBE commands, the scalable fonts are available for printing in any one of the 

emulation modes. (See Chapter 4 for details.) 

• The graphics commands which create a path are also supported in all emulation 

modes. Instructions on how to create a path are described in Chapter 2. 

• In all emulations, the printing system’s margins differ slightly between emulations. 

The margins can be adjusted with PRESCRIBE margin commands. However, they 

cannot be moved outside the paper edge limits. 

• PRESCRIBE commands can also be used for supplementary font control. Examples 

are given in each section (FONT, SFNT, etc.). 

Line Printer Emulation (Mode 0) 

To set the power-up emulation for Line Printer, send the printing system the following 

PRESCRIBE command sequence: 

!R! FRPO P1, 0 ; FRPO P3, 1; FRPO U6, 1; EXIT; 

The Line Printer character set options are the same as for the IBM emulation. FRPO U6, 

1 selects the full IBM US ASCII character set, which includes many international characters, 

graphic symbols, and mathematical symbols in addition to standard ASCII. If you 

leave the U6 parameter at its 0 factory setting, you will get a subset excluding some 

international characters and symbols. The other options are US Legal (FRPO U6, 9;) and 

the Danish character set (FRPO U6, 4;). See Section for details. 

The line printer emulation is virtually featureless. It uses only the control codes listed 

below. 

7-3


7-4 

Table 7.2. Line Printer Control Codes 

Character code 

(decimal) 

Abbreviation Meaning 

8 BS Backspace 

10 LF Linefeed 

12 FF Formfeed 

13 CR Carriage return 

Other control codes are ignored. In particular, the escape code (ESC: character code 27) 

is ignored. If the printing system receives the escape sequence ESC A, for example, it 

ignores the escape code and prints the letter A. Therefore, this emulation requires PRE- 

SCRIBE commands for controlling the printing system. 

In font mode (FTMD) 15, the printing system automatically gives the innate character 

spacing, line spacing, and page orientation for each bitmap font, and character spacing 

and page orientation for each scalable font. 

If a line overruns the right margin, word wrap occurs automatically in this emulation. 

IBM Proprinter X24E Emulation (Mode 1) 

To set the power-up emulation for IBM Proprinter X24E, send the printing system the 

following PRESCRIBE command sequence: 

!R! FRPO P1, 1; FRPO P3, 1; EXIT; 

The IBM symbol sets include IBM PC-8 plus international characters, mathematical 

symbols, Greek letters, and graphic symbols, so you can print things like: 

Symbol sets PC-850, PC-860, PC-863, PC-865, US ASCII, and Denmark allow all ruling 

characters (hex B0 to DF) and underscore characters (5F) to be printed in the correct 

pitch for creating continuous lines. 

The symbol set may be selected with the INTL command or the operator panel keys. Permanent 

setting of the symbol set is made with the FRPO U6 and U7 commands but not 

with the Proprinter escape sequences. 

The following symbol sets list shows the support for the IBM emulation. 

Table 7.3. IBM Proprinter X24E Symbol Sets 

Symbol set Message display FRPO command 

US ASCII IBM PC-8 FRPO U6, 0; FRPO U7, 1; 

Denmark IBM PC-8 (D/N) FRPO U6, 4; FRPO U7, 1; 

US Legal US Legal FRPO U6, 9; FRPO U7, 1; 

IBM PC-850 (Multilingual) IBM PC-850 FRPO U6, 10; FRPO U7, 1; 

IBM PC-860 (Portuguese) IBM PC-860 FRPO U6, 11; FRPO U7, 1;

Table 7.3. IBM Proprinter X24E Symbol Sets 


Symbol set Message display FRPO command 

IBM PC-863 (Canadian French) IBM PC-863 FRPO U6, 12; FRPO U7, 1; 

IBM PC-865 (Norwegian) IBM PC-865 FRPO U6, 13; FRPO U7, 1; 

By giving a particular value for the U6 and U7 parameters, it is possible to use another 

symbol set which the Diablo does not have. For details, see LaserJet Symbol Sets on 

page 37. 

At power-up or after a reset, the printing system defaults to LetterGothic (12 points, 10 

cpi). This default font emulates the IBM printer’s Sans-serif 10cpi font. The default font 

cannot be changed in the IBM Proprinter X24E emulation. (The FRPO C5, C2, and C3 

commands will be ignored in the IBM Proprinter X24E emulation.) 

The printing system also emulates three other IBM-printer fonts: Courier, Prestige Elite, 

and Courier Proportional (See the table on next page). These fonts can be obtained by 

embedded commands or by using a printer driver from your word-processing software 

that supports the IBM Proprinter X24E. No PRESCRIBE commands are needed. An 

embedded command gives double-wide versions and another give double-high version 

of all four fonts. Samples are shown on the next page. 

Figure 7. 4. IBM Proprinter Emulation Print Samples 

The IBM Proprinter X24E emulation supports embedded commands for doublewide/double-high 

printing, emphasized printing, double-strike printing, superscripts, 

7-5


7-6 

subscripts, underlining, backspace, vertical and horizontal tabulation, line spacing, and 

paper length. 

The font mode set for the IBM Proprinter X24E emulation is 0 (the printing system 

adjusts nothing automatically for font attributes) unless you change it by the FTMD 

command. If you do not need exact character spacing, you can improve the appearance 

of some fonts by changing the font mode to 13. 

!R! FTMD 13; EXIT; 

It should be noted that for FTMD 13; the default Draft Sans-serif font will be printed in 

12 cpi, and the Courier Proportional font will be printed in fixed pitch. 

To use some of the page printing system’s other fonts, you can select them with font 

selection commands, but a more convenient method is available. You can substitute other 

fonts for the four embedded fonts with SETF (SET alternate Font) commands. This 

works because the printing system obtains these fonts from the following default values 

of the SETF command: 

Table 7.5. IBM Proprinter Fonts 

Font name Character spacing ALTF No. 

Draft Sans-serif 10 cpi, 12 cpi 0 

Courier 10 cpi 1 

Prestige Elite 12 cpi 2 

Draft Sans-serif Condensed (15 cpi) 3 

Courier Prop. Proportional 4 

A substitute font can be any resident font if you use the SFNT command to assign the 

font number. (See the SFNT command page in PRESCRIBE Commands Command 

Reference.) 

To assign a font number to resident fonts for substituting the emulated fonts in IBM Proprinter 

X24E emulation, all the option parameters (including symbol-set, compression, 

and angle) for the SFNT command must be specified. 

Landscape orientation is another feature the printing system can offer that the IBM 

printer cannot. If you command !R! SPO L; EXIT; the printing system rotates the current 

font and prints text in landscape orientation. 

The printing system supports the IBM printer’s bit-image graphics in portrait orientation, 

so graphics software using the IBM Proprinter X24E emulation will print charts, graphs, 

and pictures without the need for PRESCRIBE commands. The print model and clipping 

features of the PRESCRIBE path mode graphics will be ignored with the IBM bit-image 

graphics, however. 

If you attempt to print beyond the right margin, the characters will wrap around and print 

on the next line. 

IBM Proprinter X24E Control Codes 

This section provides IBM Proprinter X24E control codes which is supported by the 

printing system under X24E Proprinter emulation.

Table 7.6. IBM Proprinter X24E Control Codes 


Command Function Code (hex) Supported 

BEL Beeper 07 – 

BS Backspace 08 Yes 

HT Horizontal Tab 09 Yes 

LF Line Feed 0A Yes 

VT Vertical Tab 0B Yes 

FF Form Feed 0C Yes 

CR Carriage Return 0D Yes 

SO Double-Wide Printing by line 0E Yes 

SI Condensed Printing 0F Yes 

DC1 Select Printer 11 – 

DC2 10 CPI Print 12 Yes 

DC4 Cancel Double-Wide Printing 14 

by line 

Yes 

CAN Cancel Data 18 – 

ESC * m n1 n2 data Select Graphic Mode (AGM 

only) 

1B 2A m n1 n2 data – 

ESC - n Continuous Underline 1B 2D n Yes 

ESC 0 1/8 Inch Line Spacing 1B 30 Yes 

ESC 1 7/72 Inch Line Spacing 1B 31 Yes 

ESC 2 Start Text Line Spacing 1B 32 Yes 

ESC 3 n Graphics Line Spacing 1B 33 n Yes 

ESC 4 Set Top of Form 1B 34 Yes 

ESC 5 n Automatic Line Feed 1B 35 n Yes 

ESC 6 Select Character Set 2 1B 36 Yes 

ESC 7 Select Character Set 1 1B 37 Yes 

ESC : 12 CPI Printing 1B 3A Yes 

ESC = Character Font Image Download 

1B 3D – 

ESC A n Set Text Line Spacing 1B 41 n Yes 

ESC B n1 n2...n64 null Set Vertical Tabs 1B 42 n1 n2...n64 0 Yes 

ESC C n m Set Form Length in Line or 

Inches 

1B 43 nm Yes 

ESC D n1 n2...n29 null Set Horizontal Tabs 1B 44 n1 n2...n28 0 Yes 

ESC E Emphasized Printing 1B 45 Yes 

ESC F Cancel Emphasized Printing 1B 46 Yes 

ESC G Double-Strike printing 1B 47 Yes 

ESC H Cancel Double-Strike Printing 1B 48 Yes 

ESC I n Select Print Mode 1B 49 n Yes 

ESC J n Graphics Variable Line Spacing 

1B 4A n Yes 

ESC K n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Normal-Density Bit-Image 

Graphics 

1B 4B n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Yes 

ESC L n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Dual-Density Bit-Image 

Graphics 

(Half-Speed) 

1B 4C n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Yes 

ESC N n Set Automatic Perforation 

Skip 

1B 4E n Yes 

ESC O Cancel Automatic Perforation 1B 4F 

Skip 

Yes 

ESC P n Proportional Space Mode 1B 50 n Yes 

ESC Q n Deselect Printer 1B 51 n – 

ESC R Set All Tabs to Power on Settings 

1B 52 Yes 

ESC S n Subscript or Superscript Printing 

1B 53 n Yes 

ESC T Cancel Subscript or Superscript 

1B 54 Yes 

7-7


7-8 

Table 7.6. IBM Proprinter X24E Control Codes 


ESC U n Set Print Direction 1B 55 n – 

ESC W n Continuous Double-Wide 

Printing 

1B 57 n Yes 

ESC X n m Set Horizontal Margins 1B 58 n m Yes 

ESC Y n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Dual-Density Bit-Image 

Graphics 

(Normal Speed) 

1B 59 n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Yes 

ESC Z n1 n2 v1 v2...vn High-Density Bit-Image 

Graphics 

1B 5A n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Yes 

ESC [@ n1 n2 m1 m2 m3 m4 Double-High Printing 1B 5B 40 n1 n2 m1 m2 m3 m4 Yes 

ESC [K n1 n2 in id p1 p2 Set Initial Condition 1B 5B 4B n1 n2 in id p1 p2 Yes 

ESC [T n1 n2 0 0 c1 c2 Set Code Page 1B 5B 54 n1 n2 0 0 c1 c2 Yes 

ESC [\ n1 n2 t1 t2 g1 g2 Set Vertical Unit 1B 5B 7C n1 n2 t1 t2 g1 g2 Yes 

ESC [g n1 n2 m data High-Resolution Graphics 1B 5B 67 n1 n2 m data Yes 

ESC \ n1 n2 Print Continuously From All 

Characters Chart 

1B 7C n1 n2 Yes 

ESC ^ Print Single Character from 

All Characters Chart 

1B 5E Yes 

ESC_n Continuous Overline 1B 2D n Yes 

ESC d n1 n2 Relative Move Inline Forward 1B 64 n1 n2 Yes 

ESC j Stop Printing 1B 6A – 

ESC e n1 n2 Relative Mode Inline Backward 

1B 65 n1 n2 Yes

IBM PC-8 (D/N) (373) 

IBM Symbol Sets 

IBM PC-8 (341) 


7-9


IBM PC-850 (405) IBM PC-860 (30) 

7-10

IBM PC-863 (62) IBM PC-865 (94) 


7-11


Diablo 630 Emulation (Mode 2) 

7-12 

Note 

To set the power-up emulation for Diablo 630, send the printing system the following 

PRESCRIBE command sequence: 


The Diablo uses ten symbol sets as shown below. To select one of these symbol sets, use 

the INTL command or the operator panel keys. Permanent setting of the symbol set is 

made with the FRPO U6 and U7 parameters. 

The factory setting for the symbol set at power-up is IBM PC-8 for all emulation modes. 

Table 7.7. Diablo 630 Emulation Symbol Sets 

Symbol set Message display FRPO commands 

US DIABLO US FRPO U6, 0; FRPO U7, 2; 

France DIABLO France FRPO U6, 1; FRPO U7, 2; 

Germany DIABLO Germany FRPO U6, 2; FRPO U7, 2; 

UK DIABLO U.K. FRPO U6, 3; FRPO U7, 2; 

Denmark DIABLO Denmark FRPO U6, 4; FRPO U7, 2; 

Sweden DIABLO Sweden FRPO U6, 5; FRPO U7, 2; 

Italy DIABLO Italy FRPO U6, 6; FRPO U7, 2; 

Spain DIABLO Spain FRPO U6, 7; FRPO U7, 2; 

Japan DIABLO Japan FRPO U6, 8; FRPO U7, 2; 

US Legal US Legal FRPO U6, 9; FRPO U7, 2; 

The U0—U3 parameters of the FRPO command will be ignored in the Diablo emulation. 

The line and character spacing are always 6 lines and 10 characters per inch at power-up 

and after a reset. 

In Diablo emulation, the printing system supports the embedded commands of word-processing 

software essentially the same way as the Diablo 630 printer does for the following 

features: 

• Margins 

• Horizontal and vertical tabulation 

• Line and character spacing, including proportional spacing 

• Half line feed, reverse line feed, and reverse half line feed 

• Backspace and fine backspace 

• Bold (shadow), double-strike, and underlining 

• Graphics mode 

If you attempt to print beyond the right margin, the characters will not be printed. 

A feature the printing system has that the Diablo does not is the landscape orientation. To 

print in landscape orientation, send the command SPO L; and select a landscape font. 

Example: 

To print in landscape, send the following command: 

!R! SPO L; EXIT; 

The automatic centering, justification and Hyplot mode of the Diablo printer are not supported.


Fonts can be selected by placing font commands in the file to be printed, or using SETF 

(set alternate font) and ALTF (change to alternate font) commands. To substitute scalable 

fonts for the embedded fonts using SETF command, employ the FSET command to 

apply the appropriate font number for that scalable font. The default font mode (FTMD) 

is 0, so the printing system will not adjust character spacing, line spacing, or page orientation. 

The red/black ribbon feature of the Diablo 630 printer is implemented in an interesting 

way. The printing system translates the black ribbon command internally into an ALTF 0 

command, and the red ribbon command into an ALTF 1 command. It also uses two pairs 

of SETF default values: 

Ribbon color Simulated bitmap font SETF default value 

Black CourierBM12-Roman SETF 0, 1; 

Red Dutch 801BM10-Roman SETF 1, 2; 

Accordingly, if you use the embedded command that asks for red ribbon, you will get 

bitmap font 2, Dutch801BM10-Roman, which the printing system emulates using a resident 

scalable font. This font is proportionally spaced, so you should also specify proportional 

spacing with an embedded command. When you change back to black ribbon, the 

printing system changes to bitmap font 1, CourierBM12-Roman, also emulated using a 

scalable font. 

With SETF commands you can select any two fonts you like which correspond to the 

black and red ribbons. For example, you can have black mean normal CGTimes and red 

mean CGTimes italicized. The appropriate setup is shown below, together with a short 

file and the printed result. 

!R! 

SFNT ’CGTimes’, 10, 3000; 

SFNT ’CGTimes-It’, 10, 3001; 

SETF 1, 3000; CMNT Red: 10-point CGTimes; 

SETF 0, 3001; CMNT Black: 10-point CGTimes Italic; 

EXIT; 

^[A10,000 Maniacs: ^[BOur Time in Eden ^[A(Elektra) 

^[AGarth Brooks: ^[BThe Chase ^[A(Liberty) 

^[ARed Hot Chill Peppers: ^[BWhat Hits!? ^[A(EMI) 

For red-ribbon, put ESC A (^[A in binary notation) at the point you would start to print 

in normal CGTimes, and put ESC B (^[B in binary notation) at the point to end using the 

font. 

Figure 7. 8. Diablo Font Printout 

7-13


7-14 

Diablo 630 Control Codes 

Table 7.9. Diablo 630 Control Codes (Sheet 1 of 2) 


NUL Buffer code 00 Yes 

ETX End of text 03 Yes 

ACK Acknowledge 06 Yes 

BEL Sound bell 07 – 


HT Horizontal tab 09 Yes 

LF Line feed 0A Yes 

VT Vertical tab 0B Yes 

FF Form feed 0C Yes 

CR Carriage return 0D Yes 

SO Supplementary extended character set 0E – 

SI Primary extended character set 0F – 

DC1 XON 11 Yes 

DC2 Enter printwheel table download mode 12 – 

DC3 XOFF 13 Yes 

DC4 Exit printwheel table download mode 14 – 

NAK Printer error condition 15 Yes 

EM Access supplementary character set 19 – 

DEL Same as NUL 7F Yes 

ESC BS Backspace 1/120 inch 1B 08 Yes 

ESC HT n Absolute horizontal tab to column n 1B 09 n Yes 

ESC LF Reverse line feed 1B 0A Yes 

ESC VT n Absolute vertical tab to line n 1B 0B n Yes 

ESC FF n Set n lines per page 1B 0C n Yes 

ESC CR P Remote reset 1B 0D 50 Yes 

ESC SO DC2 Enter printwheel table download mode 1B 0E 12 – 

ESC SO M Enter program mode 1B 0E 4D – 

ESC DC1 n Set offset to n 1B 11 n Yes 

ESC SYN n Select printwheel type 1B 16 n – 

ESC EM 1 Upper cassette (for sheet 1) 1B 19 31 Yes 

ESC EM 2 Lower cassette (for sheet 2) 1B 19 32 Yes 

ESC EM E Manual paper feed (for envelope) 1B 19 45 Yes 

ESC EM R Eject page 1B 19 52 Yes 

ESC SUB SO Memory test 1B 1A 0E – 

ESC SUB 1 Request status byte 1 1B 1A 31 – 

ESC SUB 3 Request status byte 3 1B 1A 33 – 

ESC SUB I Initialize printer 1B 1A 49 Yes 

ESC SUB R Remote error reset 1B 1A 52 – 

ESC GS A Disable NAK error response from printer 1B 1D 41 – 

ESC GS B Reenable NAK error response from printer 1B 1D 42 – 

ESC RS n Set (n-1)/48-inch line spacing 1B 1E n Yes 

ESC US n Set (n-1)/120-inch character spacing 1B 1F n Yes 

ESC % Increase carriage setting time 1B 25 – 

ESC & Bold and shadow printing OFF 1B 26 Yes 

ESC , Set plot precision 1B 2C – 

ESC - Set vertical tab at current position 1B 2D Yes 

ESC . n Change plot character 1B 2E n – 

ESC / Auto backward printing ON 1B 2F – 

ESC \ Auto backward printing OFF 1B 5C – 

ESC 0 Set right margin at current position 1B 30 Yes 

ESC 1 Set horizontal tab at current position 1B 31 Yes 

ESC 2 Clear all vertical and horizontal tabs 1B 32 Yes

Table 7.9. Diablo 630 Control Codes (Sheet 2 of 2) 



ESC 3 Graphics mode ON 1B 33 Yes 

ESC 4 Graphics mode OFF 1B 34 Yes 

ESC 5 Forward printing mode 1B 35 Yes 

ESC 6 Backward printing mode 1B 36 Yes 

ESC 7 Print suppression 1B 37 – 

ESC 8 Clear horizontal tab at current position 1B 38 Yes 

ESC 9 Set left margin at current position 1B 39 Yes 

ESC < Reverse printing mode ON 1B 3C – 

ESC > Reverse printing mode OFF 1B 3E – 

ESC = Auto-center 1B 3D – 

ESC ? Auto carriage return ON 1B 3F Yes 

ESC ! Auto carriage return OFF 1B 21 Yes 

ESC A Alternate font 1 (for red ribbon) 1B 41 Yes 

ESC B Alternate font 0 (for black ribbon) 1B 42 Yes 

ESC C Clear top and bottom margins 1B 43 Yes 

ESC D Reverse half linefeed 1B 44 Yes 

ESC E Underline ON 1B 45 Yes 

ESC G Hyplot ON–absolute move 1B 47 – 

ESC G BEL Hyplot ON–absolute plot 1B 47 07 – 

ESC L Set bottom margin at current position 1B 4C Yes 

ESC M Auto-justify 1B 4D – 

ESC N Restore normal carriage settling time 1B 4E – 

ESC O Bold printing ON 1B 4F Yes 

ESC P Proportional spacing ON 1B 50 Yes 

ESC Q Proportional spacing OFF 1B 51 Yes 

ESC R Underline OFF 1B 52 Yes 

ESC S Reset character spacing 1B 53 Yes 

ESC T Set top margin at current position 1B 54 Yes 

ESC U Half linefeed 1B 55 Yes 

ESC V Hyplot ON–relative move 1B 56 – 

ESC V BEL Hyplot–relative plot 1B 56 07 – 

ESC W Shadow printing ON 1B 57 Yes 

ESC X Bold, shadow, and underline OFF 1B 58 Yes 

ESC Y Printwheel spoke-0 character 1B 59 – 

ESC Z Printwheel spoke-95 character 1B 5A – 

7-15


Diablo France (61) 

Diablo 630 Symbol Sets 

7-16 

DIABLO US (29)

Diablo Germany (93) Diablo U. K. (125) 


7-17


Diablo Denmark (157) Diablo Sweden (189) 

7-18

Diablo Italy (221) Diablo Spain (253) 


7-19


Diablo Japan (285) 

7-20

Epson LQ-850 Emulation (Mode 5) 


To set printing system to power up in the LQ-850 emulation with the LQ German symbol 

set, command: 

!R! FRPO P1, 5; FRPO P3, 2; FRPO U6, 2; EXIT; 

The Epson LQ-850 emulation uses 13 symbol sets that include both plain and italic characters. 

The desired symbol set can be selected with the U6 parameter of the FRPO command 

or changed temporarily with the INTL command or from the operator panel keys. 

The Epson LQ-850 supports the following Epson symbol sets. Tables of the basic symbols 

are given at the end of this section. 

The factory setting for the symbol set at power-up is IBM PC-8 for all emulation modes. 

Table 7.10. Epson LQ-850 Emulation Symbol Sets 

Symbol set Message display FRPO commands 

U.S.A. LQ US FRPO U6, 0; FRPO U7, 0; 

France LQ France FRPO U6, 1; FRPO U7, 0; 

Germany LQ Germany FRPO U6, 2; FRPO U7, 0; 

U.K. LQ U.K. FRPO U6, 3; FRPO U7, 0; 

Denmark 1 LQ Denmark FRPO U6, 4; FRPO U7, 0; 

Sweden LQ Sweden FRPO U6, 5; FRPO U7, 0; 

Italy LQ Italy FRPO U6, 6; FRPO U7, 0; 

Spain 1 LQ Spain FRPO U6, 7; FRPO U7, 0; 

Japan LQ Japan FRPO U6, 8; FRPO U7, 0; 

Norway LQ Norway FRPO U6, 14; FRPO U7, 0; 

Denmark II LQ Denmark2 FRPO U6, 15; FRPO U7, 0; 

Spain II LQ Spain2 FRPO U6, 16; FRPO U7, 0; 

Latin America Latin America FRPO U6, 17; FRPO U7, 0; 

The printing system supports the Epson graphics character sets (code page tables) of PC 

437 (Epson Extended Graphics), PC 850 (Multilingual), PC 860 (Portugal), PC 863 

(Canada-French), and PC 865 (Norway). These sets are available only through the use of 

Epson control codes. Another Epson control code also provides the US Legal character 

set. The Korean character set is not supported. 

When power is first switched on or after a reset, the printing system always defaults in 

the Courier font (10 cpi). This default font emulates LQ-850’s Draft, 10 cpi and cannot 

be changed for the LQ-850 emulation. 

The printing system also emulates the other four LQ-850 fonts (five in all). These fonts 

can be selected by embedded commands in the word processing software or using an 

Epson LQ-850 printer driver. Double-wide and double-high effects are available for all 

five fonts. 

7-21


7-22 

Figure 7. 11. Epson LQ-850 Font Printout 

The five LQ-850 fonts actually use the printing system’s resident fonts. The font mode in 

the Epson emulation is 0. (The printing system does not automatically adjust character 

spacing.) If you do not need exact character spacing, you can improve the appearance of 

these fonts by changing to font mode 13. The printing system generates double-wide and 

double-high effects for these emulating fonts. 

To use other printing system fonts, select them with font commands (FONT, SFNT, and 

FSET). Since the printing system emulates certain LQ-850 fonts in different spacings by 

using the same resident font, it should be noted that substituting one font will also 

change the other fonts emulated by that font. For example, if you change the Draft 15 cpi 

font which is emulated by the PrestigeEliteBM7.2-Roman font, this will also affect the 

other 15 cpi LQ-850 fonts using the same ALTF 7; setting. 

Table 7.12. Epson LQ-850 Fonts (Sheet 1 of 2) 


Draft/Epson Courier 10 cpi, Proportional 0 

12 cpi 1 

15 cpi 7 

Condensed 10 cpi 8 

Condensed 12 cpi, Condensed proportional 9 

Epson Roman 10 cpi, proportional 2 

12 cpi 3 

15 cpi 7 



Epson Sans Serif 10 cpi, 12 cpi, proportional 4 

15 cpi 5 


Condensed 12 cpi, Condensed proportional 9

Table 7.12. Epson LQ-850 Fonts (Sheet 2 of 2) 



Epson Prestige 10 cpi, 12 cpi, Proportional 6 

15 cpi 7 



You can alter these default SETF assignments to suit your own purposes. In the example 

below, four of the SETF assignments are changed to proportional fonts, and the font 

mode is changed to 15. The sample text is then printed by selecting pica for the title, elite 

for the first paragraph, compressed for the second paragraph, compressed elite for the 

third paragraph, and elite for the last paragraph. 

!R! SETF 0, 12; CMNT Draft 10cpi: Swiss721BM12-Bold; 

SETF 1, 2; CMNT Draft 12cpi: Dutch801BM10-Roman; 

SETF 7, 13; CMNT Draft 15cpi: Swiss721BM8-Roman; 

SETF 8, 14; CMNT Condensed 10cpi: Swiss721BM6-Roman; 

EXIT; 

To select a scalable font for the SETF assignments, first assign a font number to the scalable 

font by sending the command SFNT commands to the printing system as shown 

below. The font number assigned should not duplicate a number already in use. 

!R! SFNT ’Swiss742SWC-Bold’, 12, 3000, 277, 1, 0; 

SFNT ’Dutch801SWC-Roman’, 10, 3001, 277, 1, 0; 

SFNT ’Swiss742SWC-Roman’, 8, 3002, 277, 1, 0; 

SFNT ’Swiss742SWC-Roman’, 6, 3003, 277, 1, 0; 

EXIT; 

All option parameters for SFNT (including symbol-set, compression, and angle) are 

required for assigning font numbers to a scalable font when altering the SETF assignments 

for the Epson emulation. 

Landscape printing is possible in the LQ-850 mode. If you send the command 

!R! SPOL; EXIT; the printing system rotates fonts and prints them in landscape orientation. 

In portrait orientation, the printing system supports Epson bit-image graphics, so with 

graphics software for the LQ-850 printer, you can use it to print charts, graphs, and pictures. 

The 9-bit graphics mode is also supported. 

If you attempt to print beyond the right margin, the characters wrap around and are 

printed on the next line. 

7-23


7-24 

EPSON LQ-850 Control Codes 

Table 7.13. Epson LQ-850 Control Codes 


Printer Operation 

ESC @ Initialize Printer 1B 40 Yes 

DC 1 Select Printer 11 – 

DC 3 Deselect Printer 13 – 

DEL Delete Character 7F – 

ESC < Select Unidirectional Mode (one line) 1B 3C Yes 

ESC U n 

MSB Control 

Turn Unidirectional Mode On/Off 1B 55 – 

ESC EM n Control Cut Sheet Feeder 1B 19 – 

ESC = Set MSB to 0 1B 3D Yes 

ESC > Set MSB to 1 1B 3E Yes 

ESC # 

Data Control 

Cancel MSB Control 1B 35 Yes 

BEL Beeper 07 – 

CR Carriage Return 0D Yes 

CAN 

Vertical Motion 

Cancel Line 18 – 

FF Form feed 0C Yes 

ESC C n Set Page Length in Lines 1B 43 Yes 

ESC C null n Set Page Length in Inches 1B 43 00 Yes 

ESC N n Set Skip Over Perforation 1B 4E Yes 

ESC O Cancel Skip Over Perforation 1B 4F Yes 

LF Line Feed 0A Yes 

ESC + n Set n/360-inch Line Spacing 1B 2B Yes 

ESC 0 Select 1/8-inch Line Spacing 1B 30 Yes 

ESC 2 Select 1/6-inch Line Spacing 1B 32 Yes 

ESC 3 n Set n/180-inch Line Spacing 1B 33 Yes 

ESC A n Set n/60-inch Line Spacing 1B 41 Yes 

ESC J n Perform n/180-inch Line Feed 1B 4A Yes 

VT Tab Vertically 0B Yes 

ESC B n1 n2...n16 null Set Vertical Tabs 1B 42 Yes 

ESC b n1 n2...n16 null Set Vertical Tabs in Channels 1B 62 Yes 

ESC / n 

Horizontal Motion 

Select Vertical Tab Channel 1B 2F Yes 

ESC l n Set Left Margin 1B 6C Yes 

ESC Q n Set Right Margin 1B 51 Yes 


ESC $ n1 n2 Set Absolute Print Position 1B 24 Yes 

ESC \ n1 n2 Set Relative Print Position 1B 5C Yes 

HT Tab Horizontally 09 Yes 

ESC D n1 n2...n32 null 

Overall Printing Style 

Set Horizontal Tabs 1B 44 Yes 

ESC l n Set Left Margin 1B 6C Yes 

ESC Q n Set Right Margin 1B 51 Yes 


ESC $ n1 n2 Set Absolute Print Position 1B 24 Yes 

ESC \ n1 n2 Set Relative Print Position 1B 5C Yes 

HT Tab Horizontally 09 Yes 

ESC D n1 n2...n32 null Set Horizontal Tabs 1B 44 Yes 

Print Size and Character Width 

ESC P Select 10 CPI 1B 50 Yes

Table 7.13. Epson LQ-850 Control Codes 



ESC M Select 12 CPI 1B 4D Yes 

ESC g Select 15 CPI 1B 67 Yes 

ESC p n Turn Proportional Mode On/Off 1B 70 Yes 

SI Select Condensed Mode 0F Yes 

ESC SI Select Condensed Mode 1B 0F Yes 

DC2 Cancel Condensed Mode 12 Yes 

SO Select Double-wide Mode (one line) 0E Yes 

ESC SO Select Double-wide Mode (one line) 1B 0E Yes 

ESC W n Turn Double-wide Mode On/Off 1B 57 Yes 

DC4 Cancel Double-wide Mode (one line) 14 Yes 

ESC w n Turn Double-high Mode On/Off 1B 77 Yes 

Print Enhancement 

ESC E Select Emphasized Mode 1B 45 Yes 

ESC F Cancel Emphasized Mode 1B 46 Yes 

ESC G Select Double-strike Mode 1B 47 Yes 

ESC H Cancel Double-strike Mode 1B 48 Yes 

ESC S n Select Superscript or Subscript 1B 53 Yes 

ESC T Cancel Superscript/Subscript Mode 1B 54 Yes 

ESC (- n1 n2 m d1 d2 Select Score 1B 28 2D Yes 

ESC - n Turn Underline Mode On/Off 1B 2D Yes 

ESC q 

Word Processing 

Select Character Style 1B 67 Yes 

ESC a n Select Justification 1B 61 – 

ESC SP n 

Character Tables 

Set Intercharacter Space 1B 20 Yes 

ESC t n Select Character Set 1B 74 Yes 

ESC 4 Select Italic Mode 1B 34 Yes 

ESC 5 Cancel Italic Mode 1B 35 Yes 

ESC R 

User-defined Characters 

Select an International Character Set 1B 52 Yes 

ESC & null d1 d2...dn Define User-defined Characters 1B 26 – 

ESC : null n null Copy ROM to RAM 1B 3A – 

ESC % n Select User-defined Set 1B 25 – 

ESC 6 Enable Printable Characters 1B 36 Yes 

ESC 7 

Graphics 

Enable Upper Control Codes 1B 37 Yes 

ESC K n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Select Single-density Graphics Mode 1B 4B Yes 

ESC L n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Select Double-density Graphics Mode 1B 4C Yes 

ESC Y n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Select High-speed Double-density Graphics Mode 1B 59 Yes 

ESC Z n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Select Quadruple-density Graphics Mode 1B 5A Yes 

ESC * m n1 n2 v1 v2...vn Select Graphics Mode 1B 2A Yes 

ESC ? m n Reassign Graphics Mode 1B 3F Yes 

7-25


LQ France (60) 

LQ-850 Symbol Sets 

7-26 

LQ US (28)

LQ Germany (92) LQ U.K. (124) 


7-27


LQ Italy (220) LQ Spain (252) 

7-28


LQ Japan (284) LQ Norway (316) 

7-29


LQ Denmark 2 (348) LQ Spain 2 (380) 

7-30

Latin America (412) LQ Denmark (156) 


7-31


LQ Sweden (188) 

7-32

HP LaserJet Emulation (Mode 6) 


On shipment from the factory, the printing system is set to power up in the HP LaserJet 

(PCL 6) emulation. The Kyocera printing systems support to emulate the following HP 

printer language as tabled below: 

Table 7.14. HP LaserJet Emulation by Model 

No. Model Printer Language Resolution (dpi) Fonts 

1 FS-1000 PCL6, KPDL (Optional) 600, 300 AGFA80 Fonts 

2 FS-1000+ PCL6, KPDL (Optional) 600, 300 AGFA80 Fonts 

3 FS-1010 PCL 6, KPDL Fast 1200, 600, 300 AGFA80 Fonts 

4 FS-1050 PCL 6, KPDL Fast 1200, 600, 300 AGFA80 Fonts 

5 FS-1200 PCL 6, KPDL 600, 300 AGFA80 Fonts 

6 FS-1714M PCL 6, KPDL Fine 1200, Fast 1200, 600, 300 AGFA80 Fonts 

7 FS-1750 PCL 6, KPDL Fine 1200, Fast 1200, 600, 300 AGFA80 Fonts 


9 FS-1800+ PCL 6, KPDL Fine 1200, Fast 1200, 600, 300 AGFA80 Fonts 


11 FS-3718M PCL 6, KPDL Fine 1200, Fast 1200, 600, 300 AGFA80 Fonts 



14 FS-5900C PCL 5C, KPDL 1200 (KPDL), 600 Bitstream45 

15 FS-6900 PCL 6, KPDL 600, 300 Bitstream45 

16 FS-8000C PCL 5C, KPDL 3 600 (bi-level), 600 (Contone) AGFA161 

17 FS-9100DN PCL 6C, KPDL 3 Fast 1200, 600, 300 AGFA161 

18 FS-9500DN PCL 6C, KPDL 3 Fast 1200, 600, 300 AGFA161 

19 KM-C830 PCL 5C, KPDL 3 600 (bi-level), 600 (Contone) AGFA161 

20 KM-1510 PCL 6, KPDL 600, 300 AGFA80 Fonts 




24 KM-2530 PCL 6C, KPDL 3 Fast 1200, 600, 300 AGFA161 

25 KM-3530 PCL 6C, KPDL 3 Fast 1200, 600, 300 AGFA161 

26 KM-4230 PCL 6, KPDL 600 AGFA80 Fonts 



The factory default symbol set is PC-8. To change this default symbol set, use the FRPO 

command with the U6 and U7 parameters. The default font is Courier. 

To set the printing system to power up in LaserJet mode, send the following PRE- 

SCRIBE command: 


To use the TimesNewRoman font of 14.25 points as the default font, add the following 

lines: 

FRPO V3, ’TimesNewRoman’; 

FRPO V1, 14; 

FRPO V2, 25; 

See Chapter 6 for details of the FRPO V parameters. 

The symbol set can be changed after power-up with the CSET or INTL command, or 

from the operator panel keys, or with LaserJet symbol sets typically accessed through 

software. 

7-33


7-34 

The printing system also supports as many HP symbol sets as the LaserJet regularly supports 

and still other symbol sets can be provided in downloaded fonts. (A full list of the 

supported symbol sets appear in section LaserJet Symbol Sets on page 37.) These symbol 

sets can be used by appropriate font selection commands as explained below. 

Fonts can be selected with PRESCRIBE commands, or through the printer driver provided 

with your software. The following font sample was created through driver support. 

Figure 7. 15. HP LaserJet Word-Processing Printout 

Additional soft fonts can be downloaded from external sources before printing begins. 

The printing system selects the fonts by a set of command codes (escape sequences) that 

describe the font attributes: character height, orientation, weight, character set, etc. (similar 

to the parameters used with the FSET command of PRESCRIBE). The printing system’s 

resident fonts include the HP resident fonts and many of the fonts from the HP font 

cartridges. 

The printing system supports the same soft fonts as the HP LaserJet printers. In addition, 

the printing system understands the LaserJet command codes and can use them to select 

any of its resident or downloaded fonts. 

Since the LaserJet font selection codes are fairly complex (Refer to LaserJet Font Selection 

section.), software that supports the Laser Jet usually provides a simplified set of 

font selection commands which the software translates into LaserJet command codes. 

Software-provided font selection commands will work for the printing system as they 

would for the HP LaserJet series printers. If a requested font is not present in the printing 

system’s memory, the page printing system will choose from the characteristics of the 

closest matching font.

LaserJet Fonts 


The LaserJet emulation supports 600/1200 dpi raster graphics for printing system models 

with the 300/600/1200 dpi resolution support. There is also support of delta row compression 

and compressed raster data for run length encoding and TIFF. 

The printing system supports the LaserJet vector graphics, which draw vertical or horizontal 

ruled lines and create rectangles filled with a pattern or gray scale. 

The margins in this emulation differ from the A parameters of the FRPO command. They 

recognize the page size of the default cassette. If you attempt to print beyond the right 

margin, the characters will be discarded. 

Cassette 

size 

Line per 

page 

Letter 60 80 

A4 64 77 

(Assuming 6 lines per inch and 10 characters per inch) 

The proportional spacing is not identical to the LaserJet’s proportional spacing. Rightmargin 

justification may not be correct when using the LaserJet printer driver (when a 

LaserJet driver is selected within the application software). 

The printing system emulates the LaserJet fonts as listed below. 

Table 7.16. LaserJet Fonts 

LaserJet Font Selection 


Character per 

line 

No. HP LaserJet Font Kyocera Font Style Type Face Number 

1 Arial Arial Medium, Bold, Italic, BoldItalic 16602 

2 TimesNewRoman TimesNewRoman Medium, Bold, Italic, BoldItalic 16901 

3 Symbol Symbol Medium 16686 

4 Wingdings Wingdings Medium 31402 

5 CG Times CG Times Medium, Bold, Italic, BoldItalic 4101 

6 Univers Univers-Md Medium, Bold, Italic, BoldItalic 4148 

7 Univers Cond Univers-Cd Medium Condensed, Bold Condensed, Italic 

Condensed, BoldItalic Condensed 

4148 

8 Courier Courier Medium, Bold, Italic, BoldItalic 4099 

9 Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Medium, Bold, Italic 4102 

10 Albertus Albertus-Md Medium, ExtraBold 4362 

11 Antique Olive Antique Olive Medium, Bold, Italic 4168 

12 Clarendon Cond Clarendon-Cd BoldCondensed 4140 

13 Coronet Coronet Italic 4116 

14 Garamond Garamond Antiqua, Halbfett, Kursiv, KursivHalbfett 4197 

15 Marigold Marigold Medium 4297 

16 CG Omega CG Omega Medium, Bold, Italic, BoldItalic 4113 

Resolution does not effect the availability of scalable fonts. Bitmap fonts generated by 

LDFC present one limitation. If the printing system uses a 300-dpi resolution, LDFCgenerated 

600 dpi bitmap fonts may not be used. Whether these 600 dpi bitmaps are 

7-35


7-36 

LDFC fonts or downloaded bitmap fonts by the user, they will constantly print unpredictably 

if the printing system uses the resolution of 300 dpi. 

Font Priority 

On the printing systems with the 600/1200 dpi resolution support, font selection in the 

HP LaserJet format adds an additional step to the font prioritization format. In font selection, 

the printing system evaluates the characteristics of the font and, by a process of 

matching features, reduces selection to a single font. The highest priority characteristic is 

symbol set, followed by spacing, pitch, point size, font style, stroke weight, and typeface. 

The LaserJet emulation (mode 6) adds resolution to this priority list. This additional priority 

is not available in the printing systems not supporting the 600/1200 dpi resolutions. 

For example, the printing system might face a font selection scenario of four near identical 

types of the Dutch801 font (by the KPDL emulation): 

• CGTimes (LaserJet compatible Intelli font) 

• Times (PostScript compatible font) 

• TimesNewRoman (LaserJet compatible TrueType font) 

These fonts have several common attributes and there is a possibility that selecting a 

Times may insert the TimesNewRoman font instead as a result of the internal font evaluation 

procedure. It is therefore important to understand how fonts are selected by the 

printing system. (See Chapter 4 for a discussion of the printing system’s internal font 

evaluation.) 

The final (lowest) priority for font priority is the font source. The source refers to the 

place where the font is accessed. The following table shows how this characteristic is 

ordered. 

Ordering 

priority 

Source Priority within same 

source 

1 Downloaded and LDFC-generated fonts Smaller font ID 

2 Memory card fonts Top slot > bottom slot 

3 Resident and optional fonts Alphabetic order 

Users should note two differences in the source priority of font selection. Ordering priority 

1 uses the original HP method whereby the internal number assigned to a font would 

be evaluated and the lowest number given the higher priority. This method applies to 

fonts downloaded to the printing system and, any LDFC-generated fonts. Ordering priority 

3 evaluates the font in alphabetic order. This method applies to the resident fonts and 

the KPDL fonts. 

An FRPO command (FRPO C8;) can modify this evaluation method by turning off evaluation 

of either the resident or scalable fonts, or KPDL fonts or both. The resident scalable 

fonts are not affected by this FRPO command. These fonts were designed by Agfa 

and observe the alphabetic ordering method used by Agfa. 

Regular and Dark Courier/Letter Gothic 

The stroke weight (bolding) of Courier and Letter Gothic is changeable between regular 

and dark. The default is regular and matches the Hewlett-Packard. It can be changed to 

dark which was the default stroke weight of Courier and Letter Gothic in order Kyocera 

printing systems by changing the FRPO V9 parameter.

LaserJet Font Escape Sequences 


The example below shows an HP font selection escape sequence that selects a LetterGothic 

font with fixed-pitch, 12-cpi, 12-point, upright-style, normal stroke weight. 

Characteristic Value (example) Escape Sequence 

Symbol set Roman-8 ESC(8U 

Spacing Fixed ESC(s0P 

Pitch 12-cpi ESC(s12H 

Height 12-point ESC(s12V 

Style Upright ESC(s0S 

Stroke weight Normal ESC(s0B 

Typeface Letter Gothic ESC(s4102T 

To select this LetterGothic font, send the following escape sequence to the printing system: 

ESC(8U ESC(s0P ESC(s12H ESC(s12V ESC(s0S ESC(s0B ESC(s4102T 

Any escape sequence with two similar consecutive letters after the ESC parameter can be 

combined as in the transformation of the LetterGothic font below: 

ESC(8U ESC(s0p12h12v0s0b4102T 

The FSET command of PRESCRIBE utilizes a similar font selection method. (The symbol 

set selection is made with the CSET command.) Note the similarities in the FSET 

command sequence below: 

FSET 0p12h12v0s0b4102T; 

Several other LaserJet codes should be considered for font management. See the Font 

Management section of the HP LaseJetPrinter commands on page 56 and onwards. 

LaserJet Symbol Sets 

Symbol set has the highest priority in the HP font selection. The factory default symbol 

set is IBM PC-8 (10U) for the LaserJet emulation. The LaserJet printer has many other 

symbol sets not directly accessed by the INTL command. Temporary selection of one of 

these symbol sets can be made with the CSET (Change symbol SET) command or from 

the operator panel keys. You can also assign one of these symbol sets to a particular font 

using the FSET (change current Font SETting) command. More information on these 

commands appear in Chapter 4. 

By giving a particular value for the FRPO U6 and U7 parameters, you can set one of the 

HP symbol sets as the power-up symbol set. In general, symbol set value is: 

(Escape sequence value field value × 32 + (Decimal value of escape sequence termination 

character – 64) [=(U7 – 50) × 100 + U6]) 

Symbol Sets for Bitmap Fonts 

The printing system substitutes with a scalable font when a bitmap font is required for 

downward compatibility. The following symbol sets are supported when substituted bitmap 

fonts are in use. To power up the printing system in one of these symbol set, use the 

following FRPO U6 and U7 values. 

7-37


7-38 

Table 7.17. Symbol Sets for Bitmap Fonts 

Symbol Set HP Symbol Set ID (Value) FRPO U6 Value FRPO U7 Value 

ISO 60 Norway 0D (4) 4 50 

HP Extension 0E (5) 5 

ISO 25 France 0F (6) 6 

HP German 0G (7) 7 

ISO 15 Italian 0I (9) 9 

ISO 14 Japan 0K (11) 11 

ECMA-94 Latin 1 0N (14) 14 

ISO 11 Sweden 0S (19) 19 

ISO 6 ASCII 0U (21) 21 

ISO 61 Norway 1D (36) 36 

ISO 4 U.K. 1E (37) 37 


ISO 21 Germany 1G (39) 39 

HP Spanish 1S (51) 51 

US Legal 1U (53) 53 

ISO 57 China 2K (75) 75 

ISO 17 Spain 2S (83) 83 50 

ISO 2 IRV 2U (85) 85 50 

ISO 10 Sweden 3S (115) 15 51 

ISO 16 Portugal 4S (147) 47 51 

Roman-9 4U (179) 79 51 

ISO 84 Portugal 5S (179) 79 51 

ISO 85 Spain 6S (211) 11 52 

PC Set 1 8Q (273) 73 52 

HP Roman-8 8U (277) 77 52 

PC Extension 9Q (305) 5 53 

IBM PC-8 10U (341) 41 53 

IBM PC-8 (D/N) 11U (373) 73 53 

IBM PC-850 12U (405) 5 54 

PC-858 13U (437) 37 54 

Symbol Sets for Scalable Fonts 

The following table lists symbol set support for resident scalable fonts. To power up the 

printing system in one of these symbol set, use the following FRPO U6 and U7 values. 

. 

Table 7.18. Symbol Sets for Scalable Fonts (Sheet 1 of 2) 


ISO 60 Norway 0D (4) 4 50 

ISO 15 Italian 0I (9) 9 

ECMA-94 Latin 1 0N (14) 14 

ISO 11 Sweden 0S (19) 19 

ISO 6 ASCII 0U (21) 21 

ISO 4 U. K. 1E (37) 37 


ISO 21 Germany 1G (39) 39 

US Legal 1U (53) 53 

ISO Latin 2 2N (78) 78 

ISO 17 Spain 2S (83) 83

Table 7.18. Symbol Sets for Scalable Fonts (Sheet 2 of 2) 


PC Cyrillic 3R (114) 14 51 

PS math 5M (173) 73 

ISO Latin 5 5N (174) 74 

Windows Latin 5 5T (180) 80 

MS Publishing 6J (202) 2 52 

ISO Latin 6 6N (206) 6 

Desktop 7J (234) 34 

Greek-8 8G (263) 63 

Math-8 8M (269) 69 

Turkish-8 8T (276) 76 

HP Roman-8 8U (277) 77 

Windows Latin 2 9E (293) 93 

Windows Greek 9G (295) 95 

PC-1004 9J (298) 98 

ISO Latin 9 9N (302) 2 53 

Win Cyrillic 9R (306) 6 

PC Turkish 9T (308) 8 

Windows 9U(309) 9 

PC-851 Greek 10G (327) 27 

PS text 10J (330) 30 

ISO Cyrillic 10N (334) 34 

PC-855 Serbia 10R (338) 38 

IBM PC-8 10U (341) 41 

PC-869 Greek 11G (359) 59 

IBM PC-8 D/N 11U (373) 73 

PC-8 Greek 12G (391) 91 

Macintosh 12J (394) 94 

ISO Greek 12N (398) 98 

USSR-GOST 12R (402) 2 54 

IBM PC-850 12U (405) 5 

ABICOMP Brazil 13P (432) 32 

PC-8 Bulgarian 13R (434) 34 

PC-8 Greek/ 437G 14G (455) 55 

ABICOMP Int. 14P (464) 64 

PC Ukrainian 14R (466) 66 

Pi Font 15U (501) 1 55 

PC-857 Turkish 16U (533) 33 

PC-852 Latin 2 17U (565) 65 

ISO-10646 18N (590) 90 

PC-853 Turkish 18U (597) 97 

WinBalt 19L (620) 20 56 

Windows Latin 1 19U (629) 29 

PC-860 Portugal 20U (661) 61 

PC-861 Iceland 21U (693) 93 

PC-863 Canada 23U (757) 57 57 

PC-8 Polish 24Q (785) 85 

PC-865 Norway 25U (821) 21 58 

PC-775 26U (853) 53 

PC-8 PC Nova 27Q (881) 81 

Example: 

To power up in the TimesNewRoman font for the Windows symbol set: 


7-39


7-40 

!R! FRPO V3, ’TimesNewRoman’; 

FRPO U6, 9; FRPO U7, 53; 

STAT; 

EXIT; 

The STAT command in the third line prints a status page that enables the user to confirm 

changes made with the preceding sequences. The power-up font and symbol set are 

shown in the Interfaces section. 

Resource Protection 

The resource protection feature is Kyocera’s implementation of the HP’s resource saving. 

The feature preserves resources during emulation switching. The protected 

resources, user-defined symbol sets and patterns, fonts, and macros, remain intact when 

the user switches to and from the HP LaserJet emulation. 

A permanent default can be set for resource protection using the following FRPO command: 

!R! FRPO N9, 1; EXIT; or !R! FRPO N9, 2; EXIT; 

The MENU key on the printing system’s control panel may also be used to establish 

resource protection. 

The following table summarizes the features and functions of the resource protection 

mode in the HP LaserJet emulation. 

Table 7.19. Resource Protection and FRPO N9 Value 

Resource (Property) Emulation N9 = 0 N9 = 1 N9 = 2 

Soft fonts (Permanent) 

Soft fonts (Temporary) 

Macros (Permanent) 

Macros (Temporary) 

User patterns (Permanent) 

User patterns (Temporary) 

User symbol set (Permanent) 

User symbol set (Temporary) 

HPLJ 

HPLJ 

HPLJ 

HPLJ 

HPLJ 

HPLJ 

HPLJ 

HPLJ 

Deleted 

Deleted 

Deleted 

Deleted 

Deleted 

Deleted 

Deleted 

Deleted 

Retained 

Deleted 

Retained 

Deleted 

Retained 

Deleted 

Retained 

Deleted 

Retained 

Retained 

Retained 

Retained 

Retained 

Retained 

Retained 

Retained 

Print environment HPLJ Deleted Deleted Retained 

Permanent dictionary KPDL Retained Retained Retained 

A detailed description of the FRPO N9 command follows. Note that the factory default 

setting for the N9 command is 0. 

N9 = 0, resource protection is off. No resources will be protected during emulation 

switching, regardless of whether they are temporary 

or permanent. When the user returns to the mode 6 

emulation, the print environment will be reset. The 

print environment includes items such as number of 

copies, orientation, and margins.

N9 = 1, permanent PCL resources 

are protected. 

N9 = 2, permanent and temporary 

PCL resources are protected. 


Resource protection becomes operational under any of the following emulation switching 

conditions: 

• An SEM command is sent to the printing system. 

• The emulation is changed by the user from the operator panel keys. 

• An automatic emulation sensing (AES) function is used for switching between KPDL 

and PCL. 

• An HP LaserJet PJL command @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = ?? is received. 

The KPDL permanent dictionary is always protected, regardless of the values for N9. 

The amount of memory saved under resource protection is limited by the user memory 

available. Resource protection requires extra memory for storing downloaded fonts and 

macros. This memory requirement extends beyond the standard memory that accompanies 

the printing system. The requirement varies based upon optional features installed in 

the printing system. 

Note that a print environment using resource protection but whose space has been limited 

by user memory items like macros, symbol sets and fonts, will render the resource 

protection feature non-operational. 

The property value (temporary or permanent) assigned to a resource must be given in the 

PCL command language. PRESCRIBE provides no commands for making a temporary 

or permanent designation. As a result, resource protection mode applies only to those 

resources generated with the HP PCL command language. A description of the memory 

requirements and property values for typical models appear in the following table. 

Minimum memory requirement for Resource Protection 

The printing system will store in memory all 

resources marked as permanent (soft fonts, macros, 

user patterns and symbol sets) and protect these 

resources during emulation switching. All resources 

marked as temporary (soft fonts, macros, user patterns, 

and symbol sets) will be lost during emulation 

switching. The print environment will be reset when 

it is returned to the mode 6 emulation. 

The printing system will store in memory all 

resources, both temporary and permanent, and protect 

them during emulation switching. Instead of 

resetting the mode 6 environment upon switching 

back, the printing system will restore the previous 

print environment. This option demands a large 

share of printing system memory. 

The following tables are memory requirements for typical printing system models. For 

information on memory requirement on other printing system models, refer to the operation 

manual supplied with the printing system. 

Table 7.20. Example: FS-1000 Series 

Printing Condition Resolution 

300 dpi 600 dpi 

HPLJ 4 2 Mbytes 2 Mbytes 

HPLJ 4, duplex mode=None, raster memory=A4/Letter 2 Mbytes 6 Mbytes 

HPLJ 4, duplex mode=None, raster memory=Legal 2 Mbytes 7 Mbytes 

HPLJ 4, duplex mode=on, raster memory=A4/Letter 3 Mbytes 10 Mbytes 

7-41


7-42 

Switching the Print Resolution 

Note 

Table 7.20. Example: FS-1000 Series 


300 dpi 600 dpi 

HPLJ 4, duplex mode=on, raster memory=Legal 3 Mbytes 11 Mbytes 

HPLJ 4/KPDL, duplex mode=None, raster memory=A4/Letter 2 Mbytes 6 Mbytes 

HPLJ 4/KPDL, duplex mode=None, raster memory=Legal 2 Mbytes 7 Mbytes 

HPLJ 4/KPDL, duplex mode=on, raster memory=A4/Letter 3 Mbytes 10 Mbytes 

HPLJ 4/KPDL, duplex mode=on, raster memory=Legal 3 Mbytes 11 Mbytes 

HPLJ 4/KPDL, resource protection, duplex mode=None 10 Mbytes 10 Mbytes 

HPLJ 4/KPDL, resource protection, duplex mode=on 14 Mbytes 14 Mbytes 

Table 7.21. Example: FS-9500DN 


300 dpi 600 dpi 1200 dpi 

Fast mode Fine mode 

PCL 6, duplex mode=None 8 MB 8 MB 8 MB 8 MB 

PCL 6, duplex mode=On 8 MB 8 MB 8 MB 12 MB 

KPDL, duplex mode=None 8 MB 8 MB 8 MB 8 MB 

KPDL, duplex mode=On 8 MB 8 MB 12 MB 12 MB 

PCL 6/KPDL resource protection, 

duplex mode=None 

— 10 MB 10 MB 10 MB 

PCL 6/KPDL, resource protection, 

duplex mode=On 

— 14 MB 14 MB 14 MB 

Because the printing systems with the 1200 dpi resolution support print at 300, 600, 1200 

dpi, the printing system provides an FRPO command to establish a default at either level 

of resolution. 

For fine 1200 dpi resolution, command: 

!R! FRPO N8, 3; EXIT; 

For 600 dpi resolution, command: 


For 300 dpi resolution, command: 


When the printing resolution is changed between 1200 dpi, 600 dpi, and 300 dpi, the 

printing system loads the PJL current environment values. 

In addition to the FRPO N8 command as explained above, printing systems that permit 

the resolution to be set at either 300, 600, or 1200 are provided with the RESL (change 

RESoLution) command which switches the resolution on the fly. For details about this 

command, refer to PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference. 

The amount of available printing system memory will determine whether the 600/1200 dpi 

default can be effective. If factors such as resource protection, duplexing, and raster memory 

reduce memory too low, then the printing system will remain at 300 dpi resolution.

HP LaserJet Reset State 

LaserJet PJL 


The printing system resets to the following states when it receives a PCL reset command. 

Shown in parentheses are the related FRPO parameters. 

Table 7.22. HP LaserJet Emulation Reset State 

Job control Number of copies 1 

Page control Cassette Upper (R4) 

Orientation Portrait (C1) 

Paper size Installed tray size (R2) 

VMI 6 lpi (U0/U1) 

HMI 10 cpi 

Top margin 50 dots 

Text length Paper size – (1/2-inch top + 1/2-inch bottom) 

Left margin Left logical 

Right margin Right logical 

Perforation skip On 

Line termination CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF 

Fonts Font Courier 

Symbol set IBM PC-8 (U6/U7) 

Underline mode Off 

Font management Font id 0 

Character code 0 

Raster graphics Raster graphics resolution 75 

Rectangular area fill Horizontal rectangle size 0 

Vertical rectangle size 0 

Area fill id 0 

Macro Macro id 0 

Troubleshooting command End of line wrap Off 

Display functions Off 

The HP LaserJet emulation loads a Printer Job Language (PJL) that controls communication 

between the printing system and the system. The PJL works for both KPDL and HP 

LaserJet emulations. It enables the user to change some default states but, more importantly, 

allows current printing system states to be communicated back to the host system. 

The Kyocera printing systems described in this manual support only a subset of the HP 

PJL commands. To check supported PJL features, see the table that follows. 

Table 7.23. Supported PJL Commands 

Command Group Command Description 

Kernel Commands Universal Exit 

Language (UEL) 

Job Separation 

Commands 

Exits current printer language and returns control to PJL. Reset 

the PJL parser to start at the beginning of the line. 

COMMENT Tells PJL to accept the command line as a comment. 

ENTER Chooses a printer language for processing the current job. 

JOB Informs printing system of the start of a print job, resets the 

page count, allows naming of the job, supports non-printing 

mode for printing portions of jobs. 

EOJ Instructs printing system that the print job is complete, resets 

the page count. 

7-43


7-44 

Table 7.23. Supported PJL Commands 

Command Group Command Description 

Environment DEFAULT Sets default for environment variables. 

Commands 

SET Sets an environment variable to a specified value during a PJL 

job. 

INITIALIZE Resets current and default PJL variables to factory default. 

RESET Defaults current PJL variables. 

Status Readback INQUIRE Requires the current value for a specified environment 

Commands 

variable. 

DINQUIRE Requires the default value for a specified environment 

variable. 

ECHO Returns the portion of the command to the host 

computer. 

INFO Requests a specified category of printing system information, 

such as printing system model, available printing system 

memory, configuration, status, environment variables, and 

unsolicited status variables. 

USTATUS Allows printing system to send unsolicited status messages for 

device status changes, end-of-job status, and the number of 

pages printed. Status can be sent at specified time intervals. 

USTATUSOFF Deactivates all unsolicited status. 

Device Attendance RDYMSG Specifies a message that replaces the Processing message on 

Commands 

the message display. Shown in offline state if the printing 

system is processing data (except in mode selection). 

OPMSG Displays specified message on the message display and sets 

printing system offline. 

STMSG Displays specified message on the message display and sets 

printing system offline. If status readback is on, returns name 

of the key that is used to return the printing system online. 

PJL File System FSDELETE Deletes printing system mass storage files. 

Commands 

FSDOWNLOAD Downloads files to the printing system mass storage system. 

FSINIT Initializes the printing system mass storage file system. 

FSMKDIR Creates a directory on the printing system mass storage file 

system. 

PJL command syntax 

A PJL command line containing the ENTER command appears as follows: 

PJL prefix Option name Option value Required line feed 

@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = personality [] 

Enter this portion verbatim Optional carriage return 

PJL syntax also uses the following control codes and special identifiers. 

Horizontal tab character (ASCII 9) 

Line feed character (ASCII 10) 

Carriage return character (ASCII 13) 

Space character (ASCII 32) 

Escape character (ASCII 27) 

Form feed character (ASCII 12) 

White space, a result of one of more or .

The PJL command syntax should follow one of four formats: 

Format 1: 

%-12345X 

This format uses the Universal Exit Language (UEL) only. 

Format 2: 


Printable characters (ASCII characters 33 through 255) and , starting 

with a printable character. 

^D KPDL end-of-file indication. It is not part of PJL, but is used to end KPDL 

instructions. 

@PJL [] 

This format may be used to add a visual line break among the PJL command lines. 

Format 3: 

@PJL command [] [] 

This format is currently used for the COMMENT and ECHO commands only. For examples: 

Format 4: 

@PJL COMMENT ... 

@PJL ECHO ... 

@PJL command [command modifier : value] [option name 

[=value]] [] 

This format is used comprehensively for all of the other PJL commands. 

@PJL DEFAULT LPARM : PCL PTSIZE=14.25 

Rules for PJL Command Syntax 

This section provides the rules that should be observed in using PJL commands: 

• The prefix @PJL always must be uppercase. Other parts of the PJL command are not 

case-sensitive. 

• Spacing between characters (white space) should either be the space character 

(ASCII 32) or the horizontal tab character (ASCII 9). 

The placement of white space in PJL commands depends on its location within the command. 

Some white space is mandatory and some is optional: 

• White space is required between the @PJL prefix and the PJL command name, and 

between the PJL command name and command modifiers. For example: 

@PJL OPMSG DISPLAY or 

@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = personality 

• If white space does not appear in any other place in the command, white space is 

optional. 

• If white space appears between two portions of a PJL command, it is not allowed. An 

example of white space use appears between the optional carriage return and required 

line feed character that terminate most commands. 

7-45


7-46 

PJL variables 

PJL uses alphanumeric variables, numeric variables, and strings. The following explains 

the three types of variables and their ranges. 

Alphanumeric variables 

Any combination of letters and digits, with the rule that the first character must always 

be a letter. Letters can consist of the uppercase letters (ASCII 65 through 90) and lowercase 

letters (ASCII 97 through 122). Digits can consist of numbers 0 through 9 (ASCII 

48 through 57). 

Example of valid alphanumeric variables: 

Alpha 635 

X2000 

Examples of invalid alphanumeric variables: 

635Alpha 

(Alphanumeric variables must begin with a letter) 

X 2000 

(Space characters [ASCII 32] are not allowed in alphanumeric variables) 

Numeric variables 

Any number consisting of digits, with one optional decimal point and an optional plus 

(+) or minus (–) sign preceding the first digit. Only one decimal point may be used. It 

must also be placed somewhere after the first digit. Digits are unnecessary after the decimal 

point. 

Examples of valid numeric variables: 

0.123456 

–123.456 

+657000 

2468. 

Examples of invalid numeric variables: 

.123456 

(The decimal point must be preceded by at least 1 digit). 

–123.45.6 

(Only 1 decimal point is allowed in a numeric variable). 

+657,000 

(Commas should not be used in numeric variables). 

Strings 

Strings should be enclosed in quotation marks, and consist of any combination of characters 

of ASCII codes from 32 through 255 including 9 (horizontal tab) but excluding 34 

(quotation marks). Examples are as follows. 

Examples of valid strings: 

"Model:FS-9500DN" — Tabs are allowed in a string. 

"The Arlington Ball Park" 

Examples of invalid strings: 

"It is 3.5" long." — A string should not contain quotation marks. 

"Telephone number01234-5678" 

— is out of the valid range of ASCII characters for a string.

Invalid Commands 


Invalid commands are in two general types: those with syntax errors and those with syntax 

or semantic warnings. The printing system handles each of those types different 

ways. 

Syntax errors contain errors such as unrecognized commands and command modifiers, 

strings with missing closing double quotations, numeric values with missing digits 

before the decimal points, and numeric values encountered when alphanumeric values 

are to be expected. The printing system ignores the entire PJL commands when it 

receives commands having syntax errors. Some examples follow. 

The JOB command’s NAME option requires double quotations around its value part. 

Valid command: 

@PJL JOB NAME = "Job Number 50" 

Invalid command: 

@PJL JOB NAME = "Job Number 51 

The closing quotation is required. 

Syntax warnings and semantic warnings are issued for such commands that have unsupported 

options, values out of range, values missing or of the incorrect type, or values 

added when none are allowed. When the printing system receives commands with syntax 

or semantic warnings, the part of the command including the warning is ignored. 

In the following example, the START option is valid for the JOB command. 

Valid command: 

@PJL JOB START = 1 

While in the following, FINISH is not a valid option and ignored (END should be used). 

Invalid command: 

PJL Reset Status 

@PJL JOB START = 1 FINISH = HOME 

The following table shows the PJL and equivalent FRPO commands that initialize the 

environments. 

Table 7.24. PJL Reset Status 

Environment PJL command FRPO parameter 

Printing resolution RESOLUTION — 

Raster memory 

(HP Page protection) 

PAGEPROTECT FRPO R5 

Personality PERSONALITY — 

KIR (HP RET) RET FRPO N0 

Interface timeout TIMEOUT FRPO N9 

Copy COPIES FRPO C0 

Paper size PAPER FRPO R2 

Orientation ORIENTATION FRPO C1 

Manual feed MANUAL FEED FRPO R4 

Paper source MANUAL FEED FRPO R4 

Output stack OUTBIN FRPO R0 

7-47


7-48 

Table 7.24. PJL Reset Status 

Environment PJL command FRPO parameter 

Duplex DUPLEX FRPO N4 

Default font FONTNUMBER FRPO V3 

Point size PTSIZE FRPO V0-2 

Pitch PITCH — 

Symbol set SYMSET FRPO U6/U7

HP LaserJet Printer Commands — PCL 


In the tables below, Yes means that the command is supported and No means that the 

command is not supported. 

Table 7.25. HP LaserJet PCL Commands (Sheet 1 of 15) 

Function Parameter Command Hexadecimal 

Value 

1000 

1000+ 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

JOB CONTROL COMMANDS 

Reset 

Reset ESCE 1B 45 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Number of 

Copies 

# of Copies 

(1-999) 

ESC&l#X 1B 26 6C #...# 

58 

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Long-Edge 

(Left) 

# of 

Decipoints 

ESC&l#U 1B 26 6C #...# 

55 


Offset (1/720”) 

Short-Edge 

(Top) 

# of 

Decipoints 

ESC&l#Z 1B 26 6C #...# 

5A 


Offset (1/720”) 

Unit of # = Number of ESC&u#D 1B 26 75 #...# 44 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Measure units per inch 

Exit PCL — ESC%-12345X 1B 25 2D 31 32 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Language 

33 34 35 58 

Simplex/Duplex Operation 

Simplex/Dupl Simplex ESC&l0S 1B 26 6C 30 53 No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ex Print 

Duplex 

Long-Edge- 

Binding 

Short-Edge- 

Binding 

ESC&llS 

ESC&l2S 

1B 26 6C 32 53 

1B 26 6C 32 53 

No 

No 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Page Side Next side ESC&a0G 1B 26 61 30 47 No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Selection Front Side ESC&a1G 1B 26 61 31 47 No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Back Side ESC&a2G 1B 26 61 32 47 No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Job 

Separation 

— ESC&l1T 1B 26 6C 31 54 No No No Yes No 

PAGE CONTROL COMMANDS 

Page Length and Size 

Paper Source Current Tray 

(0) 

ESC&l0H 1B 26 6C 30 48 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Upper Paper 

Tray (1) 


Manual 

Feeder (2) 


Manual 

Feeder (3) 


Lower (1) 

Tray (4) 


Lower (2) 

Tray (5) 

ESC&l5H 1B 26 6C 35 48 No Yes Yes Yes No 

Envelope Tray ESC&l6H 

(6) 

1B 26 6C 36 48 No Yes Yes Yes No 

Auto Select 

(Media Type) 

ESC&l7H 1B 26 6C 37 48 No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

3rd Tray in PF- ESC&l20H 

60/4th Tray in 

PF-30 

1B 26 6C 32 30 

48 

No Yes No Yes No 

5th Tray in PF- ESC&l21H 

30 

1B 26 6C 32 31 

48 

No No No Yes No 

6th Tray in PF- ESC&l22H 

30 

1B 26 6C 32 32 

48 


8000C 

7-49


7-50 



Value 

Output Bin Destination 

Tray 1 (Face 

down) 

Destination 

Tray 2 (Face 

up) 

Destination 

Tray 3 (Opt. 

Face down) 

Destination 

Tray 1 (Face 

down) 

Destination 

Tray 2 (Face 

down) 

Destination 

Tray 3 (Face 

down) 

Destination 

Tray 4 (Face 

down) 

Destination 

Tray 5 (Face 

down) 

Destination 

Tray 6 (Face 

down) 

Destination 

Tray 7 (Face 

down) 

Destination 

Tray 8 (Face 

down) 

Destination 

Tray 9 (Face 

down) 

Media Type 

ESC&l1G 1B 25 6C 31 47 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ESC&l2G 1B 25 6C 32 47 No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ESC&l3G 1B 26 6C 33 47 No No No Yes No 







ESC&l10G 1B 26 6C 31 30 

47 

ESC&l11G 1B 26 6C 31 31 

47 

ESC&l12G 1B 26 6C 31 32 

47 

Media Type Automatica ESC&n5Wd� 

Auto 

Plain ESC&n6Wd� 

Plain 

Transparency ESC&n13Wd� 

Transparency 

Preprinted ESC&n11Wd� 

Preprinted 

Labels ESC&n7Wd� 

Labels 

Bond ESC&n5Wd� 

Bond 

Recycled ESC&n9Wd� 

Recycled 

35 57 64 61 75 

74 6F 

36 57 64 50 6C 

61 69 6E 

31 33 57 64 54 

72 61 6E 73 70 

61 72 65 6E 63 

79 

31 31 57 64 50 

72 65 70 72 69 

6E 74 65 64 

37 57 64 4C 61 

62 65 6C 73 

35 57 64 42 6F 

6E 64 

39 57 64 52 65 

63 79 63 6C 65 

64 

Vellum ESC&n7Vellum 37 56 65 6C 6C 

75 6D 0D 

Rough ESC&n6Wd� 

Rough 

Letterhead ESC&n11Wd� 

Letterhead 

31 31 57 64 4C 

65 74 74 65 72 

68 65 61 64 

1000 

1000+ 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C 













Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes



Value 

Color ESC&n6Wd� 

Color 

Prepunched ESC&n11Wd� 

Prepunched 

Envelope ESC&n9Wd� 

Envelope 

Card stock ESC&n11Wd� 

Cardstock 

36 57 64 43 6F 

6C 6F 72 

31 31 57 64 50 

72 65 70 75 6E 

63 68 65 64 

31 30 57 64 43 

61 72 64 73 74 

6F 63 6B 






Custom 1 ESC&n8Wd� 

Custom1 



Custom2 



Custom3 



Custom4 



Custom5 



Custom6 



Custom7 



Custom8 


Page Size Executive ESC&l1A 1B 26 6C 31 41 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Letter ESC&l2A 1B 26 6C 32 41 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Legal ESC&l3A 1B 26 6C 33 41 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Ledger ESC&l6A 1B 26 6C 36 41 No No Yes Yes No 

A5 ESC&l25A 1B 26 6C 32 35 

41 

Yes Yes Yes Yes No 

A4 ESC&l26A 1B 26 6C 32 36 

41 


A3 ESC&l27A 1B 26 6C 32 37 

41 

No No Yes Yes No 

JIS B5 ESC&l45A 1B 26 6C 34 35 

41 


JIS B4 ESC&l46A 1B 26 6C 34 36 

41 

No No Yes Yes No 

Hagaki ESC&l71A 1B 26 6C 37 31 

41 


Oufuku- 

Hagaki 

ESC&l72A 1B 26 6C 37 32 

41 

YOUKEI 2 ESC&l78A 1B 26 6C 37 38 

41 

YOUKEI 4 ESC&l79A 1B 26 6C 37 39 

41 

FOLIO ESC&l77A 1B 26 6C 37 37 

41 

STATEMENT ESC&l76A 1B 26 6C 37 36 

41 

OFICIO II ESC&l73A 1B 26 6C 37 33 

41 

1000 

1000+ 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C 







7-51


7-52 



Value 

International 

B5 

ESC&l100A 1B 26 6C 31 30 

30 41 

Custom ESC&l101A 1B 26 6C 31 30 

31 41 

Monarch ESC&l80A 1B 26 6C 38 30 

41 

COM 10 ESC&l81A 1B 26 6C 38 31 

41 

DL ESC&l90A 1B 26 6C 39 30 

41 

International 

C5 

ESC&l91A 1B 26 6C 39 31 

41 

1000 

1000+ 


Yes Yes Yes Yes No 





Page Length 

Orientation 

# of Lines ESC&l#P 1B 26 6C #...# 

050 


Orientation Portrait ESC&l0O 1B 26 6C 30 4F Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Landscape ESC&l1O 1B 26 6C 31 4F Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Reverse 

Portrait 

ESC&l2O 1B 26 6C 32 4F Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Reverse 

Landscape 

ESC&l3O 1B 26 6C 33 4F Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Print Direction Degrees of 

Rotation 

(counterclock 

wise 

90°increments 

only) 

ESC&a#P 1B 26 61 #...# 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Character Text Horizontal ESC&c0T 1B 26 63 30 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Path Direction 

Vertical ESC&c-1T 1B 26 63 2D 31 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Rotated 

54 

Margins and Text Length 

Top Margin # of Lines ESC&l#E 1B 26 6C #...# 

45 


Text Length # of Lines ESC&l#F 1B 26 6C #...# 

46 


Left Margin # of Columns ESC&a#L 1B 26 61 #...# 

4C 


Right Margin # of Columns ESC&a#M 1B 26 61 #...# 

4D 


Clear 

Horizontal 

Margins 

ESC9 1B 39 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Perforation Skip Mode 

Perforation Disable ESC&l0L 1B 26 6C 30 4C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Skip 

Enable ESC&l1L 1B 26 6C 31 4C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Horizontal Column Spacing 

Horizontal 

Motion Index 

(HMI) 

# of 1/120” 

Increments 

ESC&lk#H 1B 26 6B #...# 

48 


Vertical Line Spacing 

Vertical 

Motion Index 

(VMI) 

# of 1/48” 

Increments 

ESC&l#C 1B 26 6C #...# 

43 


Line Spacing 1 line/inch ESC&l1D 1B 26 6C 31 44 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

(Lines per 

inch) 

2 lines/inch 

3 lines/inch 

ESC&l2D 

ESC&l3D 

1B 26 6C 32 44 

1B 26 6C 33 44 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

Yes 

4 lines/inch ESC&l4D 1B 26 6C 34 44 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 



12 lines/inch ESC&l12D 1B 26 6C 31 32 

44 


1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C



Value 

Alphanumeric 

ID 


44 


44 


44 

# of bytes ESC&n#W 

[operation] 

[String] 

1B 26 6E #...# 

57 


1000 

1000+ 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C 





CURSOR POSITIONING 

Vertical and Horizontal 

Vertical # of Rows ESC&a#R 1B 26 61 #...# 52 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Position 

# of Dots ESC*p#Y 1B 2A 70 #...# 

59 


# of 

Decipoints 

ESC&a#V 1B 26 61 #...# 56 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Horizontal # of Columns ESC&a#C 1B 26 61 #...# 43 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Position # of Dots ESC*p#X 1B 2A 70 #...# 

58 


# of 

Decipoints 

ESC&a#H 1B 26 61 #...# 48 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Half Line Feed ESC= 1B 3D Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

End-of-Line Termination 

Line 

Termination 

CR = CR; 

LF = LF; 

FF = FF; 

ESC&k0G 1B 26 6B 30 47 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

CR = CR + LF ESC&k1G 

LF = LF 

FF = FF 

1B 26 6B 31 47 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

CR = CR; 

LF = CR + LF; 

FF = CR + FF 

ESC&k2G 1B 26 6B 32 47 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

CR = CR + LF; ESC&k3G 

LF = CR + LF; 

FF = CR + FF 

Push/Pop Position 

1B 26 6B 33 47 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Push/Pop Push ESC&f#S 1B 26 66 30 53 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Position Pop ESC&f#S 1B 26 66 31 53 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

FONT SELECTION 

Symbol Set Selection 

Primary 

Symbol Set 

ISO 60: 

Norwegian 

ESC(0D 1B 28 30 44 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ISO 4; United ESC(1E 

Kingdom 

1B 28 31 45 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Windows 3.1 

Latin 2 

ESC(9E 1B 28 39 45 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ISO 69: 

French 

ESC(1F 1B 28 31 46 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ISO 21: 

German 

ESC(1G 1B 28 31 47 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ISO 15: Italian ESC(0I 1B 28 30 49 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Microsoft 

publishing 

ESC(6J 1B 28 36 4A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

DeskTop ESC(7J 1B 28 37 4A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

PC1004 ESC(9J 1B 28 39 4A No No No Yes No 

PS Text ESC(10J 1B 28 31 30 4A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

MC Text ESC(12J 1B 28 31 32 4A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Wingdings ESC(579L 1B 28 35 37 39 

4C 

No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

PS Math ESC(5M 1B 28 35 4D Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

7-53


7-54 



Value 

1000 

1000+ 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C 

Math-8 ESC(8M 1B 28 38 4D Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Symbol ESC(19M 1B 28 31 39 4D No Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ECMA-94 

Latin 1 

ESC(0N 1B 28 30 4E Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ISO L2 ESC(2N 1B 28 32 4E Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ISO L5 ESC(5N 1B 28 35 4E Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ISO 8859-10 

Latin 6 

ESC(6N 1B 28 36 4E No No No Yes No 

ISO 11: 

Swedish 

ESC(0S 1B 28 30 53 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ISO 17: 

Spanish 

ESC(2S 1B 28 32 53 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Windows 3.1 

Latin 5 

ESC(5T 1B 28 35 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

PC Turkish ESC(9T 1B 28 39 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ISO 6: ASCII ESC(0U 1B 28 30 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Legal ESC(1U 1B 28 31 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Roman-8 ESC(8U 1B 28 38 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Windows 3.0 

Latin 1 

ESC(9U 1B 28 39 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

PC-8 ESC(10U 1B 28 31 30 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

PC-8 D/N ESC(11U 1B 28 31 31 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

PC 850 ESC(12U 1B 28 31 32 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Pi Font ESC(15U 1B 28 31 35 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

PC-852 ESC(17U 1B 28 31 37 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Windows 3.1 

Latin 1 

(ANSI) 

ESC(19U 1B 28 31 39 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

PC-775 ESC(26U 1B 28 32 36 55 No No No Yes No 

Windows 3.1J 

(Japanese) 

ESC(19K 1B 28 31 39 4B Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Spacing 

Primary Fixed ESC(s0P 1B 28 73 30 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Spacing 

Pitch 

Proportional ESC(s1p 1B 28 73 31 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Primary Pitch # Characters/ 

inch 

ESC(s#H 1B 28 73 #...# 48 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Set Pitch Mode 10.0 ESC&k0S 1B 26 6B 30 53 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Compressed 

(16.5-16.7) 

ESC&k2S 1B 26 6B 32 53 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Elite (12.0) 

Point Size 

ESC&k4S 1B 26 6B 34 53 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Primary 

Height 

Style 

# Points ESC(s#V 1B 28 73 #...# 56 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Primary Style Upright 

(Solid) 

ESC(s0S 1B 28 73 30 53 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Italic ESC(s1S 1B 28 73 31 53 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Condensed ESC(s4S 1B 28 73 34 53 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Condensed 

Italic 


Compressed 

(Extra 

Condensed) 


Expanded ESC(s24S 1B 28 73 32 34 

53 


Outline ESC(s32S 1B 28 73 33 32 

53 

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes



Value 

Inline ESC(s64S 1B 28 73 36 34 

53 

Shadowed ESC(s128S 1B 28 73 31 32 

38 53 

Outline 

Shadowed 

ESC(s160S 1B 28 73 31 36 

30 53 





Stroke Weight 

Primary Font Ultra Thin ESC(s-7B 1B 28 73 2D 37 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Stroke Weight 

42 

Extra Thin ESC(s-6B 1B 28 73 2D 36 

42 


Thin ESC(s-5B 1B 28 73 2D 35 

42 


Extra Light ESC(s-4B 1B 28 73 2D 34 

42 


Light ESC(s-3B 1B 28 73 2D 33 

42 


Demi Light ESC(s-2B 1B 28 73 2D 32 

42 


Semi Light ESC(s-1B 1B 28 73 2D 31 

42 


Medium 

(book or text) 

ESC(s0B 1B 28 73 30 42 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Semi Bold ESC(s1B 1B 28 73 31 42 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Demi Bold ESC(s2B 1B 28 73 32 42 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Bold ESC(s3B 1B 28 73 33 42 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Extra Bold ESC(s4B 1B 28 73 34 42 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Black ESC(s5B 1B 28 73 35 42 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Extra Black ESC(s6B 1B 28 73 36 42 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Ultra Black ESC(s7B 1B 28 73 37 42 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Primary Typeface Family 

Typeface 

Family 

Albertus ESC(s4362T 1B 28 73 34 31 

36 32 54 


Antique Olive ESC(s4168T 1B 28 73 34 31 

36 38 54 


Clarendon ESC(s4140T 1B 28 73 34 31 

34 30 54 


Coronet ESC(s4116T 1B 28 73 34 31 

31 36 54 


Courier ESC(s3T 1B 28 73 33 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

GW-Kai ESC(s37357T 1B 28 73 33 37 

33 35 37 54 


Courier ESC(s4099T 1B 28 73 34 30 

39 39 54 


ITC Zapf 

Dingbats 

Garamond 

Antiqua 

ESC(s4141T 1B 28 73 34 31 

34 31 54 

ESC(s4197T 1B 28 73 34 31 

39 37 54 

1000 

1000+ 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C 



Letter Gothic ESC(s4102T 1B 28 73 34 31 

30 32 54 


LinePrinter ESC(s0T 1B 28 73 30 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Marigold ESC(s4297T 1B 28 73 34 32 

39 37 54 


CG Omega ESC(s4113T 1B 28 73 34 31 

31 33 54 


CG Times ESC(s4101T 1B 28 73 34 31 

30 31 54 


Univers ESC(s4148T 1B 28 73 34 31 

34 38 54 


Arial ESC(s16602T 1B 28 73 31 36 

36 30 32 54 


7-55


7-56 



Value 

MS Mincho ESC(s28752T 1B 28 73 32 38 

37 35 32 54 

MS Gothic ESC(s28825T 1B 28 73 32 38 

38 32 35 54 

Times New 

Roman 

ESC(s16901T 1B 28 73 31 36 

39 30 

1000 

1000+ 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C 




SimHei ESC(s37110T 1B 28 73 33 37 

31 31 30 54 


SimSun ESC(s37058T 1B 28 73 33 37 

30 35 38 54 


Symbol ESC(s16686T 1B 28 73 31 36 

36 38 36 54 


Wingdings ESC(s6826T 1B 28 73 36 38 

32 36 54 


Wingdings ESC(s31402T 1B 28 73 33 31 

34 30 32 54 


Font Default 

Font Default Primary Font ESC(3@ 1B 28 33 40 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Underline 

Secondary 

Font 

ESC)3@ 1B 29 33 40 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Underline Enable Fixed ESC&d0D 1B 26 64 30 44 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Enable 

Floating 

ESC&d3D 1B 26 64 33 44 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Disable ESC&d@ 1B 26 64 40 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Text Parsing 1-Byte ESC&t0P 1B 26 74 30 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Method 

1-Byte ESC&t1P 1B 26 74 31 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

1-Byte/2-Byte ESC&t21P 1B 26 74 32 31 

50 


1-Byte/2-Byte ESC&t31P 1B 26 74 33 31 

50 


1-Byte/2-Byte ESC&t38P 

Transparent Print 

1B 26 74 33 38 

50 


Transparent # of Bytes ESC&p#X� 1B 26 70 #...# 58 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Print Data 

[Data] 

FONT MANAGEMENT 

Assign Font ID Font ID # ESC*c#D 1B 2A 63 #...# 

44 


Font and Delete all ESC*c0F 1B 2A 63 30 46 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Character Fonts 

Control 

Delete all 

temporary 

fonts 

ESC*c1F 1B 2A 63 31 46 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Delete last 

font 

ID specified 


Delete last 

character 

specified 


Make font 

temporary 


Make font 

permanent 


Copy/Assign 

the currently 

invoked font 

as temporary 


Soft Symbol Set Management/Creation 

Set Symbol Set ID # ESC*c#R 1B 2A 63 #...# 

52 

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes



Value 

Define Symbol 

Set 

Symbol Set 

Control 

# of Bytes ESC(f#W[DAT 

A] 

Delete all 

symbol sets 

Delete all 

temporary 

symbol sets 

Delete current 

soft symbol 

set 

(last ID#) 

Make current 

soft symbol 

set temporary 

Make current 

soft symbol 

set permanent 

Font Selection by ID number 

Select font 

(with ID #) 


1000 

1000+ 

1B 28 66 #...# 57 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ESC*c0S 1B 2A 63 30 53 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 





ID # primary 

font 

ESC(#X 1B 28 #...# 58 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ID # 

secondary font 

ESC)#X 1B 29 #...# 58 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Soft Font Creation 

Font descriptor # of bytes 

(font header) 

ESC)s#W[Data] 1B 29 73 #...# 57 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Download 

character 

# of bytes ESC(s#W[Data] 1B 28 73 #...# 57 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Character code Character ESC*c#E 1B 2A 63 #...# Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

code 

# (decimal) 

GRAPHICS 

45 

PCL Vector Graphics Switching/Set-Up 

Enter PCL Use previous ESC%0A 1B 25 30 41 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Mode PCL cursor 

position 

Use current 

HP-GL/2 pen 

position for 

cursor 

position 

ESC%1A 1B 25 31 41 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Enter 

HP-GL/2 

Use Previous 

HP-GL/2 pen 

ESC%0B 1B 25 30 42 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Mode position 

Use current 

PCL cursor 

position 


HP-GL/2 Plot Horizontal ESC*c#K 1B 2A 63 #...# Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Horizontal 

Size 

size in inches 

48 

HP-GL/2 Plot 

Vertical Size 

Vertical size in ESC*c#L 

inches 

1B 2A 63 #...# 

4C 


Set Picture Set anchor ESC*c0T 1B 2A 63 30 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Frame Anchor point to cursor 

Point position 

Picture Frame Decipoints ESC*c#X 1B 2A 63 #...# Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Horizontal 

Size 

58 

Picture Frame Decipoints ESC*c#Y 1B 2A 63 #...# Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Vertical Size 

59 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C 

7-57


7-58 



Value 


Raster 

Resolution 

75 dots/inch ESC*t75R 1B 2A 74 37 35 

52 


30 52 


30 52 


30 52 


30 52 


30 52 

1000 

1000+ 




No Yes No Yes Yes 


No Yes No Yes Yes 

Orientation 


Raster Follows ESC*r0F 1B 2A 72 30 46 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Graphics 

Presentation 

orientation 

Follows 

physical page 

ESC*r3F 1B 2A 72 33 46 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Start Raster 

Graphics 

Left Raster 

Graphics 

Margin 

ESC*r0A 1B 2A 72 30 41 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Current 

Cursor 

ESC*r1A 1B 2A 72 31 41 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Scale mode 

(logical left 

page 

boundary) 

ESC*r2A 1B 2A 72 32 41 No No No No Yes 

Scale mode 

(at CAP) 

ESC*r3A 1B 2A 72 33 42 No No No No Yes 

Raster Y 

Offset 

# of Raster 

Lines of 

vertical 

movement 

ESC*b#Y 1B 2A 62 #...# 

59 


Set Raster Unencoded ESC*b0M 1B 2A 62 30 4D Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Compression 

Mode 

Run-Length 

Encoded 

ESC*b1M 1B 2A 62 31 4D Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Tagged Image 

File Format 


Delta Row ESC*b3M 1B 2A 62 33 4D Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Adaptive 

compression 


Replacement 

Delta Row 


Transfer # of Bytes ESC*b#W 1B 2A 62 #...# Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Raster Data by 

row 

[Data] 57 

Transfer # of Bytes ESC*b#V 1B 2A 98 #...# No No No No Yes 

Raster Data 

(by plane) 

[Data] 56 

End Raster Old version ESC*rB 1B 2A 72 42 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Graphics Preferred ESC*rC 1B 2A 72 43 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Raster Height # Raster Rows ESC*r#T 1B 2A 72 #...# Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

(Source) 

54 

Raster Width # Pixels of the ESC*r#S 1B 2A 72 #...# Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

(Source) Specified 

Resolution 

53 

THE PRINT MODEL 

Imaging 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C



Value 

Select Current 

Pattern 

Source 

Transparency 

Mode 

Pattern 

Transparency 

Mode 

Logical 

Operation 

Pixel 

Placement 

Rectangle Dimensions 

Rectangle 

Width 

(Horizontal 

Size) 

Rectangle 

Height 

(Vertical Size) 


Solid Black 

(default) 

ESC*v0T 1B 2A 76 30 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Solid White ESC*v1T 1B 2A 76 31 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

HP-defined 

Shading 

Pattern 


HP-defined 

Cross- 

Hatched 

Pattern 


User defined 

pattern 


Transparent ESC*v0N 1B 2A 76 30 4E Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Opaque ESC*v1N 1B 2A 76 31 4E Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Transparent ESC*v0O 1B 2A 76 30 4F Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Opaque ESC*v1O 1B 2A 76 31 4F Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

# = ROP3 

input value 

Grid 

Intersection 

Pixel 

Placement 

ESC*l#O 1B 2A 6C #...# 

4F 


ESC*v0R 1B 2A 6C 30 52 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

ESC*v1R 1B 2A 76 31 52 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

# of dots ESC*c#A 1B 2A 63 #...# 

41 

# of decipoints ESC*c#H 1B 2A 63 #...# 

48 

# of dots ESC*c#B 1B 2A 63 #...# 

42 

# of decipoints ESC*c#V 1B 2A 63 #...# 

56 

1000 

1000+ 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C 





Rectangular Area Fill 

Fill 

Solid Black ESC*c0P 1B 2A 63 30 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Rectangular 

Area 

Erase (solid 

white fill) 

ESC*c1P 1B 2A 63 31 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Shaded Fill ESC*c2P 1B 2A 63 32 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Cross-hatched ESC*c3P 

Fill 

1B 2A 63 33 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

User-Defined ESC*c4P 1B 2A 63 34 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Current 

Pattern 

ESC*c5P 1B 2A 63 35 50 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Pattern ID % of Shading ESC*c#G 1B 2A 63 #...# Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

or Type of 

Pattern or 

User Pattern 

ID 

47 

Shading 2% Gray ESC*c2G 1B 2A 63 32 47 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

10% Gray ESC*c10G 1B 2A 63 31 30 

47 


15% Gray ESC*c15G 1B 2A 63 31 35 

47 


30% Gray ESC*c30G 1B 2A 63 33 30 

47 


45% Gray ESC*c45G 1B 2A 63 34 35 

47 


70% Gray ESC*c70G 1B 2A 63 37 30 

47 


90% Gray ESC*c90G 1B 2A 63 39 30 

47 


100% Gray ESC*c100G 1B 2A 63 31 30 

30 47 


7-59


7-60 


Function Parameter Command Hexadecimal 1000 1800 6300 9100DN 8000C 

Value 

1000+ 1900 

3800 

6750 

6900 

9500DN 

Pattern 1 Horiz.Line ESC*c1G 1B 2A 63 31 47 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

2 Vert. Lines ESC*c2G 1B 2A 63 32 47 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

3 Diagonal 

Lines 

ESC*c3G 1B 2A 63 33 47 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

4 Diagonal 

Lines 


5 Square Grid ESC*c5G 1B 2A 63 35 47 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

6 Diagonal 

Grid 


USER DEFINED PATTERN / MANAGEMENT CREATION 

User-Defined Delete all ESC*c0Q 1B 2A 63 030 51 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Pattern 

Control 

patterns 

Delete all 

temporary 

patterns 

ESC*c1Q 1B 2A 63 031 51 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Delete current 

pattern 


Make pattern 

temporary 


Make pattern 

permanent 


Set Pattern Rotate with ESC*p0R 1B 2A 70 30 52 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Reference orientation 

Point 

MACROS 

Follow 

physical page 

ESC*p1R 1B 2A 70 31 52 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Macro ID Macro ID # ESC&f#Y 1B 26 66 #...# 59 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Macro Control Start Macro 

Definition 

ESC&f0X 1B 26 66 30 58 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Stop Macro 

Definition 


Execute 

Macro 


Call Macro ESC&f3X 1B 26 66 33 58 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Enable 

Overlay 


Disable 

Overlay 


Delete Macros ESC&f6X 1B 26 66 36 58 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Delete All 

Temp. Macros 


Delete Macro 

ID 


Make 

Temporary 


Make ESC&f10X 1B 26 66 31 30 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Permanent 

Set Status Readback 

58 

Status Invalid ESC*s0T 1B 2A 73 30 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Readback Location 

Location Type 

Currently 

Selected 

ESC*s1T 1B 2A 73 31 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

All Locations ESC*s2T 1B 2A 73 32 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Internal ESC*s3T 1B 2A 73 33 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Downloaded ESC*s4T 1B 2A 73 34 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Cartridge ESC*s5T 1B 2A 73 35 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

User-installed ESC*s7T 

ROM 

(SIMMs) 

1B 2A 73 37 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes



Value 

Set Status 

Readback 

Location Unit 

Inquire Status 

Readback 

Entity 

Flush All 

Pages 

Free Memory 

Space 


All entities of 

the Location 

Type 

ESC*s0U 1B 2A 73 30 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Entity 1 or 

Temporary 


Entity 2 or 

Permanent 


Entity 3 ESC*s3U 1B 2A 73 33 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Entity 4 ESC*s4U 1B 2A 73 34 55 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Font ESC*s0I 1B 2A 73 30 49 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Macro ESC*s1I 1B 2A 73 31 49 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

User-defined 

Pattern 

ESC*s2I 1B 2A 73 32 49 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Symbol Set ESC*s3I 1B 2A 73 33 49 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Font Extended ESC*s4I 1B 2A 73 34 49 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Flush all 

complete 

pages 

ESC&r0F 1B 26 72 30 46 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Flush all page ESC&r1F 

data 

1B 26 72 31 46 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Request free 

memory status 

ESC*s1M 1B 2A 73 31 4D Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Echo # = Echo value 

(–32767 to 

32767) 

PROGRAMMING HINTS 

End-of-Line 

Wrap 

ESC*s#X 1B 2A 73 #...# 

58 

1000 

1000+ 


Enabled ESC&s0C 1B 26 73 30 43 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Disabled ESC&s1C 1B 26 73 31 43 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Display ON ESCY 1B 59 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Functions 

OFF ESCZ 1B 5A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

PCL Vector Graphics Switching/Set-Up Picture Frame 

Enter PCL Use previous ESC%0A 1B 25 30 41 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Mode PCL cursor 

position 

Use current 

HP-GL/2 pen 

position for 

cursor 

position 

ESC%1A 1B 25 31 41 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Enter HP- Use Previous ESC%0B 1B 25 30 42 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

GL/2 Mode HP-GL/2 pen 

position 

Use current 

PCL cursor 

position 


Current PCL 

coordinate 

system/old 

HPGL pen 

position 


Current PCL 

coordinate 

system/curren 

t PCL CAP 


HP-GL/2 Plot Horizontal ESC*c#K 1B 2A 63 #...# Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Horizontal 

Size 

size in inches 

4B 

HP-GL/2 Plot 

Vertical Size 

Vertical size in ESC*c#L 

inches 

1B 2A 63 #...# 

4C 


Set Picture Set anchor ESC*c0T 1B 2A 63 30 54 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 

Frame Anchor point to cursor 

Point position 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C 

7-61


7-62 



Value 

Picture Frame 

Horizontal 

Size 

Picture Frame 

Vertical Size 

Colors 

Assign Color 

Index 

Color 

Component 1 

Color 

Component 2 

Color 

Component 3 

Color Lookup 

Tables 

Configure 

Image Data 

Download 

Dither Matrix 

Foreground 

Color 

Gamma 

Correction 

Monochrome 

Print Model 

Palette 

Control ID 

Palette 

Control 

Push/Pop 

Palette 

Render 

Algorithm 

Decipoints ESC*c#X 1B 2A 63 #...# 

58 

Decipoints ESC*c#Y 1B 2A 63 #...# 

59 

Index Number ESC*v#I 1B 2A 76 #...# 

49 

1st 

Component 

2nd 

Component 

3rd 

Component 

ESC*v#A 1B 2A 76 #...# 

41 

ESC*v#B 1B 2A 76 #...# 

42 

ESC*v#C 1B 2A 76 #...# 

43 

# of Bytes ESC*l#W 1B 2A 6C #...# 

57 

# of Bytes ESC*v#W 1B 2A 76 #...# 

57 

# of Bytes ESC*m#W 1B 2A 76 #...# 

49 

Index Number ESC*v#S 1B 2A 76 #...# 

53 

Gamma 

number 

Mixed 

Rendering 

1000 

1000+ 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C 



No No No No Yes 








ESC*t#I 1B 2A 74 #...# 

49 


ESC&b#M 1B 26 98 30 4D No No No No Yes 

Gray 

Equivalent 

ESC&b#M 1B 26 98 31 4D No No No No Yes 

Palette ID # ESC&p#I 1B 26 70 #...# 49 No No No No Yes 

Delete All 

Palettes in 

store 

ESC&p#C 1B 26 70 30 43 No No No No Yes 

Delete All 

Palettes in 

stack 

ESC*p#C 1B 26 70 31 43 No No No No Yes 

Delete Palette 

(last ID) 

ESC*p#C 1B 26 70 32 43 No No No No Yes 

Copy Palette ESC*p#C 1B 26 70 36 43 No No No No Yes 

Push Palette ESC*p#P 1B 2A 70 30 50 No No No No Yes 

Pop Palette ESC*p#P 1B 2A 70 31 50 No No No No Yes 

Continuous 

tone detail 

ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 30 4A No No No No Yes 

Snap to 

primaries 


Snap 

black/white, 

colors to black 


Device best 

dither 


Error 

diffusion 


Monochrome 

device best 

dither 


Monochrome 

error diffusion 


Cluster 

ordered dither 


Monochrome 

cluster 

ordered 

ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 38 4A No No No No Yes



Value 

User-defined 

dither 

Monochrome 

user-defined 

dither 



ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 31 30 

4A 

Ordered dither ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 31 31 

4A 

Monochrome 

ordered dither 

Noise ordered 

dither 

Monochrome 

noise ordered 

dither 

Continuous 

tone smooth 

Mono, 

continuous 

tone detail 

Mono, 

continuous 

tone smooth 

Continuous 

tone basic 

Mono 

continuous 

tone basic 

ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 31 32 

4A 

ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 31 33 

4A 

ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 31 34 

4A 

ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 31 35 

4A 

ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 31 36 

4A 

ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 31 37 

4A 

ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 31 38 

4A 

ESC*t#J 1B 2A 74 31 39 

4A 

1000 

1000+ 

1800 

1900 

3800 

6300 

6750 

6900 

9100DN 

9500DN 

8000C 











Select Palette Palette ID # ESC&p#S 1B 26 70 #...# 53 No No No No Yes 

Set Viewing # of Bytes ESC*l#W 1B 2A 69 #...# No No No No Yes 

Illuminant 

57 

Simple Color 3-Plane 

Device CMY 

Palette 

ESC*r#U 1B 2A 72 2D 33 

55 


1-Plane K 

palette 

ESC*r#U 1B 2A 72 31 55 No No No No Yes 

3-Plane 

Device RGB 

Palette 

ESC*r#U 1B 2A 72 33 55 No No No No Yes 

Transfer # of Bytes ESC*b#V 1B 2A 98 #...# No No No No Yes 

Raster (Plane) 

56 

a Not supported by HP PCL. 

7-63


7-64 

HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands 

In the command tables below, parameters in brackets are optional. 

Table 7.26. HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands (Sheet 1 of 2) 

Command Mnemonic Parameters 

DUAL CONTEXT EXTENSIONS 

ENTER PCL MODE ESC%#A 0 = Retain previous PCL cursor position 

1 = Use current HP-GL/2 pen position 

RESET ESCE None 

PRIMARY FONT Fl Font_lD 

SECONDARY FONT FN Font_lD 

SCALABLE OR BITMAPPED FONTS SB 

PALETTE EXTENSIONS 

0 = Scalable fonts only 

1 = Bitmapped fonts allowed 

Color Range CR [b_ref_red, w_ref_red, b_ref_grn, 

w_ref_grn, b_ref_blue, w_ref_blue]; 

Number of Pens NP [n]; 

Pen Color Assignment PC [pen [,red, green, blue]]; 

TRANSPARENCY MODE TR 0 = Off (opaque) 

1 = On (transparent) 

SCREENED VECTORS 

VECTOR GROUP 

SV [screen_type[,shading[,index]]] 

ARC ABSOLUTE AA x_center,y_center,sweep_angle 

[,chord_angle]; 

ARC RELATIVE AR x_increment,y_increment,sweep_angle 


ABSOLUTE ARC THREE POINT AT x_inter,y_inter,x_end,y_end 


PLOT ABSOLUTE PA [x,y...[,x,y]]; 

PLOT RELATIVE PR [x,y...[,x,y]]; 

PEN DOWN PD [x,y...[,x,y]]; 

PEN UP PU [x,y...[,x,y]]; 

RELATIVE ARC THREE POINT RT x_incr_inter,y_incr_inter,x_incr_end, 

y_incr-end [,chord_angle]; 

POLYLINE ENCODED 

POLYGON GROUP 

PE [flag[val]coord_pair...[flag[val]coord 

_pair]]; 

BEZIER RELATIVE BR kind, x1_control_pt_increments, 

y1 _control_pt_increments, 

x2 _control_pt increments, 

y2_control_ pt_increments, 

x3_control_pt_increments, 

y3_control_pt_increments, 

[,params ... [,params]]; 

CIRCLE Cl radius [,chord_angle]; 

FILL RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE RA x_coordinate,y_coordinate; 

FILL RECTANGLE RELATIVE RR x_increment,y_increment; 

EDGE RECTANGLE ABSOLUTE EA x_coordinate,y_coordinate; 

EDGE RECTANGLE RELATIVE ER x_increment,y_increment; 

FILL WEDGE WG radius,start_angle, 

sweep_angle [,chord_angle]; 

EDGE WEDGE EW radius,start_angle, 

sweep_angle[,chord_angle]; 

POLYGON MODE PM polygon_definition; 

FILL POLYGON FP 

EDGE POLYGON 

CHARACTER GROUP 

EP 

SELECT STANDARD FONT SS None

Table 7.26. HP-GL/2 Context Printer Commands (Sheet 2 of 2) 

Command Mnemonic Parameters 

SELECT ALTERNATE FONT SA None 

ABSOLUTE DIRECTION Dl [run,rise]; 

RELATIVE DIRECTION DR [run,rise]; 

ABSOLUTE CHARACTER SIZE Sl [width,height]; 

RELATIVE CHARACTER SIZE SR [width,height]; 

CHARACTER SLANT SL [tangent_of_angle]; 

EXTRA SPACE ES [width[,height]] 


STANDARD FONT DEFINITION SD [kind,value...[,kind,value]]; 

ALTERNATE FONT DEFINITION AD [kind,value...[,kind,value]]; 

CHARACTER FILL MODE CF [fill_mode[,edge_pen]]; 

LABEL ORIGIN LO [position];LABEL 

LABEL LB [char...[,char]]lbterm 

DEFINE LABEL TERMINATOR DT [1bterm[,mode]]; 

CHARACTER PLOT CP [spaces,lines]; 

TRANSPARENT DATA TD [mode]; 

DEFINE VARIABLE TEXT PATH 

LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTES GROUP 

DV [path[,line]]; 

LINE TYPE LT [line_type[,pattern_length[,mode]]]; 

LINE ATTRIBUTES LA [kind,value...[,kind,value]]; 

PEN WIDTH PW [width[,pen]]; 

PEN WIDTH UNIT SELECTION WU [type]; 

SELECT PEN SP [pen]; (required, 1 for black or O for white) 

SYMBOL MODE SM [char]; 

FILL TYPE FT [fill_type[,option1 [,option2]]]; 

ANCHOR CORNER AC [x_coordinate,y_coordinate]; 

RASTER FILL DEFINITION RF [index[,width,height,pen_nbr...pen_nbr]]; 

(width and height must be less than 255) 

USER DEFINED LINE TYPE 

CONFIGURATION AND STATUS GROUP 

UL [index[,gap1...gapn]]; 

Advance Full Page PG [n]; 

SCALE SC [x1,x2,y1,y2[,type[,left,bottom]]]; 

or 

[x1,xfactor,y1,yfactor,2]; 

INPUT WINDOW IW [xLL,yLL,xUR,yUR]; 

INPUT P1 AND P2 IP [p1x,p1y[,p2x,p2y]]; 

INPUT RELATIVE P1 AND P2 IR [p1x,p1y[,p2x,p2y]]; 

DEFAULT VALUES DF 

INITIALIZE IN [n]; 

Replot RP [n]; 

ROTATE COORDINATE SYSTEM 

TECHNICAL GRAPHICS EXTENSION 

RO [angle]; 

Begin Plot BP [kind, value...[,kind, value]]; 

Chord Tolerance Mode CT [mode]; 

Download Character DL [charnum [[,up], x, y...[,up],x,y]]; 

Frame Advance FR 

Media Type MT [type]; 

Merge Control MC [mode [, opcod]]; 

Output Error OE 

Output Hardclip Limits OH 

Output Identification OI 

Output P1 and P2 OP 

Output Status OS 

Pixel Placement PP [mode]; 

Plot Size PS [length [,width]]; 

Quality Level QL [quality level] 

7-65


7-66 

PJL Syntax Comparison 

Table 7.27. PJL Syntax Comparison 

Suggested Syntax Rules 

[ ] Items in brackets “[ . . . ]” indicate optional parameters. 

< > 

Special Identifiers 

Identifies a control code character 

Horizontal tab character (ASCII 9). 

Line feed character (ASCII 10). 

Carriage return character (ASCII 13). 

Space character (ASCII 32). 

White space 

Escape character (ASCII 27). 

Form feed character (ASCII 12). 

 

PJL Commands 

Printable characters (ASCII characters 33 through 126) and 

COMMENT @PJL COMMENT [] 

DEFAULT @PJL DEFAULT [LPARM: personality] variable = value [] 

DINQUIRE @PJL DINQUIRE [LPARM: personality] variable [] 

Response @PJL DINQUIRE [LPARM: personality] variable value 

 

ECHO @PJL ECHO [] [] 

Response @PJL ECHO [] 

ENTER @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE = personality[] 

EOJ @PJL EOJ [NAME = job name] [] 

INFO @PJL INFO read only variable [] 

Response @PJL INFO read only variable [1 or more lines of printable characters or 

followed by ] 

INITIALIZE @PJL INITIALIZE [] 

INQUIRE @PJL INQUIRE [LPARM: personality] variable [] 

Response @PJL INQUIRE [LPARM: personality] variable value 

JOB @ PJL JOB [NAME = “job name”] [START 

OPMSG @PJL OPMSG DISPLAY = “message” [] , 

RDYMSG @PJL RDYMSG DISPLAY = “message” [] , 

RESET @PJL RESET [] 

SET @PJL SET [LPARM: personality] variable = value [] , 

STMSG @PJL STMSG DISPLAY = “message” [] , 

Response @PJL STMSG DISPLAY = “message” 

UEL/SPJL %-12345X 

USTATUS @PJL USTATUS variable = value [] , 

Response @PJL USTATUS variable 

[1 or more lines of printable characters or followed by ], 

USTATUSOFF @PJL USTATUSOFF [] 

PJL @PJL []

ISO-15 Italian (0I) 

LaserJet Symbol Sets 

ISO-60 Norway (0D) 


7-67


ECMA-94 Latin 1 (0N) ISO 11 Sweden (0S) 

7-68

ISO-6 ASCII (0U) ISO-4 U. K. (1E) 


7-69


ISO-69 France (1F) ISO-21 Germany (1G) 

7-70

US Legal (1U) ISO Latin 2 (2N) 


7-71


ISO-17 Spain (2S) PC Cyrillic (3R) 

7-72

PS math (5M) ISO Latin 5 (5N) 


7-73


Windows Latin 5 (5T) MS publishing (6J) 

7-74

ISO Latin 6 (6N) Desktop (7J) 


7-75


Greek-8 (8G) Math-8 (8M) 

7-76

Turkish-8 (8T) HP Roman-8 (8U) 


7-77


Windows Latin 2 (9E) Windows Greek (9G) 

7-78

PC-1004 (9J) ISO Latin 9 (9N) 


7-79


Win Cyrillic (9R) PC-Turkish (9T) 

7-80

Windows (9U) PC-851 Greek (10G) 


7-81


PS text (10J) ISO Cyrillic (10N) 

7-82

PC-855 Serbia (10R) PC-869 Greek (11G) 


7-83


PC-8 Greek (12G) Macintosh (12J) 

7-84

ISO Greek (12N) USSR-GOST (12R) 


7-85


ABICOMP Brazil (13P) PC-8 Bulgarian (13R) 

7-86

PC-8 Greek/437G (14G) ABICOMP Int. (14P) 


7-87


PC Ukrainian (14R) Pi font (15U) 

7-88

PC-857 Turkish (16U) PC-852 Latin 2 (17U) 


7-89


ISO-10646 (18N) PC-853 Turkish (18U) 

7-90

Winbalt (19L) Windows Latin 1 (19U) 


7-91


PC-860 Portugal (20U) PC-861 Iceland (21U) 

7-92

PC-863 Canada (23U) PC-8 Polish (24Q) 


7-93


PC-865 Norway (25U) PC-775 (26U) 

7-94

PC-8 PC Nova (27Q) 


7-95


HP 7550A Emulation [KC-GL] (Mode 8) 

7-96 

Basic 

The HP 7550A emulation applies only to the printing systems that handle A3-size paper. 

The printing system emulates the Hewlett-Packard plotter model HP 7550A and uses the 

Kyocera Graphics Language (KC-GL). While it shares features with the HP-GL language, 

it is designed to provide additional features the plotter cannot give. 

KC-GL uses a simple mnemonic graphic language consisting of two-letter instructions. 

Some typical examples are PA for Plot to Absolute coordinates and SP for Select a Pen. 

The KC-GL instructions are summarized at the end of this section. 

To set the KC-GL for power-up emulation, send the printer the following FRPO command: 

!R! FRPO P1, 8; EXIT; 

The SEM (Set EMulation) 8; command temporarily switches the printer to the KC-GL 

emulation. 

In the HP 7550A emulation the user can receive plotting status information from the 

printer via the RS-232C interface. Status information is not available when the parallel 

interface is used. 

This section explains basic information about the KC-GL language. 

KC-GL Instruction Format 

The syntax for KC-GL instructions consists of two letters followed by parameters (if 

any), then a terminator as shown below. 

Optional separator 

(Commas or spaces) 

Not always required 

Required 

separator 

Terminator (A semi-colon or 

line feed, not required if 

instructions continue) 

Some instructions use no parameters. For two or more parameters, they must be separated 

by at least one comma or space. In some cases, a plus (+) or minus (-) sign can be 

used as a separator. A comma or space can also be used as a separator before, after, or 

between instructions, and after a terminator. When a series of instructions is coded, the 

series should be terminated by a semicolon, but no semicolon is required between 

instructions in the series. 

The printing system executes instructions as soon as it receives them. When too many 

instructions are issued, the printing system executes the allowed number of parameters 

and reports error number 2 (wrong number of parameters).

Parameter Formats 


The SM (Symbol Mode) instruction defines the first succeeding character as a symbol 

character. The DT (Define label Terminator) instruction defines the first succeeding 

character as a character plot terminator. 

The character plot terminator is used to terminate the LB (LaBel) instruction. The default 

terminator is the ETX character (End of Text), which uses ASCII code 3. If this terminator 

is inconvenient, the DT instruction enables the user to change the character plot terminator 

to a different character. 

KC-GL parameters are specified in one of the following formats: 

Integer 

When not scaled, integers are valid in the range from –2 23 to 2 23 –1 plotter units. Digits 

to the right of the decimal point are ignored. If no sign is specified, the value is assumed 

to be positive. 

Real number (decimal) 

Real numbers from –2 23 to 2 23 –1 are valid. They can include up to eight digits to the 

right of the decimal point. If no sign is specified, the value is assumed to be positive. 

Scaled real number (scaled decimal) 

Real numbers from –2 23 to 2 23 –1 can be used with up to eight digits to the right of the 

decimal point. If no sign is specified, the value is assumed to be positive. Scaled real 

numbers are used only with scaled user units. All KC-GL parameters that are interpreted 

as user units are scaled. 

Character string 

A combination of characters, numeric expressions, and string variables. 

When coding an instruction with two or more parameters (Examples: PA, PR, PU, PD) 

remember that the parameters must be set apart by a separator. 

KC-GL Environment Options 

The FRPO G0 command establishes various options for the KC-GL environment. The 

following table lists the meanings of the individual bits in the command. Each meaning 

is explained in the following sections according to the bit position. 

Table 7.28. FRPO G0 Command Options 

Bit Position Bit Value Logic Value Description 

0 0 0 Plot coordinate mode A 

1 1 Plot coordinate mode B 

1 0 0 Form feed in response to SP 

2 1 SP 

2 0 0 Automatic plot coordinate transition 

4 1 Fixed plot coordinate 

3 0 0 Normal mode 

8 1 Enhance mode 

7-97


7-98 

Table 7.28. FRPO G0 Command Options 

Bit Position Bit Value Logic Value Description 

4 0 0 Landscape page orientation 

16 1 Page orientation to FRPO C1 

5 0 0 Default cursor at top left 

32 1 Default cursor at bottom left 

Plot Coordinates (bit 0) 

This bit defines one of two plotting coordinate modes. (See Figure 7. 29. on page 98.) 

0 = Mode A 

1 = Mode B 

In mode A, the origin (0, 0) starts at bottom left. In mode B, the origin starts at the center 

of the page. 

Response to SP Instruction (bit 1) 

This bit defines the printing system response to the SP (Select Pen) instruction. 

0 = Printing System feeds out a page when it receives a SP; or SP 0; instruction. 

1 = Printing System returns the pen to the stall from which it came, in other words, it 

prints nothing when it receives a SP; or SP 0; instruction. 

Figure 7. 29. Plot Coordinates 

Mode A (G0, 0;) 

Mode B (G0, 1;) 

Automatic Plot Coordinate Mode (bit 2) 

0 = Printing System changes the plot coordinate from mode A to mode B when it 

receives a IP (Input P1 and P2) instruction using the negative parameter value. 

When the IN 

(INitialize) instruction is later given, the printing system reverts to mode A.

Pen Selection 


1 = Printing System remains in mode A even when the IP instruction includes a negative 

parameter value. 

Enhance Mode (bit 3) 

This bit supports the enhance mode of HP 7550A and HP 758X plotters. 

0 = Normal mode (HP 7550A standard mode and HP 758X emulation mode). 

1 = Enhance mode (HP 7550A enhance mode and HP 758X standard mode). 

The enhance mode should be turned on when the printing system uses the HP 758X 

mode. The enhance mode affects the KC-GL IW (Input Window), OW (Output Window), 

and UC (plot User-defined Character) instructions as follows: 

IW: User units are used for specifying the parameters in scaling. 

OW: Window outputs are made in user units in scaling. 

UC: Values for the pen control, increments in x- and y-coordinates, the width and height 

of characters differ from the normal (non-enhance) mode as follows. 

Pen down Pen up x/y increment Char. width Char. Height 

Normal mode ≥99 ≤ -99 -98 to +98 6 grids 16 grids 

Enhance mode ≥9999 ≤ -9999 -9998 to +9998 48 grids 64 grids 

Page Orientation (bit 4) 

This bit defines page orientation. 

0 = Landscape 

1 = Observes the FRPO C1 value. 

Default Cursor Position (bit 5) 

This bit defines the cursor position for the page at power-up. 

0 = Upper-left corner of the page (X min , Y max ) 

1 = Lower-left corner of the page (X min , Y min ) 

On an actual plotter, pen thickness and color are selected by physically installing pens. 

On the printing system, the pen thickness is established with a PRESCRIBE command, 

or by a simple front-panel operation. 

Format 

!R! FRPO Gn, xx; EXIT; 

Parameters 

n: 

pen number: 

1 = pen 1 

2 = pen 2 

3 = pen 3 

4 = pen 4 

5 = pen 5 

6 = pen 6 

7-99


7-100 

Note 

7 = pen 7 

8 = pen 8 

xx: 

Line-width (in dots): 0 to 99 (0 - line not printed) 

Positions in the plot area can be defined as plotter units or user units. These units are 

explained next. 

Since the pen thickness is measured in the unit of dot, printing an object in the 600-dpi resolution 

will result in the thickness of lines being half that expected in the 300-dpi resolution. 

To avoid this, switch the printing resolution to 300 dpi using the FRPO N8 command 

or, temporarily, using the PRESCRIBE RESL command. Alternatively, if you need to use the 

600-dpi resolution, increase the pen thickness to the double. 

Reducing Data Larger Than A2 Size 

The KC-GL can print the data of paper sizes larger than A2 size reducing it onto a paper 

size specified using the SPSZ command. Reduction of data is achieved by the FRPO J9 

parameter or from the printing system’s control panel. See below. 

Format 

!R! FRPO J9, x; EXIT; 

x: 

data size: 

0 = no reduction 

1 = A2 

2 = A1 

3 = A0 

4 = B3 

5 = B2 

6 = B1 

7 = B0 

Plotter Units and User Units 

Plotter Units 

The plot area is subdivided into a grid with 0.025-mm steps. Each step is a plotter unit: 

the smallest unit of plotting motion. One millimeter corresponds to approximately 40 

plotter units. In the plot area, you can specify positions in plotter units from –2 23 to 

2 23 –1 (in the PA instruction). When using plotter units, only integer values are valid. 

User Units 

The Scale instruction (SC) establishes a system of user units in the plot area by specifying 

the coordinates of two scaling points (P1 and P2). Parameters of the Scale instruction 

can use integer values from –2 23 to 2 23 –1; any digits to the right of the decimal place will 

be ignored. (Plot instructions use the same range of parameter values, but digits to the 

right of the decimal point are valid.) If designating 0, 0 and 1, 1 as scaling points, all data 

will be real numbers between 0 and 1.

Setting the Scaling Points 


At power-up, scaling point P1 will be in the lower left corner of the paper, the default 

plot position. Point P2 is always diagonally opposite to P1. These two points define the 

diagonal of a rectangle, which by default is centered on the paper. P1 and P2 can be 

moved by an instruction which defines any rectangle, independent of the actual paper 

size. 

The default positions of the scaling points in modes A and B are listed at the end of this 

section as Coordinate Values. 

Sample KC-GL Program 

The following file draws circles according to the KC-GL instructions. The result appears 

in Figure 7. 30. on page 102. 

IN; “Initialize plotter” 

IP0,0,400,400; “P1 and P2: 1-cm square 1 ” 

SC0,1,0,1; “Scale: user unit = 1 cm” 

DT ; 

SP1; “Select pen 1” 

PA10,19; “Move pen” 

CI.1;PR0,-.1; “Draw four circles” 

CI.2;PR0,-.2; 

CI.4;PR0,-.4; 

CI.8;PR0,-.8; 


CI1.6;PR0,-1.6; “Draw two circles” 

CI3.2;PR0,-3.2; 


CI.1;PR.5,-.5; “Draw circle” 


CS0;SI.2,.3;LBCURSOR* ; "Print label 2 ” 

SP; 

1 This instruction locates P1 at 0, 0 and P2 at 400, 400 in plotter units. 400 plotter units=1 cm (0.025 mm x 400). 

2 ETX (End of Text, character code 03) is required as a terminator. 

7-101


7-102 

Figure 7. 30. KC-GL Sample Program 

Plotter Status Information 

When the RS-232C interface is used, in addition to receiving data, the plotter (printing 

system) can return information such as the current pen position, pen status, and error 

numbers. This return information applies to the following KC-GL instructions. 

Instruction Description 

OA Output Actual position and pen status 

OC Output Commanded position and pen status 

OE Output Error 

OF Output Factors 

OH Output Hard-clip limits 

OI Output Identification 

OL Output Label length 

OO Output Options 

OP Output P1 and P2 

OS Output Status 

OT Output carousel Type 

OW Output Window 

All of these instructions use the same syntax and must be followed immediately by a terminator. 

They use no parameters. 

The functions of these instructions appear on the following pages. The last ASCII character 

sent by the plotter (printing system) in response to the instruction is a terminator, 

which will be designated here by the symbol TERM. The terminator is actually a carriage 

return unless changed by the ESC.M operator.

OA [Output Actual position and pen status] 


The plotter returns the x- and y-coordinates of the current pen position and indicates 

whether the pen is currently up or down. This information is given by ASCII-coded integers 

in the following format: 

X, Y, P TERM 

X: x-coordinate in absolute plotter units 

Y: y-coordinate in absolute plotter units 

P: 0 if the pen is up; 1 if the pen is down 

OC [Output Commanded position and pen status] 

OE [Output Error] 

OF [Output Factors] 

The plotter returns the x- and y-coordinates and pen status for the last valid pen positioning 

instruction. The pen position and status are ASCII-coded in the same way as the OA 

instruction. Coordinate values are given in plotter units if scaling is off, or user units if 

scaling is on. 

The plotter returns a decimal error number for the instruction executed immediately 

before the OE instruction. The error code is converted to a non-negative ASCII-coded 

integer whose identity is given in the following table. 

Error Number Description 

0 No error 

1 Instruction not recognized 

2 Wrong number of parameters 

3 Illegal parameter 

4 (Reserved) 

5 Unknown character set 

6 Plot position overflow 

7 (Reserved) 

This instruction returns the number of plotter units per millimeter on each coordinate 

axis, as follows: 

40, 40 TERM 

This response indicates that plotter units are equal to 0.025 mm on both the x- and yaxes. 

The actual number of plotter units per millimeter is approximately 40. 

OH [Output Hard-clip limits] 

This instruction returns the lower left and upper right limiting coordinates of the plot 

area, in the following format: 

XLL, YLL, XUR, YUR TERM 

LL: lower left 

UR: upper right 

7-103


7-104 

OI [Output Identification] 

This instruction returns a character string indicating the plotter model being emulated, as 

follows: 

KC-GL option Plotter model 

(FRPO G0) 

Mode A 7550A TERM 

Mode B 7596A TERM 

OL [Output Label length] 

This instruction returns information on the contents of the label buffer. This may be used 

together with the BL instruction for accessing the necessary space for the buffered label 

before printing it. 

OO [Output Options] 

length, characters, linefeeds, TERM 

length The length of the longest line in the buffered label in character plot cell spaces. 

characters An integer representing the number of printing characters and spaces in the 

longest line of the buffered label. A backspace is counted as –1, whereas a 

character with automatic backspace counts as zero. 

linefeeds An integer representing the net number of linefeeds that will occur when the 

buffered label is drawn. An inversed line feed (VT) counts as –1, and a linefeed 

(LF) counts as +1. 

This instruction returns eight ASCII-coded integers separated by commas. The integers 

indicate plotter options supported by the printing system, as follows: 

OP [Output P1 and P2] 

This instruction returns the coordinate values of the current scaling points P1 and P2. 

The coordinates are given in plotter units by ASCII-coded integers, as follows: 

P1x, P1y, P2x, P2y TERM 

Buffer allocation 

Polygon instruction 

Arc and circle plotting instructions are supported. 

Pen selection is supported. 

Pen is not down until the paper feeding completes 

in auto-feed mode.

OS [Output Status] 


This instruction returns an integer from 0 to 255 giving one byte of status information, as 

follows: 

status TERM 

The following table describes the individual bits in the status byte. After powered up or 

an IN instruction, bit positions 3 and 4 turn on making the bit value to be 24. Bit position 

3 is cleared subsequently after delivering the status. 

Bit Position Bit Value Description 

0 1 The pen is down. 

1 2 P1 or P2 has been changed. This bit is cleared when actual P1 and 

P2 values are read via the RS-232C interface, or when the IN 

instruction is executed. 

2 4 A digitized point is ready for output. This bit is cleared when the 

point is output via the RS-232C interface, or when the IN instruction 

is executed. 

3 8 Initialized. This bit is cleared when a status byte is output via the 

RS-232C interface, or when the IN instruction is executed. 

4 16 Ready to receive next data. 

5 32 Error. This bit is cleared when an error number is output via the RS- 

232C interface, or when the IN instruction is executed. 

6 64 SRQ was set. 

7 128 (Reserved) 

OT [Output carousel Type] 

This instruction delivers information on the current carousel type and stall occupancy. 

This may be used to determine those information in a remote location. 

Response: 

OT TERM 

type, map TERM 

The current carousel type and its pen map are delivered as 2 ASCII integers, each separated 

by comma. The type field can contain the values –1 through 4, which have the following 

values: 

Bit value when stall is occupied Pen stall 

1 1 

2 2 

4 3 

8 4 

16 5 

32 6 

64 7 

128 8 

7-105


7-106 

OW [Output Window] 

This instruction returns the x- and y-coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of 

the current plottable area. Four ASCII-coded integers indicating the lower left and upper 

right corner coordinates are returned by using the following format: 

XLL, YLL, XUR, YUR, TERM 

LL: lower left 

UR: upper right 

Device-Control Instructions 

KC-GL uses device-control instructions to return buffer status information and other status 

information from the printing system via the RS-232C interface. Status information 

cannot be output on the parallel interface. If device-control instructions are received via 

the parallel interface, they are ignored. 

The device-control instructions for status output appear below. 

Output Buffer Space (ESC.B) 

This instruction returns 0 if the receive buffer is full, and 1024 if the receive buffer is 

empty. 

Output Extended Error (ESC.E) 

This instruction normally returns 0, if an error has not occurred, and returns 15 if a framing 

error, parity error, or overrun error has occurred. 

Output Buffer Size Label (ESC.L) 

This instruction always returns the value 1024. 

Output Extended Status (ESC.O) 

This instruction returns printing system status information regarding: 

• On-line status 

• Cover open 

• Paper empty 

• Paper jam 

• Buffer full 

The following table describes this status information.The paper feed source is the internal 

cassette at all time. A complete list of device-control instructions appear in Device- 

Control Instructions on page 113. 

Table 7.31. Status Information 

Response Description 

1 The buffer is full. 

9 The buffer is empty (normal). 

17 The buffer is full and the printing system is off-line.

Table 7.31. Status Information 

Fonts and Symbol Sets in KC-GL 


Response Description 

25 The buffer is empty and the printing system is off-line. 

33 The buffer is full with the printing system under one of the following conditions: 

cover open, paper empty, or paper jam. 

41 The buffer is empty with the printing system under one of the following conditions: 

cover open, paper empty, or paper jam. 

KC-GL uses a special stroke font. The fonts employed in the other emulations cannot be 

used in KC-GL. The default height and width of the stroke font vary depending on the 

paper size. The following character sets are available for the KC-GL emulation. 

Table 7.32. KC-GL Fonts and Symbol Sets 

No. Symbol Set ISO No. 

0/10 ANSI ASCII 006 

1/11 HP 9825 Character Set – 

2/12 French/German – 

3/13 Scandinavian – 

4/14 Spanish/Latin American – 

6/16 JIS ASCII 014 

7/17 Roman Extensions – 

8/18 Katakana 013 

9/19 ISO IRV (International Reference Version) 002 

30/40 ISO Swedish 010 

31/41 ISO Swedish For Names 011 

32/42 ISO Norwegian Version 1 060 

33/43 ISO German 021 

34/44 ISO French 025 

35/45 ISO United Kingdom 004 

36/46 ISO Italian 015 

37/47 ISO Spanish 017 

38/48 ISO Portuguese 016 

39/49 ISO Norwegian Version 2 061 

7-107


Roman Extensions (7) 

KC-GL Symbol Sets 

7-108 

ANSI ASCII (0)

Katakana (8) KC-GL International Characters 


7-109


7-110 

KC-GL Limits 

This section provides limit values for the various KC-GL parameters. Plotter units are 

used unless otherwise specified. 

Standard Character Sizes 

Table 7.33. Standard Character Sizes 

Paper size Width (mm) Height (mm) 

A4 0.187 0.269 

A3 0.285 0.375 

Letter 0.187 0.269 

Ledger 0.285 0.375 

Maximum Plot Area 

Table 7.34. Maximum Plot Area 

Paper size X Y 

Plotter units Dots Plotter units Dots 

A4 11477 3389 7999 2362 

A3 16398 4842 11487 3392 

Letter 10776 3182 8236 2432 

Ledger 16872 4982 10776 3182 

Coordinate Values 

Table 7.35. Coordinate Values, Mode A, RO 0 

Paper size P1x P1y P2x P2y 

A4 430, 200 10430, 7400 

A3 380, 430 15580, 10430 

Letter 80, 320 10080, 7520 

Ledger 620, 80 15820, 10080 

Table 7.36. Coordinate Values, Mode A, RO 90 


A4 200, 430 7400, 10430 

A3 430, 380 10430, 15580 

Letter 320, 80 7520, 10080 

Ledger 80, 620 10080, 15820 

Table 7.37. Coordinate Values, Mode B, RO 0 


A4 –4700, –2480 4700, 2480 

A3 –6680, –4700 6680, 4700 

Letter –4348, –2598 4348, 2598 

Ledger –6916, –4348 6916, 4348

Coordinate Values, Mode B, RO 90 


A4 –2480, –4700 2480, 4700 

A3 –4700, –6680 4700, 6680 

Letter –2598, –4348 2598, 4348 

Ledger –4348, –6916 4348, 6916 

Summary of KC-GL Instructions 


The table below lists KC-GL instructions supported by the printing system. The following 

legend is used: 

[c] Character string 

[d] decimal (-128.0000 to +127.9999) 

[i] integer (-32768 to +32767) 

[sd] scaled decimal (-32768.0000 to +32767.9999) 

Table 7.38. KC-GL Instructions (Sheet 1 of 2) 

Instruction Parameters Description 

AA x-coordinate [i/sd], y-coordinate [i/sd], 

center-angle [i] (, resolution [i]) 

Arc absolute 

AF – Advance page 

AH – Advance page 

AR Δx [i/sd], Δy [i/sd], arc-angle [i] (, resolution [i]) Arc relative 

BL character-string [c] terminator Buffer label 

CA character-set-no. [i] Designate alternate character set 

CI radius [i/sd] (, resolution [i]) Circle 

CP horizontal-character-count [d], 

vertical-character-count [d] 

Character plot 

CS character-set-no. [i] Designate standard character set 

CT – Chord tolerance for AA, AR, CI 

DF – Default 

DI run [d], rise [d] Absolute direction 

DR run [d], rise [d] Relative direction 

DT terminator [c] Define label terminator 

EA x-coordinate [i/sd], y-coordinate [i/sd] Edge rectangle absolute 

EP – Edge polygon for PM, RA, RR, WG 

ER Δx [i/sd], Δy [i/sd] Edge rectangle relative 

ES character-space [d](, line- space [d]) Extra space for NCP 

EW radius [i/sd], start-angle [i], 

center-angle [i] (, resolution [i]) 

Edge wedge 

FP – Fill polygon for PM, RA, RR, WG 

FT type [i] (,spacing [sd] (,angle [i])) Fill type 

IM E-mask-value [i] (, S-mask-value [i] (,P-maskvalue 

[i])) 

Input mask 

IN – Initialize 

IP P1x [i], P1y [i] (, P2x [i], P2y [i]) Input P1 and P2 

IW XLL [i/sd], YLL [i/sd], XUR [i/sd], YUR [i/sd], Input window 

LB character-string [c] Label 

LO position-number [i] Label origin 

LT pattern-no. [i] (, pattern-length [d]) Line type 

OA – Output actual position and pen 

status* 

7-111


7-112 

E-Mask Bit Values 

Table 7.38. KC-GL Instructions (Sheet 2 of 2) 


OC – Output commanded position and pen 

status* 

OE – Output error* 

OF – Output factors* 

OH – Output hard-clip limits* 

OI – Output identification* 

OL – Output label length 

OO – Output options* 

OP – Output P1 and P2* 

OS – Output status byte* 

OT – Output carousel type 

OW – Output window* 

PA x1-coordinate [i/sd], y1-coordinate [i/sd] (,x2coordinate 

[i/sd], y2-coordinate [i/sd], ..., xncoordinate 

[i/sd], yn- coordinate [i/sd]) 

Plot absolute 

PB – Print buffered label 

PD x1-coordinate [i/sd], y1-coordinate [i/sd] 

(, ... xn-coordinate [i/sd], yn-coordinate [i/sd]) 

Pen down 

PM – Polygon mode 

PR Δx1 [i/sd], Δy1 [i/sd] (,Δx2 [i/sd], Δy2 [i/sd], ..., Plot relative 

xn-coordinate [i/sd], yn-coordinate [i/sd]) 

PS paper-size [i] Select paper size 

PT pen-thickness [d] Pen thickness 

PU x1-coordinate [i/sd], y1-coordinate [i/sd] 

(, ... xn-coordinate [i/sd], yn-coordinate [i/sd]) 

Pen up 

RA x-coordinate [i/sd], y-coordinate [i/sd] Fill rectangle absolute 

RO angle-in-degrees [i] Rotate coordinate system 

RR Δx [i/sd], Δy [i/sd] Fill rectangle relative 

SA – Select alternate character set 

SC Xmin [i], Xmax [i], Ymin [i], Ymax [i], Scale 

SI character-width [d], character-height [d] Absolute character size 

SL tanθ [d] Character slant 

SM character [c] Symbol mode 

SP pen-number [i] Select pen 

SR character-width [d], character-height [d] Relative character size 

SS – Select standard character set 

TL tick-length-in-positive-direction [d] 

(, tick-length-in-negative-direction [d]) 

Tick length 

UC (pen-control [i],) Δx [i], Δy (,...) 

(, pen-control [i]) (,...,) 

Plot user-defined character 

WG radius [i/sd], start-angle [i], center-angle [i] 

(, resolution [i]) 

Plot filled wedge 

XT – X-tick 

YT – Y-tick 

The IM instruction sets an E-mask that controls how errors are reported on the RS-232C 

interface. The E-mask value is the sum of the bit values in the following table. 

Table 7.39. E-Mask Bit Values 

Bit Error No. Description 

1 0 1 Command not recognized 

2 1 2 Wrong number of parameters

Table 7.39. E-Mask Bit Values 

Bit Error No. Description 

4 2 3 Illegal parameter 

8 3 4 Unknown character 

16 4 5 Unknown character set 

32 5 6 Plot position overflow 

64 6 7 – 

128 7 8 – 

S-Mask/P-Mask Values 

Table 7.40. S-Mask/P-Mask Values 

S-Mask/P-Mask Values Bit Value Description 

1 0 Pen down 

2 1 Changed P1 or P2 

4 2 Valid digitizing point 

8 3 Initialized 

16 4 Ready 

32 5 Error 

64 6 – 

128 7 – 

Device-Control Instructions 

Table 7.41. Device-Control Instructions 



ESC.( – Plotter ONa ESC.Y – Plotter ON 

a Ignored 

a 

ESC.) – Plotter OFFa ESC.Z – Plotter OFFa ESC.@ [();()]; Plotter configurationa ESC.B – Output buffer space 

ESC.E – Output extended error 

ESC.H [();(); 

(); (;...)] 

Select handshaking mode 1a ESC.I [();(); 

(); (;...)] 

Select handshaking mode 2a ESC.J – Ignore device-control instructionsa ESC.K – Ignore plot instructionsa ESC.L – Output buffer size 

ESC.M [();(); Select output mode (output trigger character, echo 

(); 

();(); 

()] 

terminator, output terminator) 

ESC.N [();(); 

(;...)] 

Select extended output and handshaking mode 1a ESC.O – Output extended status 

ESC.R – Reset handshakinga 7-113


7-114 

Default States (DF) 

Table 7.42. Default States (DF) 

Initial Conditions (IN) 

Function Equivalent Instruction Default Value 

Plotting mode PA; Absolute (plotter units) 

Polygon mode PM0; PM2; Empty polygon 

Line type LT; Solid line 

Line pattern length LTn,4; 4% of distance between P1 and P2 

Scaling SC; Off (plotter units used for x- and y-coordinates) 

Input window IW; Set to hard-clip limits 

Circle and arc resolution – 5 degrees 

Symbol mode SM; Off 

Tick length TL; x-axis: 0.5 % of | P2y - P1y | 

y-axis: 0.5% of | P2x - P1x | 

Mask value IM233,0,0; All errors recognized, but no response to service request 

or parallel port. 

Fill type FT; Type 1 (bidirectional fill) 

Fill spacing FT; 1% of distance between P1 and P2 (used only in fill types 

3 and 4) 

Fill angle FT; 0 degrees 

Pen thickness PT; 0.3 mm (fill spacing for fill types 1 and 2) 

Label origin – Current pen position 

Relative direction DR1,0; Horizontal characters 

Relative size SR; Character width: 0.75% of | P2x - P1x | 

Character height: 1.5% of | P2y - P1y | 

Character space ES 0, 0; None 

Character slant SL; 0 degrees 

Label buffer BL ETX; None 

Label terminator DT ETX; ETX (ASCII code 3) 

Label origin LO; Position number 

Character set SS; Standard character set 

Standard character set CS0; Character set 0 

Code tolerance CT; Angle mode of AA, AR, CI, or WG 

Alternate character set CA0; Character set 0 

Table 7.43. Initial Conditions (IN) 

Function Equivalent instruction Initial condition 

Default conditions DF; Default values 

Scaling points IP; Initialized according to paper size 

Coordinate system rotation RO; 0 degrees (default setting)

KPDL Operators 


This section describes the machine-independent part of KPDL, Kyocera’s implementation 

of the PostScript command language. KPDL deployed in the printing system encompasses 

the features of LanguageLevel 3 of the PostScript command language. 

The KPDL operators described in this section can be used for confirming and changing 

the printing system’s internal settings. Most of the operators in this section are paired: 

one operator for setting an environmental parameter, and another operator for confirming 

the setting. The setting operator starts with the letters set. The confirmation operator has 

the same name, but without the initial set. 

Communication with the Printing System 

The operations described below are performed by sending KPDL operators to the printing 

system in the KPDL mode. KPDL operators can be sent either by file transfer, or 

interactively using communications software. This section explains both methods. As an 

example, it uses the KPDL operator that sets the printing system to print a simple graphics 

sample as shown in Figure 7. 44. on page 116. 

Example: 

Operators to draw a text and an enclosing box. Note that, in KPDL mode, unit for distances 

is 1 / 72 inches. 

!R! SEM 9; EXIT; % Enter KPDL mode 

%! 

3 setlinewidth % Set line width to 3 

30 30 moveto % Move to (30 30) 

0 60 rlineto % Draw line 60 above 

225 0 rlineto % Draw line 225 to the right 

0 -60 rlineto % Draw line 60 below 

closepath % Close the above path 

gsave % Save current graphics state 

0.6 setgray % Set gray level to 0.6 

fill % Fill the path with gray 

grestore % Restore saved graphics state 

0 setgray % Set gray level to 0 

stroke % Stroke the path 

1 setgray % Set gray level to solid black 

/Helvetica-Nr 30 selectfont % Select and scale to 30 points 

50 50 moveto % Move to (100 100) 

(Have a nice day!) show % Print the string 

showpage % Print the above on page 

^D % End of job (control-D) 

The initial SEM 9; ensures that the printing system is in the KPDL mode. If the printing 

system is already in the KPDL mode, SEM 9; is ignored. The percent signs (%) and the 

words to the right are comments. Comments are included only to explain the operators, 

and can be omitted when typing operators. 

Try using one of the methods explained on the following page to enable delivery of the 

result of the above example. The print result appears as shown in Figure 7. 44. on page 

116. 

7-115


7-116 

File transfer 

Figure 7. 44. Sample Printout 

One way to transfer a file is to place all lines above in a file and transfer the file to the 

printing system. The basic requirements are: 

• Except for SEM 9; and EXIT; (which can be in either uppercase or lowercase letters), 

all operators must be typed in lowercase letters, exactly as shown. 

• The file must not contain any extraneous control codes, as are frequently added by 

word-processing software. 

• The file must be sent as a file, not printed. If you print the file, you will only obtain 

printed output. 

KPDL Summary 

This section lists all KPDL operators, their operands, and their results. 

When received from the computer, operators and operands are placed in an area in the 

printing system’s memory called the stack. In the operator table, each operator is preceded 

by its list of operands (if any). These operands must be placed onto the stack prior 

to the operator itself. Each operator is followed by a list of its results (if any). The results 

returned by the operator are also placed onto the stack. 

For example, the add operator is listed as follows: 

num1 num2 add sum add num1 and num2 

The action of this operator is to remove the two numbers that precede it from the top of 

the stack, add them, and put their sum onto the stack. 

If an operator does not require any preceding operands or does not place any result on the 

stack, the corresponding column in the table is blank. 

The following abbreviations (and a few others) are used for operands: 

ang angle (specified in degrees) 

bool boolean: the value true or false 

dict dictionary 

int integer 

num number (integer or real) 

obj object (any object) 

pattern pattern dictionary 

proc procedure 

tag tag 

userpath array of path construction operators and their operands

Note 


Certain operators are hyphenated in the following tables because of the editorial limitation 

only. These operators must not be hyphenated to be executed. 

KPDL Page Description Operators 

The following table summarizes the page description operators including all language 

levels of KPDL. In the following table, operators having the higher language level are 

indicated by 2 (level 2) or 3 (level 3) 

. 

Table 7.45. KPDL Page Description Operators (Sheet 1 of 11) 

Preceding stack Operator Result Description 

obj = 

=print 

=string 

Write object to standard output 

obj == Write object to standard output 

with syntax markings 

2 > dict Create a dictionary containing 

...keyn valuen 

the specified key-value pair 

[ mark Push mark on stack 

mark obj0...obj (n-1) ] array End array starting at topmost 

mark 

num1 abs num2 Get absolute value of num1 

num1 num2 add sum Add num1 and num2 

array aload a0...a(n-1) array Load array elements into stack, 

below array 

string target anchorsearch tail target true or Test whether target is initial 

string false substring of string 

int/bool1 int/bool2 and int/bool3 Bitwise or logical AND 

x y r ang1 ang2 arc Create counterclockwise arc 

x y r ang1 ang2 arcn Create clockwise arc 

x1 y1 x2 y2 r 2 arct Create line ending in arc 

x1 y1 x2 y2 r arcto xt1 yt1 xt2 yt2 Create line ending in arc; return 

arc coordinates 

int array array Create array of null objects 

ax ay string ashow Print string with adjusted 

character spacing 

obj0...obj (n-1) array astore array Pop elements from stack into 

array 

num den atan angle Get arctangent of num/den in 

degrees 

cx cy chr ax ay string awidthshow Print string with ashow and 

widthshow effects 

dict begin Push dict on dictionary stack 

proc bind proc Replace operator names in proc 

by values 

int1 count bitshift int2 Shift int1 bitwise by count 

(positive is left) 

file bytesavailable int Get number of bytes left to read 

in file 

cachestatus bsize bmax 

msize mmax 

csize cmax 

blimit 

Get font cache information 

num1 ceiling num2 Find least integer not less than 

num1 

string bool charpath Create character outline 

clear Clear entire stack 

cleardictstack Clear dictionary stack 

7-117


7-118 



mark obj1...objn cleartomark Clear stack down through mark 

clip Create new clipping path 

clippath Set current path as clipping path 

3 cliprestore Restore stored clipping path 

3 clipsave Copy and save the current 

clipping path 

file closefile Close file 

width height bits/comp 

matrix datasrc0 ... 

datasrcn-1 multi 

ncomp 

closepath Connect subpath to starting 

point 

colorimage Paint a sample image 

key name array 3 composefont font Refers CIF font specified in the 

key string array 

second CMap object or array 

and compose CIF font 

key dict array 

dictionary 

matrix concat Multiply current transform 

matrix by given matrix 

matrix1 matrix2 

matrix3 

concatmatrix matrix3 Replace matrix3 with matrix1 x 

matrix2 

obj1...objn n copy obj1...objn Duplicate top n objects on stack 

dict1 dict2 copy dict2 Copy dict1 to dict2 

array1 array2 copy subarray2 Copy array1 to initial subarray 

of array2 

string1 string2 copy substring2 Copy string1 to initial substring 

of string2 

gstate1 gstate2 copy Copy gstate1 to gstate2 

copypage Print and retain current page 

angle cos real Find cosine of angle (degrees) 

count n Count objects on stack 

countdictstack int Count objects on dictionary 

stack 

countexecstack int Count objects on execution 

stack 

mark obj1...objn counttomark mark obj1... obj n Count objects on stack down to 

mark 

proc string 2 cshow Show characters changing the 

font mapping algorithm 

2 currentblackgeneration proc Return the black generation 

function 

2 currentcacheparams mark size lower 

upper 

Return font cache parameters 

2 currentcmykcolor cyan magenta Return the current color 

yellow black according to the cyan-magentayellow-black 

color space 

2 currentcolor comp1 comp2 ... Return the components of the 

comp n 

color 

2 currentcolorrendering dict Return the value of the CIE 

based color rendering 

dictionary 

2 currentcolorscreen redfreq 

Return the current halftone 

redang redproc 

greenfreq greenang 

greenproc bluefreq 

blueang blueproc 

grayfreq grayang 

grayproc 

screen parameters 

2 currentcolorspace array Return the color space 

2 currentcolortransfer redproc greenproc Return the current transfer 

blueproc grayproc functions 

currentdash array offset Get current dash pattern 

string 2 currentdevparams dict Return all parameters for device




currentdict dict Push current dictionary on oper- 

and stack 

currentfile file Get file currently being 

executed 

currentflat num Get current flatness tolerance 

currentfont font Get current font dictionary 

2 currentglobal bool Return the VM allocation mode 

currently in effect 

currentgray num Get current gray level 

gstate 2 currentgstate gstate Copy the current graphics state 

2 currenthalftone halftone Return the current halftone 

dictionary 

currenthsbcolor hue sat brt Get current hue, saturation, and 

brightness 

currentlinecap int Get current line end type 

currentlinejoin int Get current corner type 

currentlinewidth num Get current line width 

matrix currentmatrix matrix Replace matrix with current 

transform matrix 

currentmiterlimit num Get current miter length limit 

2 currentobjectformat int Return the object format 

parameter currently in effect 

2 currentoverprint bool Return the value of the overprint 

parameter 

2 currentpacking bool Return the current array packing 

mode 

2 currentpagedevice dict Return a device parameter on 

the current page 

currentpoint x y Get coordinates of current point 

currentrgbcolor red green blue Get current red/green/blue 

levels 

currentscreen freq angle proc Get current halftone screen 

currentshared Return the current stroke adjust 

parameter 

3 currentsmoothness num Returns the current arc 

smoothness 

2 currentstrokeadjust bool Return the current stroke adjust 

parameter 

2 currentsystemparams dict Return current values of all 

system parameters 

currenttransfer proc Get current gray transfer 

function 

2 currentundercolorremoval proc Return the under color removal 

function 

2 currentuser params dict Return current values of all user 

parameters 

x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 curveto Create Bézier cubic curve from 

current point to (x3, y3) 

num/string cvi int Convert number or string to 

integer 

obj cvlit obj Convert object to literal 

string cvn name Convert string to name 

num/string cvr real Convert number or string to real 

num radix string cvrs substring Convert number to 

representation in radix 

obj string cvs substring Convert object to substring of 

string 

obj cvx obj Convert object to executable 

object 

key value def Place key and value in current 

dictionary 

7-119


7-120 



matrix defaultmatrix matrix Replace matrix with device 

default matrix 

key font definefont font Define font as a font dictionary 

associated with key 

key instance category 2 defineresource instance Define a resource in a specified 

category 

index any 2 defineuserobject Establish an user object 

filename 2 deletefile Remove the specified file 

int dict dict Create dictionary with capacity 

for int entries 

array dictstack subarray Copy dictionary stack to array 

num1 num2 div quotient Divide num1 by num2 

dx dy dtransform dx’ dy’ Transform distance from user to 

device space 

dx dy matrix dtransform dx’ dy’ Transform distance by matrix 

obj dup obj obj Duplicate top object on stack 

bool echo Turn interactive echoing on/off 

end Pop dictionary stack 

eoclip Clip using even-odd rule 

eofill Fill using even-odd rule 

any1 any2 eq bool Pop two objects from the stack 

and pushes the boolean value 

true if they are equal, false if not 

erasepage Erase the current page 

obj1 obj2 exch obj2 obj1 Exchange top two objects on 

stack 

obj exec Execute preceding object 

form 2 execform Paint a form 

array execstack subarray Copy execution stack into array 

index 2 execuserobject Execute the user object 

array/file/string executeonly array/file/string Enable execution access only 

exit Exit innermost loop 

base exponent exp real Raise base to exponent 

false false Push boolean value false on 

stack 

string1 string2 file file Open file named string1 in 

string2 access mode 

template proc scratch 2 filenameforall Enumerate all files whose 

names match 

file 2 fileposition position Return the current position in a 

file 

fill Fill current path with current 

color 

src|tgt 

2 filter 

param1...paramn name 

file Create a filtered file 

name 

string 

3 findcolorrendering name bool Find the color rendering 

resource as spcified by 

argument 

key 2 findencoding array Obtain an encoding vector 

key findfont font Get a font dictionary identified 

by key 

key category 2 findresource instance Obtain a named resource 

instance in a specified category 

flattenpath Convert curves to piecewise 

linear segments 

num1 floor num2 Find greatest integer not 

exceeding num1 

flush Send data in buffer to standard 

output 

file flushfile Send data in buffer to output 

file, or read and discard rest of 

input file




FontDirectory dict Push directory of font 

dictionaries on stack 

init incr limit proc for Execute proc for init to limit in 

steps of incr 

array proc forall Do proc for each array element 

dict proc forall Do proc for each element of dict 

string proc forall Do proc for each element of 

string 

any 2 gcheck bool Return residence mode of any 

num/string1 

num/string2 

ge bool Test whether num/string1 is 

greater than or equal to 

num/string2 

array index get obj Get array element at index 

location 

dict key get obj Get value associated with key in 

dictionary 

string index get int Get string element at index 

location 

string index count getinterval substring Get substring. Index and count 

are starting location and length 

of substring 

array index count getinterval subarray Get subarray. Index and count 

are starting element and length 

of subarray 

2 globaldict dict Create a new dictionary object 

2 GlobalFontDirectory dict Push a dictionary of defined 

font 

name 2 glyphshow Show a single character 

grestore Restore saved graphics state 

grestoreall Restore to bottommost graphics 

state 

gsave Save graphics state 

2 gstate gstate Create a new graphics state 

object 

num/string1 

num/string2 

gt bool Test whether num/string1 > 

num/string2 

matrix identmatrix matrix Replace matrix with identity 

transform 

int1 int2 idiv quotient Divide int1 by int2; integer 

quotient 

dx’ dy’ idtransform dx dy Transform distance from device 

to user space 

dx’ dy’ matrix idtransform dx dy Transform distance by inverse 

of matrix 

bool proc if Do proc if bool is true 

bool proc1 proc2 ifelse Do proc1 if bool is true; 

otherwise do proc2 

dict image Print bit-mapped image 

wd ht bits matrix proc image 

dict imagemask Print binary mask 

wd ht invt matrix proc imagemask 

objn...obj0 n index objn...obj0 objn Copy n-th object to top of stack 

x y userpath 2 ineofill 

ineofill 

x y userpath 2 infill 

infill 

bool Test the current path on the 

evenodd rule for insideness 

bool Test the current path for 

insideness 

initclip Initialize clipping path 

initgraphics Reset graphics state parameters 

initmatrix Initialize current transfer matrix 

x y userpath 2 instroke 

bool Test pixels in the current path 

instroke 

for insideness 

7-121


7-122 



x y userpath 

userpath1 userpath2 

x y userpath 


2 inueofill 

inueofill 

2 inufill 

inufill 

bool Test the user path on the evenodd 

rule for insideness 

bool Test the user path for insideness 

x y userpath 2 inustroke 

x y userpath matrix inustroke 

userpath1 userpath2 inustroke 

bool Test pixels in the user path for 


matrix 

inustroke 

insideness 

matrix1 matrix2 invertmatrix matrix2 Replace matrix2 with inverse of 

matrix1 

2 ISOLatin1Encoding array Push the ISO Latin-1 encoding 

vector 

x’ y’ itransform x y Transform coordinates from 

device to user space 

x’ y’ matrix itransform x y Transform coordinates by 

inverse of matrix 

dict key known bool Test whether key is in dictionary 

proc string kshow Print string, executing proc 

between characters 

2 languagelevel int Return the language level 

num/string1 le bool Test whether num/string1 is less 

num/string2 

than or equal to num/string2 

array length int Get number of elements in array 

dict length int Get number of key-value pairs 

in dict 

string length int Get length of string 

name length int Get length of name 

x y lineto Create line from current point to 

(x, y) 

num ln real Get natural logarithm 

key load value Search dictionary stack for key 

and return value 

num log real Get logarithm 

proc loop Do proc until exit is 

encountered 

num/string1 lt bool Test whether num/string1 < 

num/string2 

num/string2 

font matrix makefont font’ Generate new font by matrix 

transformation 

dict matrix 2 makepattern pattern Create an instance from a 

prototype pattern 

mark mark Push mark on stack 

matrix matrix Create identity matrix 

dict maxlength int Get capacity of dict 

int1 int2 mod remainder Find int1 module int2 (integers) 

x y moveto Move current point to (x, y) 

num1 num2 mul product Multiply num1 by num2 

obj1 obj2 ne bool Test whether obj1 is not equal to 

obj2 

num1 neg num2 Get negative of num1 

newpath Initialize current path to null 

path 

array/dict/file/string noaccess array/dict/file/strin 

g 

Disable all access 

int/bool1 not int/bool2 Bitwise or logical not 

null null Push null on operand stack 

nulldevice Install no-output device 

int/bool1 int/bool2 or int/bool3 Bitwise or logical OR 

obj0...objn-1 n 2 packedarray packedarray Create a packed array




pathbbox llx lly urx ury Get bounding box of current 

path 

move line curve close pathforall Do named procedures for 

current path elements 

obj pop Discard top object on stack 

string print Write string to standard output 

obj tag 2 printobject Write a binary object sequence 

to the standard output 

2 product string Get product name 

prompt Prompt for interactive input 

pstack Write entire stack to standard 

out put 

array index object put Insert object int array at index 

location 

dict key value put Place key and value in 

dictionary 

string index int put Replace character in string at 

index location 

array1 index array2 putinterval Replace subarray of array1 

starting at index by array2 

string1 index string2 putinterval Replace substring of string1 

starting at index by string2 

quit Terminate KPDL interpreter 

rand int Generate pseudo-random 

integer 

array/dict/file/string rcheck bool Test if object is read-accessible 

dx1 dy1 dx2 dy2 dx3 

dy3 

rcurveto Create Bézier cubic curve to 

relative point 

file read int true or false Read one character from file; 

return false if end of file 

file string readhexstring substring bool Read hexadecimal characters 

from file into string 

file string readline substring bool Read line from file into string; 

return true if filled 

array/dict/file/string readonly array/dict/file/ 

string 

Enable read access only 

file string readstring substring bool Convert file of hexadecimal 

character codes into character 

string; return true if string is 

filled 

2 realtime int Return the real time clock value 

x y width height 

numarray/numstring 


numarray/numstring 


x y width height matrix 

numarray 

numarray matrix 

numstring 

numstring matrix 

2 rectclip 

rectclip 

2 rectfill 

rectfill 

2 rectstroke 

rectstroke 

rectstroke 

rectstroke 

rectstroke 

rectstroke 

Clip with a rectangular path 

Fill with a rectangular path 

Stroke with a rectangular path 

old new 2 renamefile Change the name of a file 

int proc repeat Do proc int times 

file resetfile Clear buffer for file 

template proc scratch 2 resourceforall Enumerate all instances of a 

category 

specified resource category 

key category 2 resourcestatus status size Return status information about 

true (false) a named resource instance 

save restore Restore saved virtual memory 

reversepath Reverse direction of current 

path printing system’s software 

2 revision int Get product revision 

7-123


7-124 



dx dy rlineto Create line from current point to 

relative point 

dx dy rmoveto Move current point by relative 

amount 

ob(n-1)...ob0 n i roll ob(i-1)..ob0 

ob(n01)..obi 

Roll top n objects on stack by i 

(mod n) 

2 rootfont font Return a root composite 

dictionary 

angle matrix rotate matrix Rotate matrix transformation by 

angle (degrees) 

angle rotate Rotate user space by angle 

(degrees) 

num1 round num2 Round off num1 to nearest 

integer 

rrand int Get random number seed 

string run Execute file 

save save Save virtual memory 

sx sy matrix scale matrix Define scaling matrix 

sx sy scale Scale user space 

font scale scalefont font’ Generate new font by scaling 

old font 

any 2 scheck bool Same as gcheck 

string target search post match head 

true or string false 

Search for target substring in 

string 

key scale 2 selectfont Select a font and establish the 

font dictionary 

2 serialnumber int Return the serial number to 

represent the machine 

llx lly urx ury 2 setbbox Establish a bounding box for the 

current path 

proc 2 setblackgeneration Set the black generation 

function parameter 

wx wy llx lly urx ury setcachedevice Declare width and bounds of 

cached character 

w0x w0y llx lly urx 

ury w1x w1y vx vy 

2 setcachedevice2 Declare width and bounds of 


num setcachelimit Declare maximum byte size of 


mark size lower upper 2 setcacheparams Set the font cache parameters 

wx wy setcharwidth Declare width and bounds of 

uncached character 

cyan magenta yellow 

black 

comp1 comp2 ... comp 

n 

2 setcmykcolor Set the color space to Device 

CMYK 

2 setcolor Set the current color parameter 

dict 2 setcolorrendering Establish a CIE-based color 

rendering dictionary 

redfreq redang redproc 

greenfreq greenang 

greenproc bluefreq 

blueang blueproc 

grayfreq grayang 

grayproc 

2 setcolorscreen Set the halftone parameter 

array (name) 2 setcolorspace Specify a color space 

redproc greenproc 

blueproc grayproc 

2 setcolortransfer Set the transfer function 

parameter 

array offset setdash Set dash pattern for lines 

string dict 2 setdevparams Set parameters for I/O device 

file position 2 setfileposition Reposition a file 

num setflat Set flatness tolerance 

(smoothness of curves) 

font setfont Set current font dictionary




bool 2 setglobal Set the VM allocation mode 

num setgray Set gray level from 0 (black) to 

1 (white) 

gstate 2 setgstate Replace the current graphics 

state 

halftone 2 sethalftone Establish a halftone dictionary 

hue sat brt sethsbcolor Set hue, saturation, and 

brightness 

(converted to gray) 

int setlinecap Set butt (0), round (1), or square 

(2) line ends 

int setlinejoin Set miter (0), round (1), or bevel 

(2) corner type 

num setlinewidth Set line width 

matrix setmatrix Replace current transform 

matrix with given matrix 

num setmiterlimit Set miter length limit 

int 2 setobjectformat Establish the number 

representation 

bool 2 setoverprint Set the overprint parameter 

bool 2 setpacking Set the array packing mode 

dict 2 setpagedevice Install a page output device. 

Parameters for this operator is 

fully detailed in KPDL Page 

Device Parameters on page 

135. 

pattern 2 setpattern Establish the specified pattern 

as the current color 

red green blue setrgbcolor Set red/green/blue levels 

(converted to gray level) 

freq angle proc setscreen Set halftone screen 

bool 2 setshared Same as setglobal 

num 3 setsmoothness Set the smoothness to num 

bool 2 setstrokeadjust Set the stroke adjust parameter 

dict 2 setsystemparams Set the system parameters for 

interpreter 

proc settransfer Set mapping from user gray 

scale to device gray scale 

mark blimit 2 setucacheparams Set user path cache parameters 

proc 2 setundercolor removal Set the under color removal 

function parameter 

dict 2 setuserparams Set user parameters for each 

context 

int 2 setvmthreshold Set the allocation threshold used 

to trigger garbage collector 

2 shareddict dict Same as globaldict 

2 SharedFontDirectory dict Same as GlobalFontDirectory 

dict 3 shfill Fill the current clipping path 

with the shading defined by 

shading dictionary 

string show Print string on page 

showpage Print and reset current page 

angle sin real Find sin of angle (in degrees) 

num sqrt real Find square root of number 

int srand Set random number seed 

stack Write entire stack to standard 

output as text 

StandardEncoding array Push standard character 

code/name array on stack 

start Make KPDL interpreter ready 

bool passwd 2 startjob bool Start a new job with condition 

file status bool Test if file is open 

7-125


7-126 



statusdict dict Push statusdict on operand stack 

stop Terminate procedure executed 

by stopped operator 

obj stopped bool Execute object. Return true if 

stop operator is executed in 

object, false if object completes 

normally 

key value store Replace topmost definition of 

key 

int string string Create string of length int 

string stringwidth wx wy Get width of string in current 

font 

stroke Draw line along current path 

strokepath Compute outline of path 

num1 num2 sub difference Subtract num2 from num1 

systemdict dict Push systemdict on operand 

stack 

file token token true or false Read and interpret token in file; 

return false if file is empty 

string token tail token true or 

false 

Read and interpret token in 

string return false if string is 

empty 

x y transform x’ y’ Transform coordinates from 

user to device space 

x y matrix transform x’ y’ Transform coordinates by 

matrix 

tx ty translate Translate user space 

tx ty matrix translate matrix Define translation matrix 

true true Push boolean value true on 

stack 

num1 truncate num2 Discard fraction part of num1 

obj type name Get name identifying type of 

object 

userpath 2 uappend Append the user path to the 

current path 

2 ucache Declare to cache the user path 

2 ucachestatus mark bsize bmax 

rsize rmax blimit 

Return user path cache 

parameters 

userpath 2 ueofill Fill a user path using the 

evenodd rule 

userpath 2 ufill Interprets a user path to fill 

dict key 2 undef Remove key and value from 

dictionary 

key 2 undefinefont Remove a font definition 

key category 2 undefineresource Remove the named resource 

index 2 undefineuserobject Undefine an user object 

bool 2 upath userpath Create a user path equivalent to 

the current path 

userdict dict Push userdict on operand stack 

2 UserObjects array Return the current user object 

array 

2 usertime int Return time in milliseconds 

userpath 

userpath matrix 

userpath 

userpath matrix 

2 ustroke 

2 ustroke 

Draw a line along a user path 

2 ustrokepath 

2 ustrokepath 

Compute outline of a user path 

version string Return version of KPDL 

interpreter 

int 2 vmreclaim Control the garbage collector



KPDL Status Operators 

vmstatus level used 

maximum 


Return virtual memory status: 

current save nesting depth, 

bytes used, and maximum byte 

size 

array/dict/file/string wcheck bool Test if object is write-accessible 

key where dict true or false Find dictionary in which key is 

defined 

cx cy char string widthshow Print string with adjusted 

spacing for specified character 

file int write Write one character to file 

file string writehexstring Convert string into file of 

hexadecimal character codes 

file obj tag 2 writeobject Write a binary object sequence 

to file 

file string writestring Write string characters to file 

obj xcheck bool Test if object is executable 

int/bool1 int/bool2 xor int/bool3 Bitwise or logical exclusive OR 

string numarray 2 xshow Print characters with x 

displacement 

string numarray 2 xyshow Print characters with x/y 

displacements 

string numarray 2 yshow Print characters with y 

displacement 

The operations in the table below can be used when the status dictionary is open. Some 

also require a password. 

Table 7.46. KPDL Status Operators (Sheet 1 of 5) 


buildtime int Identify the build of the interpreter 

byteorder bool Get the native order in binary encoded tokens 

(true: low-order byte first, false: high-order 

byte first) 

int (string) checkpassword bool Check printing system’ s password (true: valid 

password, false: invalid password) 

defaulttimeouts job manual wait Get timeout values 

diskonline bool Check disk online (true: disk unit online, false: 

disk unit offline) 

diskstatus free total Report total disk space and free space 

dostartpage bool See whether printing system is set to print 

status page at power-up (true: output status, 

false: do not output) 

dosysstart bool See whether Sys/Start file is executed at 

power-up (true: execute Sys/Start, false: do 

nothing) 

pages action initializedisk Format all writable disks 

jobname string Get current job name 

jobtimeout int Get number of seconds to job timeout (0: 

never) 

manualfeed bool Test whether printing system is in manual-feed 

mode (true: manual feed on, false: manual feed 

off) 

manualfeedtimeout int Get manual-feed time-out value 

margins top left Get top and left calibration margins 

newsheet Feed out the single side printed page in duplex 

mode 

pagecount int Get number of pages printed so far 

(nonresettable) 

7-127


7-128 



pagestackorder bool Get current stack tray 

(true: face down, false: face up) 

papersize name bool Get current paper size and orientation 

string printername substring Get printing system name 

product string Get printing system type 

ramsize int Check available RAM size 

realformat string Get native representation for real numbers in 

binary tokens 

revision int Get KPDL revision number 

[integer ... integer] setcollatorstacker Set sorter to collator mode 

job manual wait setdefaulttimeouts Set timeout values. 

bool setdoprinterrors Set error-printing mode (true: print errors, 

false: do nothing) 

int setdoret Set KIR level 

bool setdostartpage Select whether to print status page at power-up 

(true: output power-on status, false: do not 

output) 

bool setdosysstart Set Sys/Start file reading mode at power-up 

(true: execute Sys/Start, false: do nothing) 

int setjobtimeout Set time-out value of current job 

[integer ... integer ] setmailboxstacker Set sorter to mailbox mode 

top left setmargins Set top and left calibration margins 

int setmultirayid Set mail box identifier 

bool setpagestackorder Set stack tray 

(true: face down, false: face up) 

old new setpassword bool Set printing system’ s password 

string setprintername Assign string as printing system name 

[integer ... integer] setsorterstacker Set sorter to sorting mode 

int setuserdiskpercent Adjust disk size for use with KPDL 

waittimeout int Get wait time-out value 

a3 Set imageable area to A3 size. See KPDL 

Printable Area on page 140. This operator is in 

userdict. 

b4 Set imageable area to B4 size. See KPDL 


userdict. 


Printable Area. This operator is in userdict. 

a4small Set imageable area to small A4 size. See KPDL 


userdict. 



userdict. 

dlenvelope 

(110 x 220 envelope) 

Set imageable area to International DL size. 

See KPDL Printable Area on page 140. This 

operator is in userdict. 

11x17 Set imageable area to 11 x 17 (Ledger) size. 



legal Set imageable area to legal size. See KPDL 


userdict. 

letter Set imageable area to letter size. See KPDL 


userdict. 

lettersmall Set imageable area to small letter size. See 

KPDL Printable Area on page 140. This 


executivepage Set imageable area to executive size. See 


operator is in userdict.



com10envelope 

(4.125 x 9.5 envelope) 

monarcenvelope 

(3.875 x 7.5 envelope) 


Set imageable area to Commercial 10 

envelope size. See KPDL Printable Area on 

page 140. This operator is in userdict. 

Set imageable area to Monarch envelope size. 



com6envelope Set imageable area to Commercial 6 envelope 

size. See KPDL Printable Area on page 140. 

This operator is in userdict. 

com9envelope 

(3.75 x 8.875 envelope) 

Set imageable area to Commercial 9 envelope 

size. See KPDL Printable Area on page 140. 

This operator is in userdict. 



userdict. 



userdict. 



userdict. 

b5envelope Set imageable area to ISO B5 size. See KPDL 


userdict. 

c4envelope Set imageable area to c4 envelope size. See 



c5envelope Set imageable area to International C5 

envelope size. See KPDL Printable Area on 

page 140. This operator is in userdict. 

custom Set imageable area to custom size. See KPDL 


userdict. 

postcard Set imageable area to postcard size. See KPDL 


userdict. 

doublepostcard Set imageable area to double postcard size. See 



bool setdefaultduplexmode Select whether or not to print in duplex mode 

as default. (true: duplex, false: simplex) 

defaultduplexmode bool Get default duplex mode setting (true: duplex, 

false: simplex) 

bool setduplexmode Set/cancel duplex mode. (true: duplex, false: 

simplex) 

duplexmode bool Get current setting of duplex mode. (true: 

duplex, false: simplex) 

bool setdefaulttumble Set duplex printing tumble mode for binding 

on short side (true) or long side (false) of page. 

defaulttumble bool Get the default tumble mode setting. (true: 

short-edge bind, false: long-edge bind) 

bool settumble Set tumble mode. (true: short-edge bind, false: 

long-edge bind) 

tumble bool Get current tumble mode setting. (true: shortedge 

bind, false: long-edge bind) 

firstside bool During duplex printing, returns whether the 

current print side is the front or back. During 

simplex printing, returns whether the current 

page is even or odd. (true: front or odd page, 

false: back or even page) 

int setdefaultpapertray Set the default paper tray as: 

0: tray 1 

1: tray 2 

2: envelope feeder 

3: MP tray (Cassette mode) 

4: tray 3 

5: tray 4 

6: tray 5 

7: tray 6 

7-129


7-130 



defaultpapertray int Get current default paper tray. 

int setpapertray Set current paper tray. 

papertray int Get current paper tray. 

int setpapertray2 Select a tray by converting the tray number that 

is currently specified by the PRESCRIBE tray 

number into a KPDL tray number. 

papertray2 int Convert the current tray number into a 

PRESCRIBE tray number. 

PRESCRIBE tray numbers 

0: MP tray 

1: tray 1 

2: tray 1 

3: tray 1 

4: tray 1 

5: tray 1 

6: tray 1 

99: EF-1/UF-1 

bool setdefaulttrayswitch Set the default paper tray switch. 

(true: Autocass, false: Autocass off) 

defaulttrayswitch bool Get default paper tray switch. 


bool settrayswitch Set the current paper tray switch. 


trayswitch bool Get the current paper tray switch. 


a4tray Find tray containing A4 size paper, select it as 

current tray, and set imageable area for A4 size 

paper. 



paper. 



paper. 

b5tray Find tray containing B5 size paper, select it as 

current tray, and set imageable area for B5 size 

paper. 



paper. 

legaltray Find tray containing legal size paper, select it 

as current tray, and set imageable area for legal 

size paper. 

lettertray Find tray containing letter size paper, select it 

as current tray, and set imageable area for letter 

size paper. 

executivetray Find tray containing executive size paper, 

select it as current tray, and set imageable area 

for executive size paper. 

c4envelopetray Find tray containing International C4 

envelopes, select it as current tray, and set 

imageable area for International C4 

envelopes. 

c5envelopetray Find tray containing International C5 


imageable area for International C5 

envelopes. 

com10envelope-tray Find tray containing commercial #10 


imageable area for commercial #10 envelopes. 



imageable area for commercial #6 envelopes. 



imageable area for commercial #9 envelopes.




dlenvelopetray Find tray containing DL size envelopes, select 

it as current tray, and set imageable area for DL 

size envelopes. 

monarcenvelopetray Find tray containing Monarch size envelopes, 

select it as current tray, and set imageable area 

for Monarch size envelopes. 



paper. 



paper. 

ledgertray Find tray containing ledger size paper, select it 

as current tray, and set imageable area for 

ledger size paper. 

b5envelopetray Find tray containing ISO B5 size paper, select 

it as current tray, and set imageable area for 

ISO B5 size paper. 

doublepostcardtray Find tray containing double postcard size 

paper, select it as current tray and set 

imageable area for double postcard size paper. 

postcardtray Find tray containing postcard size paper, select 


postcard size paper. 

customtray Find tray containing custom size paper, select 


custom size paper. 

int setdefaultoutputtray Set the default output tray: 

0: Upper tray (face down tray) 

1: Lower tray (face up tray) 

2: Option tray (sorter, etc.) 

defaultoutputtray int Get the default output tray. 

int setoutputtray Set the current output tray. 

outputtray int Get the current output tray. 

appletalktype string Get string object designating type of printing 

system’ s AppleTalk name according to the 

AppleTalk Name Binding Protocol. 

doprinterrors bool Get setting of error information printout mode. 

(true: error print mode on, false: error print 

mode off) 

bool setdoautocontinue Set whether to display messages on front panel 

and wait for ONLINE key input when an error 

occurs. (true: do nothing, false: display error 

messages) 

doautocontinue bool Get setting of doautocontinue mode. (true: 

continue processing during errors, false: halt 

processing when ON LINE key is pressed) 

dojamrecovery bool Get setting of dojamrecovery mode. (true: 

perform jam recovery, false: do not perform 

jam recovery) 

usertime int Get time elapsed since beginning of job 

processing. 

#copies int Get integer objected indicating current 

number of copies setting. This operator is in 

userdict. 

7-131


7-132 

KPDL System Parameters 

The following table summarizes the system parameters. 

Table 7.47. KPDL System Parameters (Sheet 1 of 2) 

Preceding stack Parameter Result Description 

BuildTime int Timestamp for printer’s date of manufacture 

ByteOrder bool Byte order of binary encoded tokens. (true: loworder 

byte first, false: high-order byte first) 

CurDisplayList a int Indicate in bytes the memory block size used for 

storing DisplayList for the current page. 

CurFontCache a int Indicate in bytes the memory size used by the current 

font cache. 

CurFormCache a int Indicate in bytes the memory size used by the current 

form cache. 

CurOutlineCache a int Indicate in bytes the cache size used by 

CharString on the current harddisk. 

CurPatternCache a int Indicate in bytes the memory size used by the current 

pattern cache. 

CurScreenStorage a int Indicate in bytes the memory size used by the current 

screen. 

CurSourceList a int Indicate in bytes the host buffer size used by the 

current input device. 

CurUPathCache a int Indicate in bytes the memory size used by the current 

user path cache. 

DoAutoContinue bool Turn on/off the front panel display when a KPDL 

error occurs (true: error display off, false: error 

display on). 

DoPrintErrors bool Turn on/off error printing when a KPDL error 

occurs. (true: error print on, false: error print off) 

DoStartPage bool Indicate whether or not to print status at power on as 

a bool object. (true: print status, false: do not print 

status) 

FactoryDefaults bool Indicate with a boolean object whether to initialize 

the following parameters at power on (true: 

initialize, false: do not initialize [factory default]). 

SystemParamsPassword 

StartJobPassword 

FactoryDefaults 

MaxFontCache 

MaxDisplayList 

MaxScreenStorage 

MaxUPathCache 

MaxPatternCache 

MaxOutlineCache 

MaxFormCache 

FontResourceDir 

GenericResourceDir 

GenericResourcePathSep 

FontResourceDir string Identify the font resource directory on the harddisk. 

Defaults are in (fonts/). 

GenericResourceDir string Identify the directory for resources other than fonts 

on the harddisk. Defaults are in (Resource/). 

GenericResource- 

PathSep 

string Specify the separator character used between 

resource identifiers on the harddisk. Defaults are in 

(/). 

JobTimeout int Indicate the default job timeout value. 

MaxDisplayList int Indicate the maximum storage of DisplayList for the 

current page. 

MaxFontCache int Indicate the maximum storage of the font cache. 

MaxFormCache int Indicate the maximum storage of the form cache. 

MaxOutlineCache int Indicate the maximum storage of the CharString 

cache on the disk. 

MaxPatternCache int Indicate the maximum storage of the pattern cache. 

MaxScreenStorage int Indicate in bytes the maximum storage of the halftone 

screen usable by the screen.

Table 7.47. KPDL System Parameters (Sheet 2 of 2) 


a Read only 


MaxSourceList int Indicate in bytes the maximum storage of the host 

buffer used by the current input device. 

MaxUPathCache int Indicate in bytes the maximum storage which can be 

used by the user path cache. 

PageCount int Indicate the total number of printed pages since the 

printer’s manufacture. 

Password int, string Indicate the password necessary when changing 

system parameters and/or device parameters. 

PrinterName string Indicate the name given to the printer. 

RamSize int Indicate in bytes the total RAM capacity currently 

in the printer. 

RealFormat string Indicate the method of representing the numeric 

values of binary tokens. 

Revision int Indicate the interpreter’s revision number. 

StartJobPassword int, string Indicate the password for ExitServer and StartJob. 

StartupMode int Indicate by numeric value whether to execute the 

(Sys/Start) file on the harddisk when first booting 

KPDL after power on. (0: default, 1: use Sys/Start) 

SystemParams- 

Password 

int, string Indicate the password for changing system 

parameters. 

WaitTimeout Indicate the default wait timeout value. 

MaxImageBuffer int Limit the working area for processing a single 

image. 

MaxStoredFontCache int Limit the maximum font cache value stored on the 

disk. 

CurStoredFontCache int Return in bytes the font cache value found on the 

current disk 

7-133


7-134 

KPDL User Parameters 

The following table summarizes the user parameters. The user parameters establish temporary 

policies on functions such as naming the current job for a user. 

Table 7.48. KPDL User Parameters 


AccurateScreens bool Turn on/off the accurate mode flag for the setscreen 

operator. (true: detail screen on, false: default) 

JobName string Return the name of the job currently being processed 

by the printer. 

JobTimeout int Return the current job timeout value. 

MaxDictStack int Indicate the maximum size of the dictionary stack. 

MaxExecStack int Indicate the maximum size of the execution stack. 

MaxFontItem int Indicate the maximum number of bytes used by a 

pixel array for a single character in the font cache. 

MaxFormItem int Indicate the maximum number of bytes used by the 

form of a single cached form. 

MaxLocalVM int Indicate the maximum number of bytes of the local 

VM. 

MaxOpStack int Indicate the maximum size of the operand stack. 

MaxPatternItem int Indicate the maximum number of bytes used by the 

form of a single cached pattern. 

MaxScreenItem int Indicate the maximum number of bytes used by a 

single half-tone screen. 

MaxUPathItem int Indicate the maximum number of bytes used by a 

single cached user path. 

MinFontCompress int Indicate the threshold value for storing characters in 

the font cache not as complete pixel arrays but in 

compressed form. 

VMReclaim int Indicate the automatic garbage collection mode. 

VMThreshold int Indicate the threshold at which automatic garbage 

collection is executed once this number of bytes has 

been allocated after garbage collection. 

WaitTimeout int Return the current wait timeout value.

KPDL Page Device Parameters 


The page device parameters for setpagedevice allow manipulating the output devices to 

receive or provide various finishing operations on the printed outputs. For example, the 

OutputType parameter allows to choose paper stack as follows: 

To receive the output pages in the default printer stack: 

setpagedevice 

To receive the output pages in the finisher for stapling: 

setpagedevice 

Table 7.49. KPDL Page Device Parameters (Sheet 1 of 3) 

Preceding Stack Parameter Result Description 

BeginPage array Indicate BeginPage procedure operations. This 

parameter is called together with the number of 

times showpage has executed since the beginning of 

the page. (default: {pop}) 

Duplex bool Return as a boolean object the current duplex mode. 

(true: duplex, false: simplex) 

EndPage array Indicate EndPage procedure operations. This 

parameter is called together with the number of 

times showpage has executed since the end of the 

page. (default: {exch pop 2 ne}) 

ExitJamRecovery bool Return as a boolean value whether to perform 

recovery when a paper jam occurs. (Read only) 

[true] 

HWResolution array Indicate the resolution of the physical device. 

(300dpi: [300 300], 600dpi: [600 600], 1200dpi: 

[1200 1200]) 

ImagingBBox array Specify any bounding box for the entire page. 

(default: null) 

InputAttributes dict Indicate the dictionary associated with a currently 

available input device (paper tray) using the number 

assigned to each. 

Install array Execute the procedure for installing values during 

graphics mode when calling the setpagedevice 

operator. 

ManualFeed bool Set whether to perform manual feed. (true: MF on) 

ManualFeedTimeout int Return the manual feed timeout. (Read only) [0] 

Margins array Set the printer margins. (default: [0 0]) 

MediaColor string Use this parameter along with /PageSize, 

/MediaWeight, and /MediaType when the user 

selects a tray. 

MediaType stringa Use this parameter along with /PageSize, 

/MediaWeight, and /MediaColor when the user 

selects a tray. For details on media type, see footnote 

below. 

MediaWeight int Use this parameter along with /PageSize, 

/MediaType, and /MediaColor when the user selects 

a tray. 

NumCopies int Set the current copy count. 

Normally null; when null is specified here, #copies 

in userdict takes precedence. 

OutputAttributes dict Indicate the dictionary containing media output 

entries available for the current output device 

(printer output tray, sorter, etc.). 

OutputFaceUp bool Set the printer’s output stack. 

(true: face up, false: face down) 

OutputType string Indicate parameters set by the user when selecting 

the output stack. See example below. 

PageSize array Use this parameter along with /MediaColor, 

/MediaWeight, and /MediaType when the user 

selects a tray. Refer to KPDL Printable Area on page 

140 (Ex: [612 792] LETTER, [595 842] A4). 

7-135


7-136 



Policies dict Execute the policies function. This is checked when 

the device cannot satisfy the user-specified 

setpagedevice. 

PostRendering-Enhance bool Turn on/off KIR mode. (true: KIR on, false: KIR off) 

PostRendering-EnhanceDetails dict Set the dictionary representing the KIR mode when 

PostRenderingEnhance is true. 

SorterDetailsb dict Set the dictionary object for current sorter status 

information. 

TraySwitch bool Set the current auto cassette (mode status) using a 

boolean value. 


Tumble bool Set the current tumble mode using a boolean value. 

(true: shortedge, false: longedge) 

DeferredMedia-Selection bool Define using a boolean object the processing when 

the page size selected during page setup differs from 

the paper size of the tray. 

(true: display cassette error) 

ProcessColorModel name Return the engine type as a name object. 

/Device Gray: Monochrome 

/Device CMY: Three colors 

/Device CMYK: Four colors 

MediaPosition int Set the tray corresponding to the specified number 

as the current tray. 

OutputPage bool Set whether to output paper. 

(true: default, false: no output paper) 

Collate bool Turn on/off the collate function. 

(true: electric collate on (only when harddisk is 

installed)) 

CollateDetails dict Control the detailed parameters of the collate 

function. See CollateDetails Parameters on page 

138. 

Fold int Fold booklet pages. (DF-75 finisher) 

0: Do not fold 

3: Fold 

FoldDetails dict Control the detailed parameters of folding. See 

FoldMode and FoldCount below. 

FoldMode int 1: Fold/staple booklet pages 

FoldCopy int Control the number of pages to be folded. 

0: Do not fold the pages whose number exceeds 

the maximum 

-1: Fold the rest of the pages whose number 

exceeds the maximum 

2: Fold every two pages 

3: Fold every three pages 

... 

10: Fold every ten pages 

Jog int Jog the output every n pages as given by the integer 

code. 

0: Do not jog 

3: Jog using the given jog offset (only when 

optional stacker is installed) 

Staple int Staple the output every n pages as given by the 

integer code. 

0: Do not staple 

3: Staple when job is finished 

StapleDetailsc dict Control the detailed parameters of the staple 

function. 

EconoMode bool Control Econoprint mode. 

true: Econoprint on 

false: Econoprint off 

Punchd int Punch output pages. (DF-71/DF-75) 

0: Do not punch 

3: Punch when a set of job is printed. 

PunchDetails dict Controls the detailed parameters of the punch. 

See/PunchMode below.




PunchMode int Punch using sub style. (DF-71) 

1: Native style of punching 

2: Sub style 

SlipSheet int Insert transparency separator. 

0: No separator 

3: Insert a separator when a set of job is printed. 

SlipSheetDetails dict Control the detailed parameters of punching. See 

CopyMode below. 

CopyMode int Print on transparency separator. 

1: Do not print on separator 

2: Print on separator 

PreRenderingEnhance bool Control resolution enhancement. 

When /HWResolution is set to 600 dpi. 

true: Fast 1200dpi 

false: 600dpi 

DeviceRenderingVividInfo dict Model FS-5900C only. Control vivid color mode. 

Ex: >> setpagedevice 

bool (true: Vivid mode on, false: Vivid mode off) 

DeviceRenderingRGBInfo dict Controls RGB emulation. 

Ex: > >> setpagedevice 

name 

/sRGB 

>> setpagedevice 

RGB emulation is not performed. 

DeviceRenderingCMYKInfo dict Controls ink simulation. 

Ex: > >> setpagedevice 

name 

/SWOP 

/EURO 

/Normal: Normal ink simulation 


Does not perform ink simulation. 

a Available media type strings are as follows: 

(Plain) 

(Transparency) 

(Preprinted) 

(Labels) 

(Bond) 

(Recycled) 

(Vellum) 

(Rough) 

(Letterhead) 

(Color) 

(Prepunched) 

(Envelope) 

(Card Stock) 

(CoatedPaper) 

(Duplex) 

(Custom Type1) 








7-137


7-138 

b SorterDetails can specify tray arrangement and sorter operation mode as the following example: 

>> 

setpagedevice 

Tray arrangement array of [1 2] specifies tray 1 and tray 2 to be used. If tray numbers are omitted ([ 

]), all trays are used. Sorter mode string of (SORTER) specifes sorter mode. Other options include 

(COLLATOR) and (MAILBOX). 

c A typical StapleDetails sequence is as follows. To staple each 20 pages at position 3 on the page: 

>> 

setpagedevice 

d To punch in sub style, use the following example: 


CollateDetails Parameters 

CollateDetails has the following parameters as tabled below according to the key of 

operations. By making /Collate true, CollateDetails enables the printing system to 

implement the e-MPS function according to the keys explained in the following table. 

Table 7.50. CollateDetails Parameters 

Key Type Meaning Parameters default 

/Mode integer Job mode 0: HP Mopier mode/Job retention 0 

1: Volatile job 

2: Nonvolatile job 

8: VirtualMailbox job 

/Type integer Job Retention enable 8: Enable Job Retention — 

/Hold integer Job Retention mode 1: QuickCopy 

— 

2: Stored job 

3: Proof and Hold 

/HoldType integer Job Retention security 0: No security 

0 

1: Security with PIN code 

/HoldKey integer PIN code Number of 4 bytes — 

/Barcode integer Barcode output 0: Output on first page 

2 

1: Output on all pages 

2: Do not output 

/BarcodePosition integer Barcode printing position 0: Lower right (bar only) 

0 

(viewed in portrait 1: Lower right perpendicular (bar only) 

orientation) 

2: Upper right perpendicular (bar only) 

3: Upper right (bar only) 

4: Upper left (bar only) 

5: Upper left perpendicular (bar only) 

6: Lower left perpendicular (bar only) 

7: Lower left (bar only) 

128: Lower right (bar + ID) 

129: Lower right perpendicular (bar + ID) 

130: Upper right perpendicular (bar + ID) 

131: Upper right (bar + ID) 

132: Upper left (bar + ID) 

133: Upper left perpendicular (bar + ID) 

134: Lower left perpendicular (bar + ID) 

135: Lower left (bar + ID) 

/Share integer Share flag 0: Shared 

0 

1: Not shared 

/Name string Job name Character string up to 31 bytes maximum () 

/User string User name Character string up to 31 bytes maximum () 

/Time string Time stamp Character string up to 31 bytes maximum () 

/Destination array VMB destination — [] 

Programming with CollateDetails for Job Retention 

CollateDetails enables the printing system to implement the e-MPS Job Retention function 

in KPDL mode. The /Mode key must be set to true for all of these functions. The


keys to the CollateDetails parameter should have the following integer values depending 

on the mode of each e-MPS function. 

Table 7.51. Enabling e-MPS Functions 

e-MPS /Collate /CollateDetails > 

Examples: 

To post a print job into the virtual mailbox aliased Robert, a typical CollateDetails 

sequence of parameters will be as follows: 

setpagedevice 

KPDL Error Messages 

/Mode /Type /Hold /Hold- 

Type 

Electronic sorting true 0 0 

/HoldKey 

Temporary job storage true 1 

Permanent job storage true 2 

Virtual mailbox true 8 

QuickCopy true 0 8 1 0 

QuickCopy (Private) true 0 8 1 1 (1234) 

Proof and Hold true 0 8 3 

Stored job true 0 8 2 0 

Stored job—PIN secured true 0 8 2 1 (1234) 

Depending on the setting of the doautocontinue parameter, the printing systems having 

the operator display display errors occurring during operation in the KPDL mode as follows. 

KPDL Error ## 

.. Press ON LINE 

Any of the following error codes will appear if errors occur and doautocontinue is set to 

false. When doautocontinue is set to true, only error codes 00 and 98 are available. These 

error codes are also reported from the printer to the computer. Some software will display 

these error names on the computer screen. 

Table 7.52. KPDL Error Messages 

Code Error Meaning 

00 Cannot initiate KPDL 

01 dictfull Dictionary full; no new entries can be added 

02 dictstackoverflow Too many begins 

03 dictstackunderflow Too many ends 

04 execstackoverflow Execution stack nesting depth exceeded 250 

05 handle Name of error-reporting procedure 

06 interrupt Control-C was received 

07 invalidaccess Attempted violation of access attribute 

08 invalidexit Exit not enclosed in any loop 

09 invalidfile Invalid access string for file operator 

10 invalidfont Invalid font name or invalid font dictionary format 

11 invalidrestore Restore would destroy composite object created after save 

7-139


7-140 

Table 7.52. KPDL Error Messages 

Code Error Meaning 

12 ioerror Input/output error 

13 limitcheck Path too complex, more than 6 files open, etc. 

14 nocurrentpoint No current point is defined 

15 rangecheck Operand out of allowed range 

16 stackoverflow Operand stack overflow 

17 stackunderflow Operand stack underflow 

18 syntaxerror Syntax error in program 

19 timeout Time limit exceeded 

20 typecheck Wrong type of operand 

21 undefined Name not found in dictionary 

22 undefinedfilename File cannot be found 

23 undefinedresult Overflow, underflow, or meaningless result 

24 unmatchedmark Expected mark not found on stack 

25 unregister Internal error 

26 vmerror Virtual memory is exhausted, or illegal access was attempted 

27 badpassword Bad password 

28 invalidnumber Invalid number 

29 nomemory Memory unavailable 

30 configurationerror Setpagedevice request cannot be satisfied 

31 invalidcontext Improper use of context operation 

32 invalidid Invalid identifier for external object 

33 undefinedresource Resource instance not found 

98 fatal Fatal error (User memory exhausted) 

KPDL Printable Area 

This printing system does not quite print to the edges of the paper. The edge limits of the 

printable area vary depending on the paper type as determined by the paper type KPDL 

operator. The edge limits are located as shown in the following figure and table. They 

adjust automatically to the size of the paper cassette (although not to the size of manually 

fed paper).

Figure 7. 53. Printable Area 

Table 7.54. Paper Sizes and Printable Area 


Paper type Paper size Edge limits (A above) Printable area (B above) 

A3 a 

a For A3/ledger models. 

b For A4/letter models. 

Horizontal Vertical 

cm Points cm Pt. cm Pt. cm Pt. 

29.7 x 42.0 842 x 1191 0.42 12 0.35 10 28.85 x 41.31 818 x 1171 

B4 a 25.7 x 36.4 728 x 1032 0.42 12 0.35 10 24.83 x 35.70 704 x 1012 

A4 21.0 x 29.7 595 x 842 0.42 12 0.35 10 20.14 x 28.99 571 x 822 

A4 Small 21.0 x 29.7 595 x 842 0.875 25 0.875 25 19.22 x 27.94 545 x 792 

A5 14.8 x 21.0 421 x 595 0.42 12 0.35 10 14 x 20.28 397 x 575 

A6 10.5 x 14.8 297 x 421 0.42 12 0.35 10 9.63 x 14.14 273 x 401 

B5 18.2 x 25.7 516 x 729 0.74 21 0.35 10 16.72 x 25.01 474 x 709 

B6 12.8 x 18.2 364 x 516 0.42 12 0.35 10 11.99 x 17.49 340 x 496 

Int’l DL 11.0 x 22.0 312 x 624 0.42 12 0.35 10 10.16 x 21.3 288 x 604 

Int’l B5 17.6 x 25.0 499 x 708 0.42 12 0.42 12 16.75 x 24.13 475 x 684 

Int’l C4a 22.9 x 32.4 649 x 919 0.42 12 0.35 10 22.0 x 31.7 625 x 899 

Int’l C5 16.2 x 22.9 459 x 649 0.42 12 0.35 10 15.34 x 22.18 435 x 629 

Double-postcard 14.8 x 20.0 421 x 595b 0.42 12 0.49 14 14.00 x 20.00 397 x 567 

420 x 567a 0.35 10 0.35 10 14.11 x 19.30 400 x 547 

Postcard 10 x 14.8 297 x 421b 0.46 13 0.35 10 9.56 x 14.14 271 x 401 

283 x 420a 0.35 10 0.35 10 9.28 x 14.11 263 x 400 

Ledgera 11 x 17 792 x 1224 0.16 12 0.11 8 10.68 x 16.78 768 x 1208 

Legal 8.5 x 14 612 x 1008 0.16 12 0.11 8 8.18 x 13.78 588 x 992 

Letter 8.5 x 11 612 x 792 0.16 12 0.11 8 8.18 x 10.78 588 x 776 

Ltr Small 8.5 x 11 612 x 792 0.35 25 0.35 25 7.8 x 10.3 562 x 742 

Executive 7.25 x 10.5 522 x 756 0.16 12 0.11 8 6.93 x 10.28 498 x 740 

Com. #10 4.125 x 9.5 297 x 684 0.16 12 0.11 8 3.79 x 9.28 273 x 668 

Monarch 3.875 x 7.5 279 x 540 0.16 12 0.11 8 3.555 x 7.28 255 x 524 

Com. #6 3.625 x 6.5 261 x 468 0.16 12 0.11 8 3.29 x 6.28 237 x 452 

Com. #9 3.875 x 8.875 279 x 639 0.16 12 0.11 8 3.54 x 8.666 255 x 623 

Customa 11.7 x 17.7 842 x 1274 0.11 8 0.11 8 11.47 x 17.47 826 x 1258 

7-141

7-142 


Numerics 

16-bit word, 4-13 

A 

Absolute coordinates, 2-19 

Absolute position, 2-2 

Arc, 2-10 

path mode drawing, 2-24 

B 

Baseline, 1-8 

Beveled line join, 2-21 

Bézier curve, 2-26 

Binary number, 2-13, 4-13 

Bit image, 2-34 

Bitmap font, 4-6 

Bitmap fonts, 1-6, 4-6 

block, 2-10 

Box, 2-6 

Butt cap, 2-20 

C 

Cartesian (X,Y) coordinates, 2-5 

Case, 1-12 

exception, 1-13 

Cassette size, 1-4 

Character cells, 1-8 

Character path, 2-33 

Character set 

KC-GL, 7-96 

Character spacing, 1-8 

Character string, 1-11 

Check digit, 5-2 

Circle, 2-9 

Clipping a path, 2-16 

Clipping path, 2-32 

basic concept, 1-9 

Clipping rectangle, 2-32 

Closed path, 2-29 

Command name, 1-4 

Command parameter 

angle parameter, 1-11 

character string, 1-11 

numeric parameter, 1-10 

special parameters, 1-13 

Complex curves, 2-26 

Compressing raster data, 2-34 

Compression (SFNT), 4-8 

Control byte, 2-34 

Control codes 

Diablo 630, 7-14 

Epson LQ-850, 7-24 

HP LaserJet series, 7-49 

IBM Proprinter, 7-6 

Coordinates, 1-7, 1-9, 2-2 

Creating new symbols, 4-12 

Current path, 2-18 

Current position, 1-7 

Cursor, 1-7 

Cursor position, 2-2 

Curved line, 2-16 

Curves drawing in path mode, 2-24 

D 

Dash pattern, 2-23 

defining, 2-23 

user defined, 2-23 

Dash type, 2-22 

Dashed line, 2-22 

Decimal place, 1-11 

Default font, 4-2 

Destination image, 2-37 

Diablo 630 

character set, 7-16 

control code, 7-14 

emulation, 7-12 

Dot resolution, 2-34, 2-36 

Double-high printing, 7-5 

Double-strike printing, 7-5 

Double-wide fonts, 7-21 

Double-wide printing, 7-5 

Downloadable font, 4-2 

Dummy parameter, 3-3 

Dummy sign (macro), 3-2 

E 

EAN barcode, 5-4 

Edge limits, 1-4, 2-32 

Emulation, 7-1 

general, 7-3 

selection, 7-2 

transmission, 1-2 

Ending angle, 2-24 

Entry and Exit, 1-2 

Epson LQ-850 


Index 

i

control codes, 7-24 


Even-odd rule (FILL), 2-32 

F 

Fill pattern, 2-10 

defining, 2-12 

Filled area, 1-9, 2-30 

Filled block, 2-10 

Flag, 5-2 

Flatness of curves, 2-28 

Font 

characteristics, 4-9 

definition, 4-2 

identifying characteristics, 4-1 

selection, 4-7 

Font mode, 4-10, 7-22 

Font name, 4-6 

Font number 

assigning to a scalable font (SFNT), 4-8 

Font orientation, 4-9 

Font selection, 4-7, 7-35 

by embedded software commands, 4-12 

by PRESCRIBE, 4-7 

font selection commands, 4-7 

priority, 4-9 

Font selection command 

placement in a file, 4-11 

Footnote, 4-11 

FRPO parameters, 6-1 

G 

Graphics state, 2-39 

Gray scale, 2-16, 2-29, 2-30 

H 

HP LaserJet series 



font selection, 7-35 

printer commands, 7-49 

HP PCL 

language, 1-13 

HP-GL/2 

language, 1-6 

printer commands, 7-64 

Human-readable text (barcode), 5-3 

Human-readable text (macro), 5-2 

I 

IBM Proprinter 

ii 


control codes, 7-6 


Imaging model, 2-37 

International characters 

KC-GL, 7-109 

K 

KC-GL 

character sets, 7-107 

coordinates, 7-98 

default status, 7-114 

device control, 7-106 


instruction format, 7-96 

instructions (table), 7-111 

modes A and B, 7-98 

parameter format, 7-97 

pen selection, 7-99 

status information, 7-102 

KPDL, 4-4, 7-115 

L 

Line 

drawing, 2-2 

path mode, 2-18 

Line end (caps), 2-20 

Line join, 2-21 

Line join mode, 2-21 

Line printer emulation, 7-3 

Line width, 2-2 

Line-cap mode, 2-20 

Lines, 2-2 

relative, 2-4 

zero-relative, 2-3 

Logical page, 1-9 

M 

Margins, 1-4, 1-6, 2-2 

Memory card, 4-2 

Miter limit, 2-21 

values, 2-22 

Mitered line join, 2-21 

MSI barcode, 5-2 

N 

Native language, 1-1 

Notched line join, 2-21

O 

Origin, 1-7 

P 

Page direction, 1-5 

Page orientation, 1-5 

Path mode graphics, 2-16 

Pattern number, 2-22, 2-24 

Permanent parameters, 6-1 

Physical page, 1-9 

Pie charts, 2-14 

Plotter units, 7-100 

PRESCRIBE 

command length limit, 1-4 

format, 1-4 

Presentation mode, 2-36 

Print direction, 1-6 

Print model, 2-1 

Proportional fonts, 1-8 

Proportional spacing, 1-8 

Q 

Quotation marks, 1-11 

R 

Radius, 2-9, 2-15 

Raster data 

in taggged image file format, 2-34 

printing commands, 2-35 

run-length compressed, 2-34, 7-35 

uncompressed, 2-34 

Raster graphics, 2-34 

compression formats, 2-34 

Real number (KC-GL), 7-97 

Relative coordinates, 2-19 

Resident fonts, 4-2 

Roman Extension, 7-33 

Roman-8, 7-33, 7-37 

Roman-8 symbol set, 4-8 

Round cap, 2-20 

Round line join, 2-21 

Row-work, 2-13 

S 

Scalable font, 4-2 

assiging a font number to, 4-8 

lists, 4-2 

outline, 4-2 

Scaled real number (KC-GL), 7-97 

Scaling point (KC-GL), 7-101 

Short and tall parameters (barcode), 5-3 

Soft fonts, 4-2 

Source image, 2-37 

Spacing commands, 4-10 

Square cap, 2-20 

Standard graphics mode, 2-2 

Standard mode and path mode logical page, 1-9 

Starting angle, 2-15, 2-24 

Stroking a path, 2-16 

Subpath, 2-17 

basic concept, 1-9 

Superscripts & subscripts, 7-5 

Symbol set 

default selection, 7-37 

Symbol set (SFNT), 4-8 

T 

Tagged image file format (TIFF), 2-34, 7-35 

Text positioning, 1-7 

Thickness of lines, 2-3 

Tilt (SFNT), 4-8 

Transparency mode, 2-37 

Two’s comlement (TIFF), 2-35 

Typeface, 4-1 

U 

Unprintable area, 2-2 

Upper and lowercase letters, 1-12 

US ASCII, 7-3, 7-33 

US Legal, 7-3 

User unit (KC-GL), 7-100 

USPS (barcode), 5-2 

W 

Word-processing software, 1-5, 4-12, 7-1 

X 

X/Y (coordinates), 1-7 

Z 

Zero-relative coordinates, 2-24 

iii

Rev. 4.51 2008.6

Technical Reference - KYOCERA Document Solutions

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?